Home

EPD .Visualizer User Guide - John J. Jacobs

1. 2 4 EPD Visualizer User Guide Basic Features Light Management Light Management With EPD Visualizer you can define lights with independent direction and color You can specify directional point and spot lights as well as duplicate a light into a matrix of rows and columns You can also manage the overall lighting environment by setting the ambient lighting and brightness controls You can incorporate realism and enhance the quality of your 3D scene through the appropriate application and management of light colors The following features described in this section are found in the View menu e Specify type of light and color Lighting gt Editor e Set ambient lighting and overall brightness Lighting gt Environment Directional Lighting A directional light is infinitely far away from the objects it illuminates Its direction is defined by a simple vector that starts from the light source position you specify and passes through the origin 0 0 0 of your 3D scene All light rays from a directional light are parallel and uniformly illuminate all surfaces in your 3D scene regardless of location Color and direction determine the light characteristics of directional lighting Point Lighting A point light is like a tiny light bulb It occupies one point and radiates light equally in all directions Color and position not direction determine the characteristics of point lighting spot Lighting A spot light is
2. Applying Color to Components 5 5 Viewing Results Without Color 5 5 Displaying the Selected Object in Blue 5 5 5 5 Making Selected Objects Transparent Highlighting Colliding Components in EPD Connect Checking Against the Selection 5 6 Checking Options 5 6 Creating Secondary Selections 5 7 Setting Analysis Options 5 7 5 9 Reviewing the Results Viewing the Interferences 5 9 Obtaining a Report 5 10 5 10 Report Content Filing the Report 5 11 Sectioning About Sectioning Starting Your Sectioning Session Displaying the Main Sectioning Window Defining a Plane Positioning the Plane Orienting the Plane Defining by Points 6 6 Contents xii EPD Visualizer User Guide Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Getting Started 7 2 Displaying the Plane 7 3 Specifying the Size 7 3 Setting the Display Characteristics 7 4 Defining the Color 7 4 Clipping the Scene 7 5 Specifying the Thickness 7 5 Reversing the Normal Vector 7 5 Viewing the Plane 7 5 Sectioning the Scene 7 6 Displaying the Section in a Separate View 7 6 Mouse Behavior in the Section Window 7 8 View Options 7 9 Interference Checking 7 11 Setting a Proximity Tolerance 7 12 Setting a Contact Distance 7 13 Selecting the Objects To Be Sec
3. 000100000003313030 gt group 1 3 100 Il 0003000200000004626C75653 gt color 3 symbolic 2 4 blue be 000500000002 gt polygon section 5 2 Ol 000000000004400240000000000000000000 gt FP 0 4 10 0 0 0 0 0 Ol 400340000000000000000000 gt 20 0 0 0 0 0 400340004001400000000000 gt 20 0 5 0 0 0 400240004001400000000000 gt 10 0 5 0 0 0 EPD Visualizer User Guide EPD Visualizer Binary Graphic File Object Definition 00010000000740051A00C034e6663FFE0000 00000015000000040000000000000001000000020000000 3 004e 000C0240000C0140000 0056800C02e0000C0160000 003B333C024333300000000 002K0004003400040000000 00256664003833340003333 00240000000000000000000 0000000400000002000000030000000400000006 70 60 90 30 LSe 10 10 20 9 0 5 10 0 5 0 15 0 5 5 10 1 0 0 20 0 2 0 30 2 2 4 0 0 0 0 gt 214012 gt 4 23 4 6 000000050000000300000000000000020000000400000005 s5 3 0 2 4 FFFFFFFC00000002000000050000000300000000 _ gt 4 2 5 EPD Visualizer User Guide C 17 Appendix D Textual and Binary Graphic File Conversion This appendix describes the commands used to convert textual graphic files to binary graphic files and binary graphic files to textual graphic files These commands are the following e pvs_atob converts EPD Visualizer textual graphic files gaf
4. 1 10 Using the EPD Visualizer Window Graphics Window 1 11 Prompt and Status Windows 1 11 Palettes 1 11 Tool Palette and Other Palettes 1 12 Slider Scales 1 13 Text Editor 1 14 Menu Bar 1 14 Dialog Boxes 1 15 Text Box 1 15 Lists 1 15 Option Buttons 1 16 Tools 1 16 Buttons 1 16 File Selection Dialog Box 1 17 Slider Scale 1 18 Color Editor 1 19 Defining a New Color 1 19 Deleting a Color 1 20 Restoring a Deleted Color 1 20 Selecting or Verifying a Color 1 20 Permanent Mouse Dynamics 1 2 Screen Axis Motions 1 21 Behavior of Screen Axis Motions 1 22 Example of Screen Axis Motions 1 23 Model Axis Motions 1 26 Behavior of Model Axis Motions 1 26 Example of Model Axis Motions 1 27 Quick View Centering 1 28 Considerations 1 28 Starting an EPD Visualizer Session 1 29 Running EPD Visualizer 1 29 Adding Graphic Files or Opening Metafiles 1 29 Starting a New Session 1 29 Obtaining Session Information 1 30 Quitting EPD Visualizer 1 30 Contents vi EPD Visualizer User Guide Basic Features Display Controls 2 2 Rendering 2 2 Perspective Angle 2 3 Light Management 2 5 Directional Lighting 2 5 Point Lighting 2 5 Spot Lighting 2 5 Matrix Duplication of Lights 2 5 Ambient Lighting 2 6 Environmental Brightness 2 6 V
5. DBMS See Appendix A Database Interface Directional Light A directional light has its source at infinity and shines through the origin of your 3D scene All light rays from a directional light are parallel and uniformly illuminate all objects in your 3D scene regardless of location Double Buffering A rendering option that does not display the images on the graphics screen until after they have been completely rendered This dramatically reduces screen flickering Double Click Quickly press and release the SELECT mouse button twice Drag Hold down the SELECT mouse button and move the pointer across the screen Glossary 2 EPD Visualizer User Guide Glossary File Selection Box A special dialog box with controls for opening directories and selecting and opening files You can open directories by double clicking on the directory name or by selecting the directory name and clicking the Filter button The selected file appears in a text box below the directory list You can open a file by double clicking on the file name in the file list Flat Shading A rendering option that indicates all polygon faces are drawn as flat surfaces Geometry Units The unit type specified in a graphic file This unit type is applied to all geometry specified in the file Global Axes The axes whose orientation is always represented in the lower left corner of the Graphics Window also called Project Axes The origi
6. Idod Password Conneet Caneel Help Enter a valid user ID and password 2 Click Connect If the connection is not successful the following message displays Database connection failed This condition is often caused by invalid user ID and or password invalid database name or the Oracle or DBMS daemon not running If the connection is successful you can perform subsequent database operations such as object verification tagging and database query Disconnect To disconnect from the database select Database gt Disconnect Query Types Query types specify the type of data to be retrieved by the Verify tool You can define query types in a GAF file or with interactive commands For more information on gaf format refer to Appendix B EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File 3 86 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus Database Menu To define a new query type use the following steps 1 Select Database gt Query Types The Query Types dialog box displays Burry yous cares mc Lion Huw properlies purchasing Erdil scheduling Delete Lain Patt 2 Click New The Define Query Type dialog box displays 3 Enter a query type name 4 Click OK A new query type is defined To edit a query type click Edit The Edit Query Type dialog box displays the selected query type Click OK after you edit the query type To delete a query type click the query
7. Option Description Active Selection Sections all objects in the current selection Selection 2 Sections all objects in the secondary selection This option is only available if the secondary selection contains at least one object All Visible Sections all visible objects You need to initialize the secondary selection by copying the current selection to it To do this select Select gt Copy Sel gt Sel 2 from the menu bar in the EPD Visualizer window The contents of the secondary selection are cleared and the current selection is copied into it As long as it contains at least one object the secondary selection remains visible and colored in wheat Please note With sectioning enabled the section is regenerated each time you change the secondary selection EPD Visualizer User Guide 7 13 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Sectioning the Scene from Multiple References sectioning the Scene from Multiple References Sectioning a scene from multiple references allows you to display simultaneously multiple sections of the 3D scene created by a plane that moves to each reference You can attach an object to the sectioning plane Sectioning a scene from multiple references allows you to visually analyze interference between a dynamic object and static objects Sectioning a scene from multiple references indicates how the shape of a set of surfaces changes along a profile The topic Pat
8. Pulling up or down on the Spaceball causes selected objects to move up or down the vertical axis You can move objects along an xy axis by pushing or pulling the Spaceball in a direction defined by the axis display To zoom in or out push or pull the Spaceball towards or away from the screen Rezero the Spaceball by pressing Spaceball button 8 Spaceball buttons 5 and 6 decrease or increase the sensitivity of the Spaceball respectively 9 24 EPD Visualizer User Guide Apene Database Interface Visualizer has an SQL interface that enables you to connect to the Oracle Database Management System DBMS in addition to opening an ASCII database file This appendix provides information on how to create an ASCII database and construct object tables interfacing the DBMS The following topics are discussed e Creating an ASCII Database e DBMS SQL Interface e DBMS Demo After you create a database you can use it for the following purposes e Obtain detailed engineering data about an object using the Verify tool e Tag an object with the tag stored in the database file using the Object Tagging tool after selecting Database gt Tagging gt Automatic e Send SQL statements to select or edit data in DBMS tables Objects selected from the DBMS can be highlighted zoomed or added to the selection list EPD Visualizer User Guide A 1 Database Interface Creating an ASCII Database Creating an ASCII Database A database us
9. The following table shows the color type numbers and their corresponding values for color_attribute These numbers are 2 byte integers Table C 4 Color Type Number and their Values Color Type Number Value symbolic_color_type_number 2 literal_color_type_number 3 The following example shows a textual object definition section with a symbolic color attribute and a corresponding binary object definition section in hexadecimal notation Textual Object Definition OBJ object_id 2124343233 discipline structural group 100 color aquamarine END Binary Object Definition 000200020000000B2D32313234333433323333 gt 0BJ 2 object _id 2 a 11 2124343233 00000000000A7374727563747572616C gt discipline 0 10 structural 000100000003313030 gt group 1 3 100 000300020000000A617175616D6172696E65 gt color 3 symbolic 2 ee Ua a 10 aquamarine The following example shows a textual object definition section with a literal color attribute and a corresponding binary object definition section in hexadecimal notation Textual Object Definition OBJ object_id id _9823_t discipline drive_train group transmission color 0 5 0 6 0 7 END EPD Visualizer User Guide EPD Visualizer Binary Graphic File Object Definition Binary Object Definition 000200020000000969645F393832335F74 gt OBJ 2 object _id 2 ee at Sale 9 id_98
10. e Moving only local axes of selection relative to a surface when the Modify Local Axes in the Local Axes area is selected You select the To Face button and then make a selection in the graphics window e Moving the selection to explicit coordinates 3 26 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus Edit Menu You set the Coordinate System button to Global or Local to determine relative to which system rotation will occur Press the To Coordinates button The Move to Coordinates dialog box appears displaying the status Local or Global Local x Y i ri Position in vi Haiteien nm Enter the position or rotation specification or both and press the Apply button If all three values in a position or orientation specification are present the specification is considered absolute otherwise it is considered incremental An absolute rotation specification produces three separate rotations around the current global or local axes in the sequence around X around Y and last around Z You may find rotation easier to control with incremental specifications The Clear button removes specifications and provides an opportunity for changing between absolute and incremental modes Restoring Positions After Translation or Rotation To restore the initial state of objects or axes after motion press the following buttons in the Translate Rotate Selection List dialog box e Reset Position reverses translations e Reset
11. Help eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eee ee ee eee eee ee eee eee ee ee 1 Enter a path name up to 15 characters in the Path Name field If you are editing you can change the name of the path or Gpath to work on a copy 2 Set path color with the Color Editor Refer to Color Editor on page 1 19 3 Create a path point or reference either by digitizing or by entering the point position or offset directly in the Absolute XYZ Position field Path points appear in the Path Points scroll box in the path form and path references appear in the Path References scroll box in the Gpath form EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 31 Using EPD Visualizer Menus Edit Menu Select from the following tools to control how you define the Absolute XYZ Position field locations of path points or path references The tools also control the effect of the 3D locations that you select in the scene the DX DY and DZ incremental modes allow only the X Y or Z components of vectors to serve as specifications between path points or references e Position Definition Projection modes XYZ Absolute xyz location DXYZ Relative distance from the currently selected point along the XYZ axis For a selection made in the 3D scene this mode is identical to XYZ mode DX Relative distance from the currently selected point along the X axis When you select this mode the new point changes only in the X value Y and Z values remain cons
12. cectian Color i tra pinecxbloe 5 5 appz jallce hike i ae a antleue_ whi tie aquamarine i Select Fath Sel Het a Close k i Apply Help f EPD Visualizer User Guide 7 17 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Sectioning the Scene from Multiple References The following steps specify multiple sectioning 1 Select a Gpath You can click on a path in the Goaths Names scrolling list or press the Select Path button and select a Gpath in the graphics window If the Gpath has not been used in a multiple sectioning process its settings are defaults all references are active and a different color is assigned to each section If the Gpath has been used in a multiple sectioning process all its settings conferred for that process are restored Selecting a Gpath places all its references in the References list with a number located at the left side of each reference Gpaths Names orig E rot E trajpincexbloc T L 2 Modify the Active References field Active references are those to which the dynamic object and its linked plane move Numbers that appear on the left side of active references in the References list are represented in the Active References area You can control whether a reference is active by clicking on it in the References list and selecting the Active button in the Individual Reference Setting area References log o Individual Reference Sett
13. END DEFINE OBJECT OBJECT TYPE PLFITTING DEFINE FIELD SUBMODEL 45 72 DEFINE FIELD ESID 89 94 DEFINE FIELD NPS1 95 102 DEFINE FIELD NPS2 103 110 DEFINE FIELD NPS3 111 118 DEFINE FIELD NPS4 119 126 DEFINE FIELD SPEC MCC 127 138 DEFINE FIELD DESC 139 162 DEFINE FIELD MATERIAL 163 178 DEFINE FIELD Stock _id 179 190 DEFINE FIELD LINE_NO 191 222 DEFINE AUTO TAG OBJECT TYPE DEFINE AUTO TAG LINE NO END DEFINE OBJECT OBJECT TYPE SLLOBJECT DEFINE FIELD SUBMODEL 45 72 DEFINE FIELD ESID 89 94 DEFINE FIELD ITEMNAME 95 106 DEFINE FIELD LENGTH 107 114 DEFINE FIELD SHAPE 115 138 DEFINE FIELD STOCK_ID 139 150 DEFINE FIELD SDESC 151 162 DEFINE FIELD LDESC 163 226 DEFINE AUTO TAG SDESC END DEFINE OBJECT OBJECT TYPE SLPOBJECT EPD Visualizer User Guide A 5 Database Interface Creating an ASCII Database j H pa E_ FIELD E_ FIELD E_FIELD E_ FIELD E FIELD E_ FIELD E_FIELD E_ FIELD mj mj j HHH 22424 Hy j H H Z zZ D O O O U Tg w a A A a ee j j H H Z Z j H pa END DEFINE OBJECT OBJECT_TYPE DEFINE FIELD DEFINE FIELD DEFINE FIELD END DEFINE_OBJECT OBJECT_TYPE E_ FIELD E_ FIELD E_FIELD E_FIELD E_ FIELD E_ FIELD E_ FIELD E_ FIELD E_ FIELD FIELD FIELD mj mj Sj mj j HHHHH 42222424 mj mj j HHH 22424 GG ay a
14. fusersieyp sata qa Dirrechorins US CPSC ps dat ee Braplaic Pile Lowdiog Coulruls J OVervHite suBIeBte ile J ae all sted ies J coom to SL extents J Convert Shella to tak polygons J TY als la verde J Check bor concit polygons Selec lion Fuse rates salle ert age Add Flt Clase Help 2 Set the following Graphic File Loading Controls options as necessary e Overwrite Duplicate Files Add a graphic file that is currently displayed in the 3D scene overwriting the one already displayed e Zoom to 3D Extents Add several graphic files and display them in full view within the limits of the coordinates of the objects e Y Axis is Vertical In EPD Visualizer the vertical orientation is based on the z up coordinate system If your graphic files were created based on a y up coordinate system select this option EPD Visualizer automatically converts y up graphic files to z up EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 5 Using EPD Visualizer Menus File Menu e Add All Listed Files You can add all of the files in the listing by selecting this option A status box displays the following information Total number of files to be added The number of the file being processed Number of files added Number of files with errors e Convert Shells to Flat Polygons To increase the rendering speed of the 3D scene select this option to display all shell polygons as flat polygons e Check f
15. 3 62 deleting 3 63 displaying interactive playback 3 64 displaying time delay playback 3 65 editing sequence names 3 63 playback 2 7 rearranging 3 63 Visibility controlling 2 13 Visualizer features 1 3 overview 1 6 querying 2 11 quitting 1 30 3 13 starting 1 29 Visualizer movie player executing G 2 quitting G 6 Visualizer window customizing 1 11 parts of 1 11 VS_CLIENT_FILE environment variable H 6 W Walk through palette purpose 9 15 Wire frame description 2 2 Working units changing 3 74 defining 2 11 X XIDPTR Extended Identification Pointer description A 8 example A 8 verifying A 9 Y YMIRFLAG environment variable H 6 Z Zones creating 4 2 description 4 2 purpose 4 2 setting environment variables for 4 3 storing 4 3 Index 8 EPD Visualizer User Guide
16. Selected Items or References You can control the size of references revealed by the Edit gt Show gt References operation by specifications in the Path Router dialog box The Edit gt Hide All operation displays a menu that enables you to hide all objects paths references lights or text If you want to show the hidden items on the selection list you can select Edit gt Show Edit gt Show All displays a menu that enables you to restore visibility of hidden objects paths references lights or text The size of references revealed by the Edit gt Show All gt References operation is set automatically Deleting Items To permanently delete items add items to be deleted to the selection list and select Edit gt Delete EPD Visualizer User Guide 2 13 Basic Features Item Editing Translating and Rotating Items The move and rotate features enable you to experiment by making changes to your 3D scene including checking for new interferences caused by your modifications You can also simulate construction and assembly operations involving movement of items in the 3D scene Item Dynamics on page 3 15 explains how to translate and rotate items You can change the position and orientation of items on the selection list by selecting Edit gt Item Dynamics gt Translate Rotate or cause the items to traverse a predefined path by selecting Edit gt Item Dynamics gt Traversal spatial Orientation The possible dire
17. Set Camera 3 77 Measure Distance 3 78 Zone Definition 3 78 Normals 3 78 Select Menu 3 79 Selection Masks 3 79 Selection Set Editor 3 80 Build Selection List 3 8 Copy Selection to Secondary Selection 3 82 Deselect All 3 82 Clear Secondary Selection 3 83 Highlight Selection 3 83 Contents x EPD Visualizer User Guide Database Menu 3 84 Connect 3 84 ASCII 3 84 DBMS 3 86 Disconnect 3 86 Query Types 3 86 Selection Keys 3 88 Substitution Variables 3 88 Query Database 3 90 Select a Query from a File 3 91 Select a Query From DBMS 3 92 Query Database Data 3 93 Save a DBMS Report 3 94 Manual or Automatic Tagging 3 95 Interference Checking Menu 3 96 Sectioning Menu 3 97 Online Help Menu 3 98 On Help 3 98 On Context 3 98 On General 3 98 On Glossary 3 99 On Environment 3 99 On Release Notes 3 99 Constructing Zones About Zones 4 2 Environment Variables You Need to Set 4 3 Creating Your Zone Definition 4 4 Creating a Box Zone 4 4 Corners Box Type 4 6 Radius Box Type 4 6 Selection List 4 7 Creating a Cylinder Zone 4 7 EPD Visualizer User Guide Contents xi Interference Checking About Interference Checking 5 2 Starting Interference Checking 5 3 Setting Up an Interference Checking Session 5 4 Turning On or Off Item Dynamics 5 4 Coloring and Highlighting Colliding Components
18. Visualizer more effectively and increase your productivity e Display Controls e Light Management e View Processing e Selecting Items e Verification e Item Editing e Traversal e Interference Checking e Text e Accessing Online Help EPD Visualizer User Guide 2 1 Basic Features Display Controls Display Controls This section describes the aesthetic changes you can make to control rendering and enhance the realistic effect of your 3D scene The graphic display controls described in this section are found in the View menu Rendering EPD Visualizer enables you to generate realistic looking 3D scenes with a combination of material properties lighting and several rendering methods How do you choose which rendering method to use It depends on the type of 3D scene you want to create In the rendering of part of a production process for example light shadow and reflection can provide important information In the rendering of an underwater scene too much light and reflection can be distracting Please note Radiosity and ray tracing are very memory intensive which limits their use on larger 3D scenes Rendering methods available in EPD Visualizer include Wire Frame Displays all surface edges of the 3D scene as lines It displays all lines in the model whether or not those lines are visible to the viewer Hidden Line Displays a solid view of the 3D scene with black polygon edges The polygon fac
19. and SYSTEM 9 models or parts using the interfaces documented in the following appendixes e Appendix E DIMENSION III Interface e Appendix F CADDS Interface These interfaces generate a neutral graphic file format either textual or binary and are documented in Appendix B EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File and Appendix C EPD Visualizer Binary Graphic File With these graphic files you can effectively merge models from several CAD systems enabling you to explore and visualize complete 3D scenes In addition to the exploration aspects of EPD Visualizer you can also perform interference studies and produce reports access external database information and capture views for printing and viewing outside of EPD Visualizer EPD Visualizer User Guide 1 5 Introduction to EPD Visualizer Basic Concepts Figure 1 1 shows an overview of EPD Visualizer and how you can process and manage information Figure 1 1 EPD Visualizer Overview 7 Pera Mental stem iere Geghi Queries Objects and Items In EPD Visualizer the term object refers to the design geometry that you import from your CAD system The term item refers to something that is part of your 3D scene within EPD Visualizer As Figure 1 2 shows items can include objects paths lights and text or annotation Figure 1 2 Relationship Among Items in EPD Visualizer 1 6 EPD Visualizer User Guide Introduction to E
20. description 2 21 dynamic 2 17 item traversal overview 2 20 purpose 3 96 5 2 reporting the results 5 10 reviewing the results 5 9 setting up your session 5 4 starting 5 3 using a secondary selection 3 82 using with sectioning 7 11 Items definition of 1 6 deleting 2 13 how to rotate 3 23 how to translate 3 23 overview of moving 2 14 overview of rotating 2 14 traversing paths and Gpaths 3 18 EPD Visualizer User Guide Index 3 Index L Lights defining 3 51 3 53 deleting 3 59 editing 3 57 kinds 3 51 managing 2 5 setting brightness 2 6 Linear movement 1 9 Lists scrolling 1 15 selecting multiple entries 1 16 Local Axes Verification dialog box 3 25 Local CPL toggle button 3 22 M Main window 1 11 Material definitions attributes B 10 defining B 10 Material properties assigning 3 37 creating 3 36 defining 2 17 deleting 3 38 description 3 35 editing 3 38 Measuring distance between a point and section 7 24 between an endpoint and section 7 25 between graphics files 2 12 between items 9 8 between objects 2 12 between two endpoints 7 23 between two points 7 21 between two sections 7 26 considerations 7 27 from camera to item 9 8 from camera to object 2 11 in sections 2 12 7 20 Menu bar description 1 14 displaying items 1 14 using 1 14 Metafile description 1 7 3 4 opening 1 29 3 4 saving 3 8 saving primary view 3 41 saving selection sets 2 10 3 79 3 80 saving views 3 60 Model axi
21. purchasing and scheduling personnel as well as subcontractors can access entire 3D scenes or portions of interest with minimal instruction EPD Visualizer Features After converting your CAD models to a EPD Visualizer textual or binary graphic file and adding the graphics in EPD Visualizer you can perform the following functions e Defining paths that include orientation specifications through CAD models e Traversing either the camera or an object such as a person crane or forklift on paths to simulate a construction or maintenance sequence including an animated movie sequence e Traversing an object on paths to check collisions e Sectioning a model with a static plane e Traversing a sectioning plane with or without an attached object on a path and displaying the resulting sections simultaneously EPD Visualizer User Guide 1 3 Introduction to EPD Visualizer What Is EPD Visualizer e Measuring distances in sections with dimensioning tools e Defining a sequence of views including annotations for animated playback or later presentation or editing e Displaying database information about an object in the 3D scene for ongoing maintenance to reduce off site inspection and data gathering trips e Resolving potential conflicts using interference checking before construction or assembly begins e Evaluating spatial requirements by moving and orbiting in any direction to view the 3D scene from every angle and zo
22. selection list After you modify the local axes of a selection list you can save them as a Selection set along with the items on the selection list with the Selection Set Editor If the selection list was previously saved as a selection set you must save it again under a new name in order to keep the modified axes Translation The Translate Rotate option enables you to specify a distance on a slider scale and choose a direction along which to move the target You can control the direction in which the selection list moves in a single translation by adjusting the orientation of the local coordinate system You also have the option of moving the target in successive translations along different global coordinate directions Text is translated in the same way as other items however text cannot be rotated If you select an object that has been tagged with text the text is selected along with the geometric object You can tag an object with text either manually or automatically with the Object Tagging tool EPD Visualizer User Guide 2 15 Basic Features Item Editing Rotation The Translate Rotate option enables you to specify an angle on a slider scale and choose an axis about which to rotate the target You can rotate the selection list about one of the global axes or one of the local axes depending on which one you select as the Active Coordinate System In either case the axis of rotation passes through the origin of the local
23. specular highlights reflections or refraction Radiosity produces view independent images as opposed to ray tracing which produces transient pixel based images e Ray Tracing Displays reflections and refractions in the 3D scene Ray tracing traces beams of light from the target back to the light source taking into account reflections mirroring transparency shadows and refraction It does not handle matte or diffusely reflecting surfaces Ray tracing produces transient pixel based images To see a new view of a scene you must generate the ray tracing operation again Please note Because ray tracing is pixel based and uses a lot of computer resources you might want to keep window sizes small when performing ray tracing operations Perspective Angle You can increase or decrease your viewing area the same way you might see a scene differently through various camera lenses such as a wide angle lens The Perspective option enables you to change the perspective view of the 3D scene The value shown on the Perspective Angle slider scale represents the angle that exists from the camera position to the 3D scene As you increase the perspective angle the viewing area widens and the view of the scene changes accordingly EPD Visualizer User Guide 2 3 Basic Features Display Controls Figure 2 1 shows how perspective is measured from the camera position to the 3D scene Figure 2 1 Perspective Angle Camera Position
24. to binary graphic files gbf e pvs_btoa converts EPD Visualizer binary graphic files gaf to textual graphic files gbf The options include converting the model from y up to z up vertical orientation specifying the output file name and silencing the conversion report on standard error Formats for path Gpath light and material definitions are not supported for binary graphic files A summary of any unconverted data is provided after the command is complete The following conventions are used for options in command syntax e No Brackets Must be used once and cannot be repeated e Square Brackets Optional information that can only be used once e Braces Items listed in braces are exclusive only one can be used Please note Items within braces might or might not be required according to bracket no bracket conventions EPD Visualizer User Guide D 1 Textual and Binary Graphic File Conversion Syntax The following is the syntax format for pvs_atob and pvs_btoa pvs_atob s y o lt file name gt lt source file name gt pvs_btoa s y o lt file name gt lt source file name gt The following list explains the options from the preceding format e s Silence the conversion report on standard error e y Convert the model from y up to z up vertical orientation e o Specify the output file name The following should be taken into consideration with this syntax
25. 2 Create a secondary selection by copying the current selection to it Deselect All Clear all items Clear Selection 2 Clear the secondary selection Highlight Selection Turn on or off highlighting of selected items You can create selection sets consisting of items that you add to a selection list with either the Select tool or by selecting Build Selection List You can save selection sets with a metafile Selection Masks Before you create a selection list set the selection mask to specify graphics files disciplines groups or items by selecting Select gt Selection Masks After you select an item in your 3D scene all masked items are added to the selection list You can set one of the following options The default setting is Graphics File Graphics File After you select an object in your 3D scene the graphics file is added to the selection list Disciplines After you select an object in the 3D scene all objects within the same discipline are added to the selection list For example if you select a piece of pipe all piping components belonging to the same discipline are added to the selection list Groups After you select an object in the 3D scene all objects in the same group are added to the selection list Item After you select an item in your 3D scene only that item is added to the selection list EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 79 Using EPD Visualizer Menus Select Menu Selec
26. 2 Click Yes to return to the operating system prompt or click No to continue with your current session EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 13 Using EPD Visualizer Menus Edit Menu Edit Menu By selecting Edit on the menu bar you can access the following menu items e Show Show hidden items or references of selected Gpaths e Hide Hide selected items unselected items or references of selected Gpaths e Show All Show all objects paths Gpaths references attached to Gpaths lights or text e Hide All Hide all objects paths Gpaths references attached to Gpaths lights or text e Item Dynamics Translate rotate or move items along a path modify reference point local axes or perform multiple sectioning from Gpath references e Path Editor Generate path segments within a 3D scene e Visual Properties Define color and material properties for items e Text Properties Define and edit text properties e Delete Delete items Show To show hidden items on the selection list select Edit gt Show gt Selected Items To show the references of Gpaths on the selection list select Edit gt Show gt References You can set the size of the displayed references in the Path Router dialog box Hide You can hide items or references of selected Gpaths To hide items on the selection list select Edit gt Hide The items remain hidden until you select Edit gt Show or Edit gt Show All After you h
27. 3 39 Textual graphic file adding 3 5 color definition B 7 contents B 2 control options B 4 conversion to binary file D 1 converting to a binary file 1 7 DBMS control options B 5 description 1 7 example c 15 extents definition B 6 format B 3 Gpath definitions B 13 Gpath multiple sectioning B 19 light definitions B 8 material definitions B 10 object definitions B 14 path definitions B 12 removing 3 7 size limitation B 2 Tool Palette description 1 12 9 2 Translate Rotate Selection List dialog box 3 23 Translation how to translate selections 3 23 interference checking 2 17 overview 2 15 purpose 3 22 restoring position 3 27 text 2 15 Traversal camera traversal overview 2 19 camera traversal performing 3 66 Options 3 20 overview 2 19 paths contrasted to Gpaths 3 16 EPD Visualizer User Guide Index 7 Index purpose 2 16 traversing items on Gpaths 3 18 traversing items on paths 3 18 Tree Select and Scroll tool 9 5 Turn Orbit Palette description 9 19 purpose 1 12 V Variables environment help on 2 23 Verification information obtaining A 14 Verifying a point 7 28 View centering 1 28 changing 3 43 concept of viewing 1 9 defining 3 61 deleting 3 61 displaying all 3 42 displaying primary view 3 41 editing view name 3 61 managing 3 60 perspective 3 45 perspective angle 2 3 Primary view 2 7 rendering 3 46 saving 2 7 separate view of section 7 6 setting 2 7 View sequence adding to 3 63 defining 2 7
28. Break Polyline at new Object Id With this option enabled several objects belonging to the same graphic file will produce several polylines in the ga file Each polyline will belong to a single object of the sectioned graphic file By default saving a section may generate a single polyline for several contiguous objects belonging to the same graphic file Chaining maximum gap EPD Visualizer uses the gap value to merge the segments of the section into continuous polylines If there is a hole greater than the gap a new polyline is opened Click the Save button to manually generate the gaf file The section if one exists is written to the file according to the options you select EPD Visualizer User Guide 7 31 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Saving a Section Output File Format The text gaf file that is generated when you save a section has the following format GRAPHICS FILE CONTROL OPTIONS unit The unit is defined from the Options gt Preferences ENDmenu Working Unit EXTENTS MMI eS ieee Villans ses The extents are not provided if several sections CMA St e aia are saved in the same graphic file xMax ymax zmax sesase END Desc of section 1 gt A Desc of section 2 gt A N EAT lt Desc of section n gt END Description of a Section A section description shown as Desc of section n in previous example fo
29. File Selection dialog box any concave polygon is converted into a set of triangles See Adding Textual or Binary Graphics Files on page 3 5 PVS_CADDS_COLORS PVS_CADDS_COLORS specifies the name of a text file associating colors and layers to which EPD Visualizer refers when reading a tesselated data file The file has the following format LAYER COLOR The elements of the format have the following characteristics e LAYER is 0 254 as a layer list without spaces for example 1 20 50 73 90 100 e COLOR is number of a cadds color 1 65 If color file is not specified or does not exist the selection is the default color 1 white An example file is provided in usr ap1 nav data explorer EPD Visualizer User Guide H 5 Environment Variables EPD Visualizer EPD Connect Communication EPD Visualizer EPD Connect Communication The following environment variables configure EPD Visualizer EPD Connect communication CVDPA_USE_MIRFLAG CVDPA_USE_MIRFLAG controls whether EPD Visualizer is able to load components with a symmetry flag in addition to translation and rotation specifications If the variable is set to any value the EPD Visualizer is able to load components in response to EPD Connect requests with the X Y Z AX AY AZ and YMIRFLG parameters defined in the communication file If the CVDPA_USE_MIRFLAG variable is not set only X Y Z AX AY AZ are used in loading the files YMIRFLAG is a field in the LOAD
30. Following the control_options_section_number is the control_options_specifications Each specification is preceded by an option specification number Currently the only information allowed in this section is the geometry unit specification therefore the number_of_options is equal to 1 The format for the geometry units for control_options_specifications is the following unit_attribute_number unit_type In this format unit attribute number is a 2 byte integer equal to 6 Following the unit_attribute_number is the unit_type Table C 2 shows the values corresponding to the unit types Table C 2 Unit Type Values Unit Type Value a mils inches feet yards miles millimeters centimeters decimeters meters O OINI AJOIN kilometers EPD Visualizer User Guide C 3 EPD Visualizer Binary Graphic File Control Options The following examples show a textual control options section and a corresponding binary control options section in hexadecimal notation Textual Control Options CONTROL_OPTIONS unit inches END Binary Control Options 00030000000100060002 gt CONTROL OPTIONS 3 1 unit 6 inches 2 C 4 EPD Visualizer User Guide EPD Visualizer Binary Graphic File Extents Definition Extents Definition The extents definition section is optional If provided this section must appear before any sections where geometry is defined
31. If the plane has to fit the scene s extents the center position is computed and displayed Otherwise the position you provide is used as the new planes center You can use three buttons XO YO ZO to set the corresponding value to 0 EPD Visualizer User Guide 6 5 Sectioning Defining a Plane Orienting the Plane The three numeric fields J K permanently indicate the direction of the normal vector of the plane You can modify any value by typing a new one or by digitizing a new vector When you click the Apply button the normal vector is unified and the plane s orientation corresponds with the new values Three buttons X Y Z give you direct access to the X Y or Z axis Defining by Points Three buttons with icons allow you to define a plane by digitizing vertices in the scene The X Y and Z values are updated after you select the first vertex The I J and K values are updated after you select the last vertex The plane is updated when you click the Apply button The three iconized buttons are described in the following table Use this Button To perform this action Define a plane by digitizing three vertices The first vertice is the new origin of the plane The two other vertices are contained in the plane The X Y Z J and K values are updated after you select the third position Define a plane by its origin and a point on the normal vector Define a plane by its origin a
32. Indicates the Bourne shell prompt on command root lines gt gt copy filename Indicates the MS DOS prompt on command lines Keystrokes Return or Control g Indicates the keys to press on a keyboard xxii EPD Visualizer User Guide Preface Online User Documentation Online documentation for each Optegra book is provided in HTML if the documentation CD ROM is installed You can view the online documentation from an HTML browser or from the HELP command You can also view the online documentation directly from the CD ROM without installing it From an HTML Browser 1 Navigate to the directory where the documents are installed For example EPD_HOME data html htmldoc UNIX EPD_HOME data html1 htmldoc Windows NT 2 Click mainmenu html A list of available Optegra documentation appears 3 Click the book title you want to view From the HELP Command To view the online documentation for your specific application click HELP Consult the documentation specific to your application for more information From the Documentation CD ROM 1 Mount the documentation CD ROM 2 Point your browser to CDROM_mount_point htmldoc mainmenu html UNIX CDROM_Drive htmldoc mainmenu html1 Windows NT Printing Documentation A PDF Portable Document Format file is included on the CD ROM for each online book See the first page of each online book for the document number referenced in the PDF file name Check with your system a
33. Materials With this option you can assign properties to the surfaces in your 3D scene Material properties can include the following Base Color The color or non color of a surface or material Mirror Reflectance The reflective nature of a material Wood for example is non reflective whereas chrome is highly reflective Transparency The degree of transparency of a 2D surface Specular Hue The color of the reflection of the material Metallic materials typically have colored specular reflections while non metallic materials typically have specular reflections in shades of black and white Specular Intensity The intensity of a reflection Dull surfaces appear matted or flat due to the scattering effect of the light after hitting a surface Shiny surfaces appear hard and polished due to the strong directional component of reflected light Specular Glare The focus of specular highlights off a surface from light sources A material with high specular glare produces a small focused shiny spot on curved surfaces a material with low specular glare produces a shiny spot that is broader and more scattered EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 35 Using EPD Visualizer Menus Edit Menu To create a new material property use the following steps 1 Select Edit gt Visual Properties gt Surface Materials The following figure shows the Material Selection dialog box Material Properties 2 Click New and the M
34. New Session begins a new session the view representation mode resets according to the PVS_ORTHO_MODE environment variable e If the PVS_ORTHO_MODE environment variable is not set or is set to zero the Perspective mode is selected e Ifthe PVS_ ORTHO_MODE environment variable is set to a non zero value the Orthographic mode is selected Click the Close button to cancel the operation and menu secondary Views You can create two secondary views as smaller versions of the main view Secondary views are useful for viewing dynamics Entity selection is supported only in the main view To create a secondary view select View gt Secondary Views gt Create By default EPD Visualizer scales the secondary views at one quarter width of the main view To customize the default secondary view scale set the PVS_SECOND_VIEW_SIZE environment variable in the range from 0 1 to 0 5 The scale factor is relative to the width of the main view in the graphics Window Refer to PVS_SECOND_VIEW_SIZE on page H 3 for further information about this environment variable To manipulate the upper of the two secondary views select View gt Secondary Views gt Upper View then proceed as you would for the main view Select Lower View to manipulate the lower view and Main View to return to manipulating the main view You can display an orientation box around the secondary views to visually orient the views to their position relative to the main view
35. Orientation reverses rotations The effects of the Reset Position button and the Reset Orientation button depend on the state of the Modify Axes Only and Use Local CPL buttons e Modify Axes Only inactive Local axes of all objects in the selection list are rotated to match the global axes The same motion applies to the axes of all objects in the list e Modify Axes Only active Local axes of all objects in the selection list are rotated to match the global axes but the objects do not move e Use Local CPL inactive Local axes receive their new orientations from the global axes e Use Local CPL active The current orientation of the selection is applied to the local axes EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 27 Using EPD Visualizer Menus Edit Menu Path Editor The Path Editor enables you to generate paths and Gpaths within a 3D scene Sectioning planes objects and the camera can traverse paths sectioning planes and objects can traverse Gpaths You can define any number of paths or Gpaths in a EPD Visualizer session Each path or Gpath must have a unique name and an assigned color A path is defined by a collection of points defined by three floating point values that represent an X YZ location The points are considered to exist in a sequence and following that sequence describes a series of line segments The meeting of two such line segments is called a vertex An object or section plane can move along such a pa
36. PVS_UNNAMED_REF H 8 PostScript Output H 9 PVS_PRINT_COMMAND H 9 PVS_PRINT_FACTOR H 9 Section Plane H 10 PVS_SECTION_AXIS H 10 CVDPA_SECTIONS_DIR H 10 EPD Visualizer User Guide Contents xix Zoning H 1 CVDPA_ZONES_DIR H 11 CVDPA_SPACING H 11 Selecting Scrolling and Running a Report H 12 PVS SELECI SCROLL REP H 12 CA_ENV_REPORT H 12 Glossary Contents xx EPD Visualizer User Guide Preface The EPD Visualizer User Guide describes how to perform the following tasks with the EPD Visualizer Converting graphics files from a variety of formats into Visualizer textual graphic file format Assembling CAD models from Visualizer textual graphic files Adjusting lighting and surface effects Visually entering CAD models and making movies that you can play back later Performing static sectioning and interference checking Defining paths that include orientation specifications through CAD models Moving objects and sectioning planes on paths through CAD models to perform dynamic interference checking and sectioning Related Documents The following documents may be helpful as you use EPD Visualizer User Guide Installing EPD Visualizer EPD Connect User Guide EPD Visualizer User Guide Xxi Preface Book Conventions The following table illustrates and explains conventions used in writing about Optegra applications Convention Example Explanation EPD_HOME cd E P
37. Set the following options as necessary Focus Option e Horizontal Lock The focus of the camera maintains a horizontal orientation regardless of the direction the path takes e Along Path The focus of the camera remains on the path The focus maintains a horizontal orientation when the path direction is horizontal it switches to a vertical orientation when the path direction is vertical e Fixed Point The focus of the camera remains on a fixed point EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 67 Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu e Fixed Direction The focus of the camera remains on a fixed direction x e Ng y Aa bh BY amp In the Traversal Method field set the following e Interactive Manually step along the path At any time you can reverse direction and view your previous position on the path e Time Delay Automatically traverse the path with the Time Delay slider scale to set the number of seconds to delay between each step If the Movie Recorder is turned on with this method movie images are generated for the traversal sequences Camera Offset Set the offset of the camera position as it traverses along a path by setting the DX DY and DZ slider scales a Click Set Options and the Camera Traversal Options dialog box displays Step Size Focus Polnt Wey Dlr etla r a of o al Lum Angie fh 3 68 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu b S
38. Viewing tool enables you to change your view orientation using the mouse In addition to the Walk Through buttons you can use the mouse to change your view orientation based on the specified target camera or 3D scene Each time you move the mouse a specific number of pixels the display repaints The target and pixel number are specified in Preferences in the Options menu During all orbit or move operations the status window indicates the distance or the number of degrees the mouse has moved Once you release the mouse button this number is reset to zero To set Options gt Preferences use the following steps 1 Specify the target with one of the following options e Camera Moves the camera position in the direction of the mouse pointer e Scene Moves the 3D scene in the direction of the mouse pointer The camera remains stationary 2 Specify the number of pixels in the Threshold slider scale To orbit right left over and under use the following steps This function is equivalent to the Orbit Left Orbit Right Orbit Over and Orbit Under buttons on the Turn Orbit Palette It orbits the position of the camera or the EPD Visualizer User Guide 9 9 Palettes Tool Palette 3D scene to the left right over or under the vertical axis of the 3D scene To use the mouse to orbit the camera or the 3D scene follow these steps 1 2 Click the tool and move the pointer into the graphics window Hol
39. a type of point light You can specify a sharp edged spot light a variable focus flashlight or a fuzzy edged flood light Color position target illumination angle and edge sharpness attributes determine the characteristics of spot lighting Matrix Duplication of Lights EPD Visualizer enables you to duplicate selected point spot rectangular and circular lights in a matrix of rows and columns This option is not available for directional lights EPD Visualizer User Guide 2 5 Basic Features Light Management Ambient Lighting Ambient light is a diffuse background lighting radiating from all directions Using ambient lighting with directional lighting results in a softer atmosphere With ambient lighting all planar surfaces in the 3D scene are illuminated This enables you to examine objects that might be difficult to view in low lighting conditions Environmental Brightness You can control the overall intensity of lights in your 3D scene by setting the Environment Brightness slider scale This scale adjusts all lights including ambient lighting ranging from Dim to Bright 2 6 EPD Visualizer User Guide Basic Features View Processing View Processing This section briefly describes views and the viewing capability of EPD Visualizer You can show and set the primary view view all objects save views and notes and define and play back view sequences The menu items described are located in View on the men
40. allocate all colors EPD Visualizer User Guide EPD Visualizer Movie Player Loading a Movie The movie loads and plays successfully however all colors do not display as originally created When this occurs exit the movie player quit some of your color intensive applications and restart the movie player This action should free the color table for your hardware On UltraSPARC it might be your desktop environment CDE that is the most color intensive In this case switch to the OpenWindows environment EPD Visualizer User Guide G 5 EPD Visualizer Movie Player Quitting pvsmovie Quitting pvsmovie To quit pvsmovie select File gt Quit Playing a Movie To play a movie sequence use the following steps 1 Load in a movie file Refer to Loading a Movie on page G 4 for instructions on loading a movie 2 Set the following options as necessary Delay The delay between each frame in milliseconds Starting Frame The number of the first frame to display Ending Frame The number of the last frame to display Current Frame The number of the current frame displayed Repeat Repeat the sequence when finished Reverse When repeating a sequence run the movie in reverse from the last frame to the first frame 3 Click Start to play the movie sequence 4 Click the following buttons as necessary Pause When Repect is set you can click Pause to temporarily pause at the current frame R
41. any time whether or not a tool is active by clicking the middle or left mouse button A second click on either of these buttons disables model axis mode To perform a model axis motion you need to select an axis When you click the middle or right mouse button the axis in the bottom left corner appears in yellow and the X axis appears in red The axis that is displayed in red is the selected axis that will be used for the motion The X axis is the default You can select another axis by clicking with the left mouse button on the line or letter for that axis in the bottom left corner If you click anywhere else with the left mouse button the current axis cycle is selected The model axis motions which move or orbit the camera along the selected axis and the actions you need to perform to activate them are described in the following table Table 1 2 Model Axis Motions Desired Motion Actions You Perform Move the camera Drag with the middle mouse button Dragging right or up translates the scene positively on the axis Dragging left or down translates the scene negatively on the axis Orbit the camera Drag with the right mouse button Dragging right or up rotates the scene positively around the axis Dragging left or down rotates the scene negatively around the axis When you release one of the mouse buttons and are not pressing the Shift key the model axis motions are disabled and the model axes recover their
42. are specified The following is the format for the symbolic color attribute color_attribute_number symbolic_color_type_number attribute_length attribute_value In this format the color_attribute_number is a 2 byte integer with a value equal to the value in Table C 3 Object Attribute Numbers and their Values on page C 8 and symbolic_color_type_number is a 2 byte integer with a value equal to the value in Table C 4 Color Type Number and their Values on page C 10 attribute_length is a 4 byte integer and attribute_value is a ASCII string specifying a color name previously defined with length specified by the attribute length value The following is the format for the literal color attribute color_attribute_number literal_color_type_number red_value green_value blue_value In this format the color_attribute_number is a 2 byte integer with a value equal to the value in Table C 3 Object Attribute Numbers and their Values on page C 8 and the literal color attribute is a 2 byte integer with a value equal to the value in Table C 4 Color Type Number and their Values on page C 10 and red_value green_value and blue_value are 4 byte single precision floating point numbers that represent red green and blue values RGB in that order Valid RGB values range from 0 0 to 1 0 where 1 0 represents the highest value allowable EPD Visualizer User Guide C 9 EPD Visualizer Binary Graphic File Object Definition
43. automatically increments the file name for each section If the file name does not end with a digit EPD Visualizer automatically adds a zero 0 when saving the first section By default EPD Visualizer uses the file name that you provide with no incrementation 7 30 EPD Visualizer User Guide Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Saving a Section Option Description Automatic saving of any section With this option enabled EPD Visualizer automatically saves any newly created section However this option interacts with the Automatic name incrementation option in the following ways With Automatic name incrementation is enabled each new section is saved in a new file with only one section per file With Automatic name incrementation is disabled while the file is open each new section is added to the current file The file is automatically closed when you perform any of the following actions start a new session select Sectioning gt Clear select a new file name disable Automatic saving of any section enable Automatic name incrementation You can close the file or leave it open when you perform the following actions disable sectioning rotate the plane See Rotating the Plane on page 8 8 define a new plane See Defining a Plane on page 6 5 EPD Visualizer indicates that the sectioning parameters have changed and asks whether or not you want to close the file
44. can also edit a view sequence to reorganize the views EPD Visualizer User Guide 2 7 Basic Features View Processing After you define the view sequence select View gt View Sequence gt Playback You can playback the view sequence in one of two methods e Interactive Manually control when each view in the sequence is displayed as well as read the associated note e Time Delay Automatically display the entire view sequence with a delay between each view 2 8 EPD Visualizer User Guide Basic Features Selecting Items selecting Items This section briefly describes building selection lists setting selection masks selecting and clearing items and creating selection sets to help you delineate precise areas of interest Selections made from EPD Visualizer itself display messages in the status window that describe the selection type and show its name Selections made through other tools display the message Client command finished Building a Selection List A selection list stores items that you select After the items are added to the selection list you can highlight them and subsequent selections by activating the Select gt Highlight Selection toggle selection Operations on objects available from other menus include Hide Show Translate Rotate and Delete In addition you can set up traversal by items interference detection or sectioning You can add individual items to the selection list with the S
45. color in the Colors list 2 Click Delete and the color is removed from the Colors list and temporarily stored You can restore a deleted color with Undo gt Delete Restoring a Deleted Color To restore a deleted color click Undo gt Delete You cannot restore the deleted color after you close the dialog box define a new color or edit a color name Selecting or Verifying a Color Use the following steps to select or verify a color from geometry in your 3D scene 1 Pick up the Select Color tool and select an item in the 3D scene with the desired color 2 Click Accept if you want to use the selected color 1 20 EPD Visualizer User Guide Introduction to EPD Visualizer Permanent Mouse Dynamics Permanent Mouse Dynamics You can perform view manipulations by moving the mouse pointer on the viewing area You can use all three mouse buttons to perform such view manipulations as screen axis motions model axis motions and quick view centering These operations are always available except when the Mouse Viewing tool in the Tool Palette is active and with Permanent Zoom and Temporary Zoom Screen Axis Motions Screen axis motions allow you to translate the camera on the screen axis to Zoom and unzoom and to rotate around any screen axis including the one perpendicular to the screen You can enable screen axis motions at any time whether or not a tool is active by dragging the mouse with the middle or right mouse but
46. command which has a syntax like the following LOAD graphic file component X Y Z AX AY AZ YMIRFLAG YMIRFLAG controls whether EPD Visualizer loads components with a Y symmetry If the field is set to 1 the components are loaded with a Y symmetry XZ plane symmetry No symmetry is implied if the field is set to 0 OLD_GLOBAL_SPELLING OLD_GLOBAL_SPELLING assists in backward compatibility for command files generated by EPD Visualizer for updating the product structure If the variable is set to any value the keyword GLOBAL ORIENT is used instead of GLOBAL ORIENT when EPD Connect asks EPD Visualizer to update the position of the components moved by the user The keyword GLOBAL ORIENT was used in Explorer 1 1 PVS_EXTERNAL PVS_EXTERNAL specifies the name of file for communication client to pvs Its default value is usr tmp client_pvs_comm file PVS_CLIENT_FILE PVS_CLIENT_FILE specifies the name of file for communication pvs to client Its default value is usr tmp pvs_ client comm file H 6 EPD Visualizer User Guide Environment Variables EPD Visualizer EPD Connect Communication PVS_COLOR_FILE PVS_COLOR_FILE specifies the name of a color table that provides the definitions of 16 colors that can be applied to blobs in the product structure tree A table is provided in usr ap1 nav data explorer EPD Connect can change the color of an object in EPD Visualizer by sending the following command through the communicat
47. derived from the perpendicular from the face of an object selected in the graphics window The position is the current position e From Section Plane The reference is copied from the local referential of the current sectioning plane 3 32 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus Edit Menu When an incremental mode DXYZ DX DY or DZ is selected you can specify rotation around the selected axes by making entries in the Absolute Orientation Field The rotation occurs around local axes if you select Use Local Axes If Use Local Axes is not selected rotation occurs around global axes The Size selection controls the size of the reference as it is represented in the graphics window 4 Edit the path points or path references All path points or path references are displayed in the scrolling list Next to the list are three buttons Up Down and Del The buttons allow you to reorder the list items by moving them up or down or deleting them The Mod and Add buttons allow you to use position and orientation information that you type in the Absolute XYZ Position and Absolute Orientation fields to create a new reference or to modify a selected reference When an incremental mode DXYZ DX DY or DZ is selected these fields are empty e Absolute XYZ Position available in both path and Gpath forms e Absolute Orientation available in Gpath form only a You select from the scrolling list a path point or path ref
48. e If you do not use the o option the standard output is used e If no source file is specified the standard input is used e If you enter an invalid option the syntax format for these commands displays e Formats for path Gpath light and material definitions are not supported for binary graphic files When the pvs_atob command encounters these formats it checks for the syntax but does not generate corresponding binary graphic file information A summary of this unconverted data is provided after the command is complete Examples The following example shows the command to convert a textual graphic file to a binary graphic file and specifies the name of the output file pvs_atob o projectl gbf projectil gaf The following example shows the command to convert a textual graphic file and direct it to a binary output file pvs_atob projectl gaf gt projectl gbf The following example shows the command to pipe the output of one process as the input to another process cadds2pvs s caddspart td pvs atob o caddspart gbf D 2 EPD Visualizer User Guide Adnene DIMENSION Ill Interface The DIMENSION III interface provides you with the capability to display full scale DIMENSION III models on EPD Visualizer You can process a DIMENSION III viewfile with this interface transfer the files and then review your project using EPD Visualizer The following topics are discussed in this appendix e Introduction e Generating Graphic
49. eight items This is accomplished by the parsedb program For more information on this program refer to the parsedb man page Tables for object verification are also created The valid object types are construction properties and purchasing This is accomplished by the parsedat program For information on this program refer to the parsedat man page located in VIS_HOME common sqldemo Testing the Interface Query and Verification The procedures for testing the Visualizer interface Query database and related functions and verification are described in the following sections A 18 EPD Visualizer User Guide Database Interface DBMS Demo Testing the Visualizer Interface After creating the necessary tables you are ready to test out the interface as follows 1 Execute Visualizer by entering the following VIS_HOME scripts visualizer 2 Open the metafile by entering or selecting the following VIS_HOME common data plant mf 3 Connect to DBMS by selecting Database gt Connect gt DBMS from the Visualizer menu bar In the DBMS Connect window enter the User ID and password then click Connect 4 Add construction purchasing and properties query types by selecting Database gt Query Types and specifying the information in the New Query Types window Note that you can specify only one type at a time 5 Select Database gt Selection Keys then change the selection key for the file name field from FILE NAM
50. either interactively or by time delay If you playback a view sequence interactively you can control when each view is displayed as well as read the associated note If you playback a view sequence by time delay you can define a simulated animation sequence for example by adjusting the number of seconds between each view Before you start view sequence playback perform the following steps 1 Define the view sequence with the View Sequence gt Editor 2 Select View gt View Sequence gt Playback The following figure shows the View Sequence Playback dialog box Mien Se quences Playback belted 4 Interactive w Ine Weley Time Delay 3 Set the Playback Method e Interactive Manually play back the view sequence e Time Delay Automatically play back the view sequence with the Time Delay slider scale to set the number of seconds to delay between each view To display a view sequence interactively use the following steps 1 Click a view sequence name 2 Click Start The first view listed in the view sequence and the following message display View sequence playback in progress 3 64 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu 3 You are prompted to choose from the following options e Next View Displays the next view e Read Note Displays the associated note After you read a note you must close the note window before you can display another view e Stop Stop
51. in the appropriate dialog box 3 Reset the options as necessary 4 Click Accept to save your changes To duplicate a light use the following steps 1 Click a light type in the Light Editor dialog box 2 Click the light name you want to duplicate then click Duplicate The current settings for that light display in the appropriate dialog box 3 Enter a new unique name in the text box 4 Reset the options as necessary 5 Click Accept to insert the duplicated light EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 57 Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu To duplicate a light in a matrix use the following steps 1 Click a light type in the Light Editor dialog box 2 Click the light name you want to duplicate into a matrix then click Matrix The following figure shows the Light Matrix dialog box Preiix Oycmdc weir venide MM Ger Ct era Murnber Cot Cieli 7 5 pm Em Rew Olskaret alumn Distance Row Direclion Calumma Direction Cancel Accept Shaw llelp 3 Set the following options as necessary Prefix By default the Prefix box contains the name of the original light Subsequent light names are composed of the prefix plus row position and column position The syntax for new light names follows prefix_ row_number_column_number For example the light in the figure above has the name point1 The duplicate light created at row 1 column 2 has the name point1_1_2 Override It is po
52. measured Distances between edges are not displayed which can result in the display of inaccurate information Measuring Distance in Sections In addition to measuring distances for verification you can also measure distances in sections The tool available for doing so is available in two places as follows e From the Tools menu Tools gt Measure Distance The options starting with Sections Points apply to sections e From the Section window The Section window appears when you enable sectioning from the Sectioning Control window For more information refer to Chapter 7 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning 2 12 EPD Visualizer User Guide Basic Features Item Editing Item Editing You can modify the items in your 3D scene in various ways with the EPD Visualizer editing functions located in the Edit menu These editing options include the following e Controlling the visibility or color of items e Removing items from the 3D scene e Translating or rotating items e Traversing items stepwise along predefined paths e Changing the surface material of planar objects Controlling Visibility You can prepare uncluttered views by hiding the following object types with the Edit gt Hide operation Selected Items References or Unselected Items References are explained in Path Editor on page 3 28 You can restore the following object types to visibility with the Edit gt Show operation
53. of potential interferences found in the section Proximity tolerance is applied to the left and right sides of each segment belonging to the section as shown in the following illustration Components Land 2 are considered as colliding with the shown pronimity tolerance Please note If you enter a large value for proximity tolerance calculations may be lengthy and the results will show almost all components as interfering EPD Visualizer User Guide Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Sectioning the Scene Setting a Contact Distance The contact distance allows some interferences to be considered as contacts between components but not counted as interferences By increasing the contact distance you reduce the number of interferences detected Interferences that are considered as contacts are ignored As with proximity tolerance the contact distance is applied to both sides of each segment belonging to the section as shown in the following illustration Component 2 is considered ta be in contact with components land 3 andinterferences are not displayed Please note If you provide a contact distance that is greater than the proximity tolerance the proximity tolerance is ignored selecting the Objects To Be Sectioned You can use three options Active Selection Selection 2 or All Visible to specify the objects you want sectioned These options are described in the following table
54. of the cone is at the light position and the center of the circle is at the light target The area between the inner circle and the outer circle shows the fuzzy zone of the spot light The following figure shows the symbol for a spot light Figure 3 2 Spot Light Symbol ition ion angle fuzzy zone ht target Matrix Duplication The Matrix option allows you to duplicate a light into a matrix of rows and columns You can do matrix duplication of point and spot lights but not directional lights Figure 3 3 shows a two row five column light matrix The original light is shown in bold 3 52 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu Figure 3 3 Matrix Duplication of Lights Show or Hide Light Geometry This option allows you to show or hide the geometry of point or spot lights You cannot show the geometry of directional lights because they are infinitely far away Hide causes the geometry of the light to disappear from view Show displays the geometry of the light The following sections describe how to define a new light edit delete show hide or duplicate lights and perform matrix duplication To define a new light use the following steps 1 Select View gt Lighting gt Editor The Light Editor dialog box displays Light List sf Vireclional r Foil s Spee Fi m_i Sulecl Lighl age UN Lighl Swilth 2 Set the following options as necessary e Light Switch Turn lig
55. on Menu 1 both an ASCII and a binary graphic file are generated The new files names are the same as the viewfile names appended with a gaf extension or a gbf extension respectively After the viewfiles are processed you are prompted with the following Menu 3 Do you want to generate more graphic files y n If you enter y Menu 1 displays again If you enter n you return to the system prompt Processing Multiple Viewfiles To process multiple viewfiles you can create a command file or shell script using the in line command input An unlimited number of viewfiles can be processed On the line after the viewfile name or path name enter either 1 2 or 3 to respond to Menu 1 The next line must contain the unit type to respond to Menu 2 The last line must contain either y or n to respond to Menu 3 EPD Visualizer User Guide DIMENSION III Interface Generating Graphic Files On VMS you can create a command file using the DECK and EOD in line commands The first two lines and the last line of the command file must contain those shown in the following example Spvgenpoly SDECK lt viewfile name 1 gt uy 3 y lt viewfile name 2 gt 2 7 Y lt viewfile name 3 gt 3 4 n SEOD To execute the command file at the system prompt enter lt command file name gt On AEGIS the first and last line of the script file must contain those shown in the following example pvgenpoly lt lt LABEL l
56. point in the plane and a third point to define the normal vector The normal vector is perpendicular to the line extending from point 1 to point 2 and passing through point 3 6 6 EPD Visualizer User Guide Chapter 7 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning This chapter describes many of the operations you can perform to scan an assembly and includes information on the following Getting Started Displaying the Plane Clipping the Scene Sectioning the Scene Sectioning the Scene from Multiple References Measuring Distance in Sections Verifying a Point Saving a Section Section Window Graphics Output EPD Visualizer User Guide 7 1 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Getting Started Getting Started To specify the display and behavior of the plane select Sectioning gt Control from the EPD EPD Visualizer window The Sectioning Control window appears feet thing Latr J Clipping J Section Thickness J Intertercnse fi Em _ _ j yr ES Sele etlo Founder wr Sblaction 2 w Opaque All isille ae PON Srcnit J User Cuber E taor E Eata Clase Defines Bitni Tane m Help EPD Visualizer User Guide Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Displaying the Plane Displaying the Plane To display the plane used for sectioning select the Plane option You can display the plane as a simple contour or as a sh
57. polygon definitions define the object s geometry All DIMENSION III triangulated surface items are generated as shell polygons These items can be smooth shaded by selecting the smooth shading rendering option in EPD Visualizer All other items are represented by flat polygons If you want smooth shading for items with flat polygons EPD Visualizer provides a utility program named smooth that converts flat polygons to shell polygons Smooth resides in usr apl1 CVpvs bin E 6 EPD Visualizer User Guide DIMENSION III Interface Error Messages Error Messages e Error in opening or reading viewfile You did not enter a valid viewfile name e Invalid option Try again You did not enter a valid option number Error in opening ASCII file lt file name gt A problem exists at the operating system level for example there might be a protection problem Notify your System Administrator for assistance Error in opening binary file lt filename gt A problem exists at the operating system level for example there might be a protection problem Notify your System Administrator for assistance e No item found in viewfile The viewfile does not contain any items e Error in writing polygon data A problem exists at the operating system level for example there might be a protection problem Notify your System Administrator for assistance e Error in removing ASCII polygon file A problem exists at the operati
58. pom esse hikbi inl ee tee il pamilih melbse Lieber line ike u np Int ho metosc Men leons AP INAH ONES SHIGA EERE Ae d Ha Flic mp _mnUhonelbachieby To create a new file enter the directory path and or new file name in the File text box Use the rpt extension following the file name to designate your file a report file Click OK to return to the Interference Report window From the Interference Report window click Save to write the report to the file you selected or named Click Append to append the report to the end of the file you selected Any additional saving or appending actions are applied to the current file until you click Select File to select or name another file EPD Visualizer User Guide 5 11 Chapter 6 sectioning This chapter explains how you begin your sectioning session and includes information on the following e About Sectioning e Starting Your Sectioning Session e Displaying the Main Sectioning Window e Defining a Plane EPD Visualizer User Guide 6 1 Sectioning About Sectioning About Sectioning The sectioning capability allows you to interactively scan a complex assembly by defining and moving a plane You can use the plane to cut away a part of the scene or to generate a section of the visible objects Once you have enabled sectioning the scene refreshes every time you move an object or plane 6 2 EPD Visualizer User Guide Sectioning Starting Your Sectioning Ses
59. record The object type name must be the same name as specified for the OBJECT_TYPE field in the object record EPD Visualizer User Guide A 9 Database Interface Creating an ASCII Database Database fields other than OBJECT_ID MODEL and OBJECT_TYPE are defined by DEFINE FIELD in the DEFINE_ OBJECT section Automatic tags are defined by the DEFINE_AUTO_TAG statement You must define the field_name with a DEFINE_FIELD statement before it is defined for automatic tagging Below is an example of a DEFINE_ OBJECT section DEFINE OBJECT OBJECT TYPE PLPIPE DEFINE FIELD SUBMODEL 45 72 DEFINE FIELD ESID 89 94 DEFINE FIELD NPS1 95 102 DEFINE FIELD NPS2 103 110 DEFINE FIELD NPS3 111 118 DEFINE FIELD NPS4 119 126 DEFINE FIELD SPEC MCC 127 138 DEFINE FIELD DESC 139 162 DEFINE FIELD MATERIAL 163 178 DEFINE FIELD STOCK_ID 179 190 DEFINE FIELD LINE NO 191 222 DEFINE AUTO TAG LINE NO END NO TAG is a sample database file not to scale described by the database definition file This is an ASCH file that is created by your database program or another method A 10 EPD Visualizer User Guide Database Interface DBMS SQL Interface DBMS SQL Interface The DBMS SQL interface lets you connect to a Database Management System to obtain essential engineering data When an object is digitized the Verify tool queries the DBMS for database i
60. sa HHA A a a a d d ee j j H H Z Z za j H zZ td Oo td END END_DEFINE SUBMODEL ESID ITEMNAME LENGTH SHAPE STOCK_ID SDESC LDESC E AUTO TAG STOCK ID EQUIPMENT SUBMODEL EQTYPE EQDESC PLX99 SUBMODEL ESID NPS1 NPS2 NPS3 NPS4 SPEC MCC DESC MATERIAL STOCK_ID LINE NO FINE AUTO TAG OBJECT ID EPD Visualizer User Guide Database Interface Creating an ASCII Database Structure of Database Definition File A definition file starts with DEFINE and ends with END_DEFINE statements including three sections in this order e DEFINE DB FILE The complete path name to the database file is defined This section is defined only once for each definition file DEFINE REQUIRED FIELDS The fields required to be in each database record are defined object ID model and object type This section is defined only once for each definition file DEFINE OBJECT The remaining fields for each database record type object type are defined One DEFINE_ OBJECT section is required for each object type Each section ends with an END statement Text after an exclamation point is regarded as comments and is ignored These three sections are described in more detail as follows DEFINE_DB_FILE Section In the DEFINE_DB_ FILE section you specify the database file name with the complete path name The following is an
61. sectioned graphic file Interferences between graphic files when detected by the sectioning process are stored in the gaf file as comments You use the Save button in the Sectioning Control window to save sections in a gaf file A Sectioning Save dialog box appears Siu Luni Sue inp inne jwalsh pakerea hipls crip gad Dlra ctorles Hmp mn ome walls upata eap cl Hmo MET On CUS uta apra pte Unn Deklara J a ril isting Miles J Automne nune nenen entation l ulorialic aming ul arny aeclion J Rreuk Folyline ul new ciljal ld a3 CHa Mas days Flic Hant mpomnUhenelwelshtpelArealhp s cripls EPD Visualizer User Guide 7 29 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Saving a Section In the Sectioning Save dialog box you can use the Filter Directories Files and File Name fields to select the output file Generally these fields behave in the same way as similar fields in other dialog boxes Refer to File Selection Dialog Box on page 1 17 for more information However some rules apply specifically to saving sections as follows e The initial values of the Filter and File Name fields are defined by the CVDPA_SECTIONS_DIR environment variable if this variable is not defined EPD Visualizer uses the current directory e If you change the directory displayed in the Filter or File Name fields EPD Visualizer ignores the directory defined by CVDPA_SECTIONS_DIR until you select File g
62. select in the 3D scene The following figure illustrates this concept Figure 2 2 Measuring Distance from Camera to Item Camera Postion EPD Visualizer User Guide 2 11 Basic Features Verification After you select the vertex of an item the calculated distance from the camera to the item is displayed Measure Distance Between Items or Graphics Files The Measure Distance Between Items tool measures the distance from one vertex to another vertex This tool is available in the Tool Palette as well as from the Tools menu Tools gt Measure Distance gt between Items After you select two vertex points in your 3D scene the following measurements are displayed in the status window e The straight line distance between items e The delta xyz distances The straight line distance is calculated from vertex to vertex and the delta xyz distances are expressed as the xyz component parts of the straight line distance The Tools menu includes a selection that allows you to display the minimum distance between two graphics files Tools gt Measure Distance gt mini Graphics Files This is useful when you are dealing with files that contain multiple items The minimum distance is evaluated in one of the following manners e between vertices and other vertices e between vertices and edges e between vertices and facets Two x shaped markers and a line connecting them in the graphics window indicate where the minimum distance is
63. set Camera Target The Set Camera Target tool enables you to set a point around which the orbit buttons operate To set a new Camera Target use the following steps 1 Click on the tool and move the pointer into the graphics window You are prompted with the following Set Camera Target Digitize a vertex point 2 After you digitize an item the 3D scene adjusts to the new camera target set Camera Position and Target The Set Camera Position and Target tool enables you to set a new Camera Position and Camera Target To set a new camera position and target use the following steps 1 Pick up the tool and move the pointer into the graphics window You are prompted with the following Set Camera Position and Target Digitize Camera Position point 2 After you digitize the Camera Position you are prompted with the following Set Camera Position and Target Digitize Camera Target point EPD Visualizer User Guide 9 7 Palettes Tool Palette Measure Distance from Camera to Item H The Measure Distance from Camera to Item tool enables you to set the distance dl from the camera position to a selected item in the 3D scene To measure the distance between the camera and an item use the following steps 1 Click on the tool and move the pointer into the graphics window You are prompted with the following Measure Distance From Camera To Item Digitize a vertex point 2 After you digitize an item a dig
64. the following table Button Description Apply Creates the zone object in EPD Visualizer and the corresponding gaf file The previously created zone is automatically deleted from EPD Visualizer Close Cancels the operation and menu The current zone geometry is automatically deleted from EPD Visualizer Clear Deletes the previously created zone Help Displays online help Corners Box Type The corners box type is selected by default in the Zone Box Creation window The information you need to provide for a corners box is described in the previous options table Radius Box Type To create a radius box select the Radius option from the Zone Box Creation window The text boxes for a radius box appear fone Ury Great klumme Center lype sr DONES Dalius Digilia ae oplecka Liat OTe ion i Ianspareney Digitiz pugue lear SS lose Apply Cie Help In addition to specifying offset and transparency values as you do for a corners box you need to enter center point coordinates and a radius Again you can enter 4 6 EPD Visualizer User Guide Constructing Zones Creating Your Zone Definition explicit numerical values for the center points in the window s text boxes or specify them by digitizing an existing object Selection List To create a box for a selection list select the Selection List option from the Zone Box Creation window Text boxes fo
65. the Column Direction xyz slider scales To delete a light use the following steps 1 Click the light name on the Light List 2 Click Delete and the light is removed from the Light List and temporarily stored To restore a deleted light click Undo Delete Please note You cannot restore the deleted light after you close the dialog box define a new light or edit a light name To show or hide light geometry use the following steps 1 Click a light type in the Light Editor dialog box 2 Click the light name you want to show or hide then click Show Hide The geometry of that light appears or disappears EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 59 Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu Environment With the lighting environment option you can turn the ambient light on or off and control the brightness of all lights by adjusting the Environment Brightness After you select View gt Lighting gt Environment the Global Light Control dialog box displays Amel aint EI gaH 4 Gr aw OH En ronment Erlghtiess Dim Erlg ht EE Clase Apel Help To turn the ambient light on and off click the On or Off button Then click Apply to display the change To control the brightness of the environment drag the slider on the Environment Brightness slider scale to the appropriate level Then click Apply to display the change View Editor You can save label and retrieve individual views with a specific camera orien
66. the EPD Visualizer host machine EPD Visualizer provides conversion between DECstation Sun or HP binary graphic files For example if EPD Visualizer is running on the Sun binary graphic files in DECstation format can be read and binary graphic files in Sun format can be read on the DECstation Following the file identifier are the control options extents definition color definition and object definition sections Refer to Appendix B EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File for more information on these sections Each section starts with a 2 byte integer that serves as the section identification number followed by the contents specific to that section Table C 1 shows the section identification number values Table C 1 Section Identification Number Values Sections Value extents section number 0 color _section_number 1 object_section_number 2 w control_options_section_ number C 2 EPD Visualizer User Guide EPD Visualizer Binary Graphic File Control Options Control Options The control options section is required for all binary graphic files and must be the first section in the file The following is the format for the control options section control_options_section_number number_of_options control_options_specifications In this format control_options_section_number is a 2 byte integer equal to 3 and number of options is a 4 byte integer specifying the number of options
67. the playback To display a view sequence by time delay use the following steps 1 Click a view sequence name 2 Click Start The views begin to display along with the following message View sequence playback in progress The View Sequence playback slider scale indicates which view is displaying 3 Click Stop to stop the playback EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 65 Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu Camera Traversal This option allows you to traverse the camera along predefined paths through the 3D scene while maintaining the focus of the camera in a horizontal direction along a path on a fixed point or in a fixed direction Paths display as lines within the 3D scene Paths can be defined with the Path Editor located in the Edit menu To create a textual graphic file that contains a path definition refer to Appendix B EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File Before You Start Before you start camera traversal perform the following steps 1 Add graphic file s with path definitions 2 Select View gt Camera Traversal The following figure shows the Camera Traversal dialog box Path Harnes Feus Ap piu Tirne Delay see Hanoi Lock l se Along Falh Em sar izal 7apiral Camera Offset se liked 2 lre sth Ireversal Mell nerag live ser line Delay Select Pal Yel Uplions u b To 3 66 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu 3
68. traverse the path or Gpath automatically The Play Method area contains buttons that control the traversal initiated by the Play button Interactive Manually step along the path If this method is not selected the Time Delay method described in the next step is used Check Collisions Activates Dynamic Interference Checking During item traversal interferences are detected and highlighted at each step position along the traversal path Setting Up an Interference Checking Session on page 5 4 describes this feature This button is automatically activated in the Stop at Collisions mode EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus Edit Menu Stop at Collisions The first collision stops the traversal This button is inactive if the Interactive button is selected Activating the Stop at Collisions button automatically activates the Check Collisions button Deactivating the Stop at Collisions button automatically deactivates the Stop at Collisions button e You can move an object directly to a graphically selected reference Select a Gpath reference by pressing the Select Reference button and selecting a reference in the graphics window When you make the selection the Gpath is selected the selected object moves to the reference directly without traversing intermediate points and the reference is selected in the References Points scroll list A reference must be visible for you to select it You make referen
69. type you want to delete from the list Then click Delete and the query type is removed from the Query Types list and temporarily stored To undelete a query type click Undo Delete and the query type is restored to the list You cannot restore the deleted query type after you define a new query type or edit a query type name EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 87 Using EPD Visualizer Menus Database Menu selection Keys If you want to highlight zoom or select objects retrieved from the database you must specify the Object ID and File Name in the field name list of the query statement The Selection Keys dialog box lets you tailor the actual field names of these two keys Object ID ossec IO File Hame FILE_NAME Accupl Cancel Help To tailor the two key fields use the following steps 1 Enter a field name for Object ID 2 Enter a field name for File Name 3 Click Accept The default values are OBJECT_ID and FILE NAME Click Cancel to restore previously defined field names Substitution Variables Substitution Variables are used in query statements to globally set values for query variables Variables created with this option are considered persistent variables For example a project name is a variable that is used throughout the querying session and is likely to stay constant so you might want to define that name as a persistent variable 3 88 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visual
70. use of Assembly Design Because references to the viewed parts are not stored with your model cadds2pvs cannot attempt to locate them To adjust a graphic ASCII file for a specified rotation and location use the following transpvs command rotates or translates objects in a graphic ASCII file transpvs u unit type w AX AY AZ X Y Z lt old gaf gt new gaf Options Options for the transpvs commands are as follows e u The units for the xyz offset The default units are the units specified in the old gaf file The following are the valid units mils inches feet yards miles millimeters centimeters meters decimeters kilometers If you do not enter the unit type the xyz offsets maintains the same units as the old gaf file e w Formats coordinate data e AX AY Az Three angles in degrees to rotate the coordinate data about the x axis then the y axis and then the z axis e xX Y Z Three numbers to translate the coordinate data along the x y and z directions see the u option e old gaf Old graphic ASCII file name e new gaf New graphic ASCII file name Please note The old gaf and the new gaf files must have different names EPD Visualizer User Guide F 11 CADDS Interface Reorienting Objects in Graphic ASCII Files Examples The following example shows that the coordinates in the file equipment gaf will first rotate about the x axis by 90 degrees and then about the y axis
71. use the following steps 1 Select View gt Rendering The following figure shows the Rendering Control dialog box Bere ring hael tds Kach Facing Polygons Wire Frame w Display w Hidden ine gt Flernove Plat Shading Display Butte w Smooth Shading gt Single w Budiosily ae Double a Nay Trace Pate Tere 2 Set the following options as necessary Please note Since it can be time consuming to render the screen after each rendering change you can set as many rendering controls as you need then apply them all at once Rendering Methods Wire Frame Display all surface edges of the 3D scene as lines Wire Frame displays all lines in the 3D scene regardless of the visibility of the lines Hidden Line Display a solid view of the 3D scene with black polygon edges and lights off Flat Shading Display a shaded solid view of the 3D scene The edges of the facets between the polygons are distinguishable Smooth Shading Display a smooth shaded solid view of the 3D scene Polygons that are defined as shells in the graphic files display so that you do not see the edges between them Radiosity Display the light that is reflected or radiated between diffusely reflecting surfaces in a 3D scene Radiosity produces view 3 46 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu independent images You can change the view angle without performing the radiosity operati
72. window AutoFit Fits in the Section window any newly created section This is enabled by default If this is disabled some sections are partially or totally removed from the view depending on the initial zooming factor You can use the right mouse button to recenter the view on the current section Every time you release the button the view is redisplayed to fit the entire section Distance Displays a menu containing five options for measuring distances between points endpoints and sections For detailed information about measuring distances refer to Measuring Distance in Sections on page 7 20 Verify Point allows you to digitize a point as explained in Verifying a Point on page 7 28 Drafting is explained in Measuring Distance in Sections on page 7 20 Undo removes the last dimension and can be selected repeatedly to remove dimensions in an order reverse to their order of origination Output Generates PostScript output of the view shown in the Section window The section image is generated as vectors rather than a bitmap The position of the sectioning plane and the image scale are shown If the two cross markers generated by distance measuring are visible when the PostScript file is generated the markers appear in the output and the distance is indicated The Section Output dialog box is displayed when you select this option For information about this box refer to Section Window Graphi
73. window Hold down the Shift key plus the middle mouse button and move the mouse up to move forward and down to move backward If you move beyond the camera target a new camera target is automatically set The number of units you move is determined by the units set on the Move Distance slider scale EPD Visualizer User Guide Palettes Tool Palette To turn right and left use the following steps This function is equivalent to the Turn Right and Turn Left buttons on the Turn Orbit Palette It turns the camera or 3D scene to the right or left To use the mouse to turn the camera or the 3D scene right or left follow these steps 1 Click on the tool and move the pointer into the graphics window 2 Hold down the right mouse button and move the mouse right or left The number of degrees you turn is determined by the setting on the Turn Orbit Angle slider scale To look up and down use the following steps This function is equivalent to the Look Up and Look Down buttons on the Turn Orbit Palette It enables you to look up or look down the vertical axis of the 3D scene To use the mouse to look up or down follow these steps 1 Pick up the tool and move the pointer into the graphics window 2 Hold down the right mouse button and move the mouse up or down The number of degrees you look up or down is determined by the setting on the Turn Orbit Angle slider scale EPD Visualizer User Guide 9 11 Palettes Tool Palett
74. xyz values The scales range from 1 0 to 1 0 Use the Digitize button to digitize two model coordinates The xyz values corresponding to the digitized vector appear in the Direction xyz slider scales To define a point light use the following steps 1 Click Point then click New The Point Light Editor displays Ma sleli Colar m Editor Dl gitte gansel AC cept Show Help 2 Name the light and set the light color 3 Set the following options as necessary Position Set the light position To set the light position you can either Use the three text boxes to set the xyz values Use the Digitize button to digitize a model coordinate The xyz values corresponding to the digitize appear in the Position text boxes 3 55 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu To define a spot light use the following steps 1 Click Spot then click New The Spot Light Editor displays Hare Paslon x EC Color y Editor Malte ihmination Angle 39 es Oet Fdge sharpness Fuser Sharp p OUOU 3 SI Symbal Sieve Digitizc Tunnel Accrepl Show Help 2 Name the light and set the light color 3 Set the following options as necessary e Position Set the light position To set the light position you can either Use the three text boxes to set the xyz values Use the Digitize button to digitize a mo
75. you are prompted with the following Specify Axes Location Digitize new location for the axes 2 After you digitize a new location a digitize marker snaps to the nearest vertex If you are translating the local axes the local origin of the axes moves to this vertex If you are translating the selection list the axes and the selection list translate to the selected vertex 3 Click To Digitize or select any other tool to deactivate the tool To rotate the selection or the local axes use the following steps If you select Local Axes as your target source you must select Local as your coordinate system or the following warning displays You can rotate the local axes only in the local coordinate system 1 Set the Angle slider scale to specify either of the following depending on your target source e Angle by which the selection list rotates about a chosen axis e Angle by which the local axes of the selection list rotate about the local coordinate system 3 24 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus Edit Menu 2 Click the appropriate axis button e Positive X Y or Z rotates in a counterclockwise direction about the selected axis e Negative X Y or Z rotates in a clockwise direction about the selected axis For example if you want to rotate 10 degrees in a clockwise direction about the X axis set the scale to 10 and click X To show active axes use the following steps 1 Selec
76. you can perform in the Section window are described in the following table Desired Action What You Need to Do Select objects and locations Click the left mouse button When you click on an object on the section EPD Visualizer displays the name of the graphic file containing the object in the status window You can temporarily return to this default selection mode by pressing the Shift key while you select an object This is necessary if you want to select an object while measuring a distance in the Section window For detailed information about measuring distances refer to Measuring Distance in Sections on page 7 20 Scroll the view Press the middle or right mouse button while moving the mouse The view follows the cursor Zoom and unzoom Press the middle or right mouse button while pressing the Shift key Move the mouse upwards to increase the zoom factor The view remains focused on the same point Move a point to the center of Place the cursor on the desired point Click the middle mouse the view button without moving the mouse This is useful for centering a point before zooming around it Recenter the view on the Click the right mouse button Each time you release the button current section EPD Visualizer redisplays the view to fit the entire section 7 8 EPD Visualizer User Guide Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Sectioning the Scene View Option
77. you select e Database gt Tagging gt Automatic after you open the database predefined tags are attached to an object that you selected with the Object Tagging tool e Database gt Tagging gt Manual the text you enter is attached to an object that you selected with the Object Tagging tool 2 22 EPD Visualizer User Guide Basic Features Accessing Online Help Accessing Online Help This section briefly describes using online help to obtain immediate assistance while you are using EPD Visualizer You can learn how to use the context sensitive help by selecting Help gt On Help You can access context sensitive help by selecting Help gt On Context which provides online help for each menu bar name and each button tool and slider scale on the palettes In addition you can obtain quick reference help as you point to the tools buttons or slider scales A brief description of each one is displayed in the prompt window You can also obtain online help for each dialog box by clicking the Help button For general how to information on using the interface select Help gt On General To access the EPD Visualizer glossary select Helo gt On Glossary For information on environment variables select Help gt On Environment Refer to EPD Visualizer Main Menus on page 3 2 in for additional information about online help EPD Visualizer User Guide 2 23 Chapter 3 Using EPD Visualizer Menus This chapter desc
78. zero value causes the item s to turn each path corner in one step 3 20 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus Edit Menu To verify the name of a path pick up the Select Path tool in the Object Path Traversal dialog box and select the path in the 3D scene The name is highlighted in the Path Name list To check the orientation of the selected items click Start Position The items appear at the beginning of the selected path with respect to the path direction EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 21 Using EPD Visualizer Menus Edit Menu Translate Rotate With this option you can perform the following operations e Move or rotate items on the selection list e Move or rotate the local axes associated with the selection list Translate enables you to move the selection list or axes while maintaining their current orientation If you translate the selection list the local axes move along with it Rotate enables you to rotate the selection list or its local axes about selected axes The local axes rotate in the local coordinate system The local or global axes define the orientation of selected items The local axes also determine how items on the selection list align with a path during item traversal The default local axes of the selection list are parallel to the global axes the XYZ coordinate system of your 3D scene For further information refer to Spatial Orientation on page 2 14 The default loc
79. 1 defined by the three angles AX 180 AY 40 AZ 0 to rf2 AX 0 AY 0 AZ 90 At the middle point the angles defining the position of the object will be AX 90 AY 20 AZ 45 If you are expecting a different orientation at this place you must use the Path Editor to create an intermediate vertex with the correct orientation Y AX 0 AY 0 AZ 90 Intermediate positions fe Global referential You can define any number of paths or Gpaths in textual graphic files After you add these textual graphic files the paths and Gpaths appear as lines within the 3D scene Gpaths appear with visible references Refer to Appendix B EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File for information on creating or editing a textual graphic file containing path definitions For information about moving a sectioning plane along a path refer to Chapter 8 Moving a Plane EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 17 Using EPD Visualizer Menus Edit Menu To execute item traversal controlled by defaults and to configure item traversal if required perform the following steps 1 Add graphic file s with path definitions 2 Select item s to traverse the path 3 Select Edit gt Item Dynamics gt Path Traversal to display the Object Path Traversal dialog box The following figure shows on the left the Object Path Traversal dialog box The following figure shows on the right the Object Path Traversal Options dialog box which you display by pressing th
80. 2 21 results 5 9 setting up 5 4 E Environment Variables help 2 23 PVS_CONCAVE_PERFORM 3 6 Environment variables all variables explained H 1 Index 2 EPD Visualizer User Guide Index CVDPA_SECTIONS_DIR 7 30 PVS_PATHS_DIR 3 34 PVS_SECOND_VIEW_SIZE 3 44 PVS_SECTION_AXIS 7 10 8 9 PVS_TEMP_COLOR 3 45 PVS_UNNAMED_REF B 13 setting for zones 4 3 F Filter using 1 18 Flat shading description 2 2 G Gpath characteristics 3 28 creating or editing 3 30 making items traverse 3 18 overview 2 19 sectioning from references configuring 7 17 sectioning from references performing 7 19 sectioning from references saving results 7 20 traversal options 3 20 Gpath Multiple Sectioning window 7 17 Graphic ASCII file generating F 9 reducing the size F 6 reorienting objects F 11 Graphic file adding 1 7 1 29 3 5 binary 1 7 sectioned file 7 33 textual 1 7 7 32 Graphics output from Section window 7 36 PostScript 3 11 Graphics window changing color 3 74 description 1 11 overview 1 11 H Help accessing on line 2 23 3 98 context sensitive 2 23 3 98 on basics 3 98 on environment variables 2 23 3 99 on general information 2 23 on glossary terms 2 23 3 99 on palettes 9 1 on release notes 3 99 using 3 98 Hidden line description 2 2 Hiding 2 13 3 14 HOOPS_PICTURE environment variable H 2 Interfaces CADDS 1 5 F 1 DIMENSION Ill 1 5 E 2 MEDUSA 1 5 Interference checking creating a secondary selection 5 7
81. 23_t 00000000000B64726976655F747261696E gt discipline 0 11 drive train 00010000000C7472616E736D697373696F6E gt group 1 12 transmission 000300033FFE00003FFE33333FFE6666 gt color 3 a oh 0 5 0 6 0 7 literal 3 Geometry Specifications An object can have any number of geometry specifications The following is the format for the geometry specifications section geometry_attribute_number number_of_geometries geometries In this format geometry_attribute_number is a 2 byte integer equal to 5 and number_of_geometries is a 4 byte integer There are three types of geometries as follows e flat polygon e shell polygon e polyline The shell format defines polygons as a network of interconnected polygons that share common points resulting in a unit typically called a polyhedron Shells can be smooth shaded by EPD Visualizer but flat polygons cannot Flat Polygons The following is the format for the flat polygon definition flat_polygon_type_number number_of_points point_list In this format flat_polygon_type_number is a 2 byte integer equal to 0 number_of_points is a 4 byte integer with a value indicating the number of points in the polygon and point_list is a list of polygon points A polygon point is defined EPD Visualizer User Guide C 11 EPD Visualizer Binary Graphic File Object Definition using three 4 byte single precision floating point value
82. 367 END PL 183 404480 0 000000 280 794495 ey eee 207 700714 0 000000 308 379639 END END OBJ object_id breferrage_1 doublure aile av_1 discipline gpathsection group reference 2 color ivory PL 231 227173 0 000000 556 665161 SO ane 429 578644 0 000000 566 814026 END END END B 20 EPD Visualizer User Guide EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File Gpath Multiple Sectioning The preceding file describes the following Section window Seil imn Visibility Aubelit Distanee Output Squaving attached to refarneg re Sreferac s active ge alghan M A Tec sackion section sk sacki The selected object that traversed the Gpath in this case a spot welding tool appears only once in the section window and it is not described in the saved textual graphic file For other objects each active reference may generate a section in the section window and each section has a description in the textual graphic file EPD Visualizer User Guide B 21 Appendix C EPD Visualizer Binary Graphic File This appendix provides information about the format and structure of the EPD Visualizer binary graphic file Examples of actual graphics information are provided to help you create or edit a binary graphic file Binary graphic files are designed to contain the same information as the textual graphic file with the exception of light material and path definitions The light material
83. 5 Decreases sensitivity of Spaceball EPD Visualizer User Guide 9 23 Palettes Spaceball e Button 6 Increases sensitivity of Spaceball e Button 7 Turns Object Edit mode on e Button 8 Rezeros Spaceball e Pick button located on the back side of the ball Restores the primary view when you are in Camera mode Using the Spaceball with EPD Visualizer To enable Spaceball capabilities execute EPD Visualizer with the spaceball option The EPD Visualizer Spaceball interface supports Camera and Object Edit modes Camera Mode Camera mode enables you to toggle between Camera Orbit mode and Camera Walk Through mode These Camera modes are toggled by pressing Spaceball button 4 The current mode is displayed in the right message area of the EPD Visualizer interface In Camera Orbit mode you can twist the Spaceball on its axis to orbit the camera about the vertical axis of the 3D scene If you tilt the Spaceball forward or backward the camera orbits up and down respectively In Camera Walk Through mode twisting the Spaceball left or right turns the camera to the left or right respectively Pressing the Spaceball pick button restores the primary view when you are in Camera mode Object Edit Mode To enter Object Edit mode press Spaceball button 7 Objects must be on a selection list to edit them In Object Edit mode you can toggle translations and rotations on or off by pressing Spaceball buttons 1 and 2
84. 59 END COLORS red 1 000000 0 000000 0 000000 END OBJ object_id aile ar g_1 discipline section group a 0 89463 b 0 34467 c 0 28433 d2343 4099 color red PL 2457 839600 541 407837 1164 738159 2462 712891 549 393127 1159 084351 2551 934814 660 151184 1012 616943 2633 821289 735 565247 846 384338 2636 415283 738 466187 841 739136 2767 957031 838 364746 548 950195 END END OBJ object_id bas aile ar g_1 discipline section 7 34 EPD Visualizer User Guide Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Saving a Section group color PL 2740 2763 END END red 700195 275 14 2758 2765 268555 2762 2761 208008 264648 140137 095703 740479 823 83 1 652039 8 354 829 825 824 836 388245 201294 266846 398499 214661 028198 616 554 552 557495 592 577 058105 833191 551 551 966553 370728 451355 130737 a 0 89463 b 0 34467 c 0 28433 d2343 4099 NB INTERFERENCES 2 in A 0 89463 B 0 34467 C 0 28433 D 2343 4099 INTERFERENCE X2765 086914 Y 837 465027 2Z556 890625 INTERFERENCE X2755 194580 Y 834 280701 2584 155640 END INTERFERENCES END EPD Visualizer User Guide 7 35 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Section Window Graphics Output section Window Graphics Output You can write and print g
85. 7 5 defining by digitizing 6 6 displaying 7 3 moving along a path 8 3 moving to a Reference 8 9 moving to the selection list 8 10 moving with objects selected 8 6 orienting 6 6 positioning 6 5 rotating 8 8 sectioning 7 5 sectioning the scene 7 6 sizing 7 3 to path orientation 8 5 translating 8 7 vertical orientation 8 4 viewing 7 5 Plane dynamics setting 8 3 Point light defining 3 55 definition attributes B 9 description 2 5 3 51 Polygons back facing 3 47 F 6 flat B 15 B 16 C 11 right hand rule B 14 shell B 15 B 16 C 11 C 12 shell face B 17 shell hole B 17 shell points B 16 Polyhedron definition C 11 Polyline B 17 C 14 PostScript graphics output 3 11 Primary view description 2 7 3 41 setting 2 7 Printing documentation from Portable Document Format PDF file xxiii Prompt window 1 11 PV_SYSTEM environment variable H 4 PVS_CADDS_COLORS environment variable H 5 PVS_COLOR_FILE environment variable H 7 PVS_CONCAVE_PERFORM environment variable 3 6 H 5 PVS_EXTERNAL environment variable H 6 PVS_LOCAL_CPL environment variable H 8 PVS_NORMAL_AXIS environment variable 3 26 H 8 PVS_ORTHO_MODE environment variable H 3 PVS_PATHS_DIR environment variable 3 34 PVS_PATHS_DIRPVS_PATHS_DIR environment variable H 8 PVS_PRINT_COMMAND environment variable H 9 PVS_PRINT_FACTOR environment variable H 9 EPD Visualizer User Guide Index 5 Index PVS_SECOND_VIEW_SIZE environment variable 3 44 PVS_SECTION_A
86. ANGUAGE Pro LEGACY Pro LIBRARYACCESS Pro MESH Pro Model View Pro MOLDESIGN Pro NC ADVANCED Pro NC CHECK Pro NC MILL Pro NC SHEETMETAL Pro NC TURN Pro NC WEDM Pro NC Wire EDM Pro NCPOST Pro NETWORK ANIMATOR Pro NOTEBOOK Pro PDM Pro PHOTORENDER Pro PHOTORENDER TEXTURE LIBRARY Pro PIPING Pro PLASTIC ADVISOR Pro PLOT Pro POWER DESIGN Pro PROCESS Pro REPORT Pro REVIEW Pro SCAN TOOLS Pro SHEETMETAL Pro SURFACE Pro VERIFY Pro Web Link Pro Web Publish Pro WELDING Product Structure Navigator PTC Series Shaping Innovation Shrinkwrap The Product Development Company Virtual Design Environment Windchill e Series CV Computervision logo DIVISION logo and ICEM logo Third Party Trademarks Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Java and all Java based marks are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc CATIA is a registered trademark of Dassault Systems PDGS is a registered trademark of Ford Motor Company SAP and R 3 are registered trademarks of SAP AG Germany FLEX m is a registered trademark of GLOBEtrotter Software Inc VisTools library is copyrighted software of Visual Kinematics Inc VKI containing confidential trade secret information belonging to VKI HOOPS graphics system is a proprietary software product of and copyrighted by Tech Soft America Inc All other brand or product names are trademarks or regist
87. Certain key words are optional others are required and indicated with R If you omit an allowed value or setting the default is used Table B 1 shows the directional light definition attributes Table B 1 Directional Light Definition Attributes Key Words Allowed Values Settings Defaults name R 1 32 characters none color color name or RGB values white switch on or off on direction R XYZ coordinates in decimal none values between 0 and 1 The following example shows the format for defining directional lights DIRECTIONAL LIGHT name dir lightl color white switch on direction 0 3 0 2 1 0 END B 8 EPD Visualizer User Guide EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File Light Definitions Table B 2 shows the point light definition attributes Table B 2 Point Light Definition Attributes Key Words Allowed Values Settings Defaults name R 1 32 characters none color color name or RGB values white switch on or off on position R xyz coordinates in decimal values none The following example shows the format for defining point lights POINT_ LIGHT name color switch position END point _light1l white on 2 0 0 0 2 0 Table B 3 shows the spot light definition attributes Table B 3 Spot Light Definition Attributes Key Words Allowed Values Settings Defaults name R 1 32 characters none color color nam
88. D_HOME install Represents the default path where the current UNIX cd EPD_HOME install Windows version of the product is installed Menu selections Vault gt Check Out gt Lock Indicates a command that you can choose from a menu Command buttons and options Mandatory check box AC button Description text box Names selectable items from dialog boxes options buttons toggles text boxes and switches User input and code Wheel Assy details xvf dev rsto Enter command gt plot config Enter the text in a text box or on a command line Where system output and user input are mixed user input is in bold System output CT struct aename Indicates system responses Parameter and variable names tar cvf dev rsto filename Supply an appropriate substitute for each parameter or variable for example replace filename with an actual file name Commands and keywords The ciaddobj command creates an instance of a binder Shows command syntax Text string SRFGROUPA or SRFGROUPA Shows text strings Enclose text strings with single or double quotation marks Integer n Supply an integer for n Real number Xx Supply a real number for x mkdir cdrom Indicates the root superuser prompt on command lines rloginremote_system_name 1 Indicates the C shell prompt on command root lines rlogin remote_system_name 1
89. E 73 88 END One DEFINE OBJECT section is required for each object type L NAME lt object name gt must appear before any DEFINE FIELD in the DEFINE OBJECT section l Additional fields can be defined by DEFINE_FIELD statements Lo l A DEFINE_FIELD statement has the following syntax o DEFINE_FIELD field_name starting_position ending_position A comma is a separator The field to be displayed by automatic tagging is defined by a DEFINE AUTO TAG statement optional If required fields OBJECT _ID MODEL and OBJECT _ TYPE must be defined for tagging define them in this section by DEFINE AUTO TAG statement A DEFINE AUTO TAG statement has the following syntax DEFINE AUTO TAG lt field name gt l The field name must be defined by a DEFINE FIELD statement BEFORE l it is defined for automatic tagging EPD Visualizer User Guide Database Interface Creating an ASCII Database DEFINE OBJECT OBJECT TYPE PLPIPE DEFINE FIELD SUBMODEL 45 72 DEFINE FIELD ESID 89 94 DEFINE FIELD NPS1 95 102 DEFINE FIELD NPS2 103 110 DEFINE FIELD NPS3 111 118 DEFINE FIELD NPS4 119 126 DEFINE FIELD SPEC MCC 127 138 DEFINE FIELD DESC 139 162 DEFINE FIELD MATERIAL 163 178 DEFINE FIELD STOCK_ID 179 190 DEFINE FIELD line no 191 222 is EFINE AUTO TAG LINE NO
90. E to MODEL Testing the Query Database To test the Query Database and the related functions select Database gt Query Database In the Query Database window click Select Query from File In the Select Query File window displayed next select or specify subvar sql or nosubvar sql These files contain simple queries and reside in the VIS_HOME common sqldemo directory The subvar sql file shows the use of substitution variables For the query that uses a substitution variable enter either PCV101 or PCV102 in the substitution value text field then press Return Note that these values must be enclosed in single quotes Click Submit to submit the query Each query you submit displays the Query Database Data window which contains the result of the query If you click on the record data to select it you can then select Zoom Highlight or Add to Selection List To return to the original view select View gt Primary View gt Show from the Visualizer window Testing Verification To test the verification function select Database gt Query Database In the Query Database window click Select Query from File In the Select Query File window displayed next specify nosubvar sql then submit the entry EPD Visualizer User Guide A 19 Database Interface DBMS Demo In the Query Database Data window click on the record data then select Zoom and Highlight Next select the Verification Tool from the Visualizer tool p
91. EPD Visualizer User Guide Optegra Release 6 DOC36761 011 Parametric Technology Corporation Copyright 2001 Parametric Technology Corporation All Rights Reserved User documentation from Parametric Technology Corporation PTC is subject to copyright laws of the United States and other countries and is provided under a license agreement which restricts copying disclosure and use of such documentation PTC hereby grants to the licensed user the right to make copies in printed form of PTC user documentation provided on software or documentation media but only for internal noncommercial use by the licensed user in accordance with the license agreement under which the applicable software and documentation are licensed Any copy made hereunder shall include the Parametric Technology Corporation copyright notice and any other proprietary notice provided by PTC User documentation may not be disclosed transferred or modified without the prior written consent of PTC and no authorization is granted to make copies for such purposes Information described in this document is furnished for general information only is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a warranty or commitment by PTC PTC assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this document The software described in this document is provided under written license agreement contains valuable trade secrets and p
92. Files e ASCII Graphic File Contents e Error Messages EPD Visualizer User Guide E 1 DIMENSION III Interface Introduction Introduction The DIMENSION III interface PYGENPOLY is distributed with the DIMENSION III product PYGENPOLY generates ASCII or binary graphic files from DIMENSION III viewfiles The ASCII and binary files contain the same information but have different advantages The ASCII files are compatible with all systems but the binary file is processed significantly faster than an ASCII file However binary files are not compatible with all systems DIMENSION III viewfiles created on VA Xstations have compatible binary files with DECstations running ULTRIX DIMENSION III viewfiles created on HP Apollos have compatible binary files with Sun SPARCstations HPs and Apollos When you transfer binary files to a different workstation using FTP you must set the transfer mode to binary using the binary command E 2 EPD Visualizer User Guide DIMENSION III Interface Generating Graphic Files Generating Graphic Files You can generate graphic files for one or more DIMENSION III viewfiles To process multiple viewfiles enter the commands in an AEGIS script file or a VAX command file and then execute the file The following sections provide the steps for processing single or multiple viewfiles Processing Single Viewfiles To process single viewfiles at your system prompt enter pvgenpoly You a
93. H 8 EPD Visualizer User Guide Environment Variables PostScript Output PostScript Output The following environment variables configure PostScript output behavior PVS_PRINT_COMMAND PVS_PRINT_COMMAND specifies the command used to print the output file for Section Output and Graphics Output Its default value is lpr The command does not contain any parameter other than the file name PVS_PRINT_FACTOR PVS_PRINT_FACTOR specifies the scale factor applied to the PostScript output of the Section window to respect the user defined scale PVS_PRINT_FACTOR does not affect the output from the graphics window Its value should be undefined or equal to 1 0 in most cases EPD Visualizer User Guide H 9 Environment Variables Section Plane Section Plane The following environment variables configure section plane behavior PVS_SECTION_AXIS PVS_SECTION_AXIS specifies which axis of a reference is used to orientate the normal of the sectioning plane in motions to a reference Legal values are x y z X Y and Z The default value is X CVDPA_SECTIONS_DIR CVDPA_SECTIONS_DIR specifies the default directory used when saving sections from the Sectioning Save dialog box H 10 EPD Visualizer User Guide Environment Variables Zoning ZONING The following environment variables configure zoning behavior CVDPA_ZONES_DIR CVDPA_ZONES_DIR defines the directory used to store graphics files generated when creating a zo
94. Honna D Y i Ta Digitice To Reference i E 8 2 EPD Visualizer User Guide Moving a Plane Setting Plane Dynamics setting Plane Dynamics You can set a sectioning plane to be dynamic This allows you to move the sectioning plane along a path by itself or while it is attached to selected objects This is useful in checking for interferences between moving and immobile components You can enable plane dynamics by selecting Plane Dynamic from the Sectioning menu or by pressing the Plane Dynamic button in the Sectioning Motion window Declaring the sectioning plane as dynamic does not interfere with the sectioning process You can enable or disable the dynamic setting at any time without an adverse effect You begin to perform path traversal by a sectioning plane by selecting Item Dynamics from the Edit menu Selecting Item Dynamics from the Edit menu allows you to move a sectioning plane in conjunction with selected items to which it is rigidly linked You begin to perform rotation and translation by a sectioning plane by displaying the Sectioning Motion dialog box Some discussion of path traversal relating specifically to sectioning planes is included here For detailed information about performing path traversal refer to Chapter 3 Using EPD Visualizer Menus When a sectioning plane is set to dynamic two situations occur depending on the contents of the selection list These situations are the following e
95. ID purchasing FILE_NAME The fourth table is the PVS_SQL_ STMT table This table contains the following fields e QUERY NAME Query statement name used in the querying e SEQ NUM The number used in ordering lines that constitute a complete query This field is incriminated when a query statement exceeds the maximum length of the QUERY_STMT field e QUERY STMT Query text Below is an example of this table Table A 4 Sample PVS_SQL_ STMT Table QUERY_NAME SEQ_NUM QUERY_STMT constructio 1 select START END from n CONSTRUCTION PVS SUB VAL where a 5 OBJECT ID OBJECT_ID and Se Ree ae CONSTRUCTION LINE NUM vs PVS SUB VAL LINE NUM constructio 3 n constructio 4 n purchasing 1 select PRICE UNIT from h 5 PURCHASING where OBJECT_ID Parise OBJECT_ID tag 1 select TAG TEXT from TAGS where OBJECT ID OBJECT ID tag 2 a a When an object is digitized Visualizer automatically registers three dynamic substitution variables OBJECT_ID FILE_NAME and QUERY_ TYPE The values for EPD Visualizer User Guide A 13 Database Interface DBMS SQL Interface OBJECT_ID and FILE_NAME are obtained from the digitized object and the value for QUERY_TYPE is obtained from the currently selected QUERY_TYPE in the Query Types dialog box These variables are used by the query statement to obtain the verification information You can also use additional tables to p
96. IF Tagged Image File GIF CompuServe Graphics Image File RGB Silicon Graphics Image format RAS Sun Microsystems Raster File TGA TruevisionTarga Image File ce Color Space RGB Full color image Gray Gray scale image d Image Depth 24 bit image Use the complete color spectrum 8 bit image Average some color settings All image file formats support 24 and 8 bit image depths except for GIF which is limited to 8 bit 4 To save the raster image click Write File 5 To view the raster image at the operating system prompt enter the following command display filename EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus File Menu PostScript Graphics Output You can capture an image of a view displayed in the EPD Visualizer graphics window in PostScript format the image and print it To do this perform the following steps 1 Select File gt Graphics Output gt PostScript to display the PostScript Output dialog box Petipa PuatScriph ile Hane Paper Am OOS O Dietat DUS Detter as 0 int les Lindacapr TUS rnal RS S IT in fee Porbult E GIS IT ih BA Gee n S1 inm Sorel G10 287 inm tel GEST EO nu m GO K HT dirt Postieript AO AO TU in Witte Hagticript 2 In the PostScript File Name field enter the file name with or without a directory path You can overwrite an existing file name by entering its name 3 Select the
97. III CADDS MEDUSA can be accessed transparently through the EPD Visualizer interface which uses a common graphic file format Please note The MEDUSA Process Equipment Design System MPDS interface is documented in the INFO file of the most current MPDS release beginning with Release 12 2 1 2 EPD Visualizer User Guide Introduction to EPD Visualizer What Is EPD Visualizer How Can You Use EPD Visualizer Designers engineers facility owners contractors and members of regulatory agencies can inspect complete CAD models at any stage of development You can view conceptual alternatives construction ready designs or collections of existing CAD models quickly and easily In an instant you can compute and display views of even the most complex project or mechanical assembly from any distance and at any angle You can become more efficient by using this state of the art software for everyday tasks or to communicate your work product to clients by conducting e Walk throughs of proposed projects e Preliminary site planning or general arrangement studies e Internal design reviews between project teams and discipline groups e Simulation of equipment installation and removal e Human engineering studies e Operator training e Shutdown and disassembly simulations and studies e Disaster planning and simulation e Sales presentations No special skills or training are required to use EPD Visualizer Engineering management
98. Items do not display in the graphics window until they are all completely rendered Please note Fora more realistic view use double buffering when performing such operations as camera or item traversal and any walk through operations Shadows With radiosity or ray tracing you can control the display of shadows e On Displays shadows in the 3D scene e Off Makes shadows invisible With Shadows set to off the 3D scene is illuminated by light only EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 47 Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu To specify which objects cast or receive shadows select the object s and click the Shadowing Controls button Refer to Shadowing Controls on page 3 48 for more information 3 Click Apply to see the effects of the rendering on your 3D scene Shadowing Controls If you select radiosity or ray trace as the rendering method you can control shadows on an object by object basis To set shadowing controls use the following steps 1 Select the object s for which you want to inhibit the casting or receiving of shadows 2 Click the Shadowing Controls button The Shadowing Controls dialog box displays Shadow Settings Apply Local E Recelving Remove Local E Casting Nermove Al Chase 3 Set the following options e Shadow Settings Receiving Controls whether or not an object can receive shadows The default is On Casting Controls whether or not an object can c
99. LE_NAME is plant and the query type selected in Visualizer is purchasing with the preceding example tables the following query statement is retrieved select PRICE UNIT from PURCHASING where OBJECT ID OBJECT ID A substitution variable OBJECT_ID with a value of 12345680 is registered This query statement is submitted and the values returned are displayed in the Database Information section of the Object Verification dialog box EPD Visualizer User Guide A 15 Database Interface DBMS SQL Interface Automatic Tag Tool The Tag tool labels the digitized object in Visualizer with the object data retrieved from the connecting DBMS Automatic tagging is done using the same mechanism as the Verify command with one exception the query type is not obtained from the Query Type list it is always TAG The returned value is used as the tag data for the digitized object Environment Setup Visualizer SQL Interface requires some setup on the hosts running Oracle and hosts running Visualizer Before using Visualizer SQL Interface perform the following steps On all Hosts 1 Register the DBMS network daemon program ID by adding dbmsnetd 200007 to all the etc rpc files You can also accomplish this with the following command setenv dbmsnetd 200007 2 Set the Oracle RDBMS system identifier with the following command setenv ORACLE SID SID_name The ORACLE_ SID for the host running ORACLE and the hosts running Visualizer m
100. MS The DBMS Interface lets you send SQL queries statements to the connecting DBMS database The SQL query statements can be pre defined in a file in the connecting DBMS or entered interactively in To select a query from DBMS use the following steps 1 Click Select Query From DBMS The Select Query From DBMS dialog box displays Cue oy Murs iting constr iting prop iting purchase iting tag wale oonastr wah percep Wabre purchase wabre_tag ee Fs Cancel Retr ewp Help 2 Select a query name you want from the list Query names are obtained from the PVS_SQL STMT table of the connecting DBMS Refer to Appendix A Database Interface for more information on the format of this table 3 Click Retrieve 4 The query statement corresponding to the name selected is retrieved and displayed in the Query Editor The names of the substitution variables are extracted and listed in the Variable Substitution box 3 92 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus Database Menu Query Database Data The following Query Database Data dialog box displays if any data is returned by the SQL statement Gers Male Hainber if Nescorida 7 mi Pril SOO CONTRO WAR Ca Pruids SOC COMTROT UANUT oo i J e a toil ln Clear oiar a DEE Wy fae Selection Llst Clase Sas Waet Select File Help The following text explains the fields and buttons on the Query Database Data dialo
101. Mulipila Sea tinmirny Wasiluliby Auni Mialan ulprk Gpaths Hanra References Arive Aekerciecs 4 I 5 Indhia H rieren Sern Ehhe Bevin Color a It evan Ae Ienrnd Inston riirii A iin phai Wane vil leplen awen EPD Visualizer User Guide 7 15 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Sectioning the Scene from Multiple References Fike Fuil Wiw ed rt a H Shel Gerbibwse o baaken VIB mmol k Olhtanee SERT Cin ha Hanis ie PIPIN pE Milke Deer sias i LEIS k ial Rerin secting E rike Selle La fs ahr Mediu awhe os a ae eee Far oe Sock Pani ael EEF i filsplae upc Char apri 7 16 EPD Visualizer User Guide Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Sectioning the Scene from Multiple References Configuring Multiple Sectioning You specify multiple sectioning in the Gpath Multiple Sectioning window You display the window by selecting Edit gt Item Dynamics gt Gpath Sectioning You can open the window in either of the following circumstances e The selection list contains at least one object e The sectioning plane is specified as Dynamic Selecting Sectioning gt Plane Dynamic makes this specification which allows multiple sectioning by a plane with no attached object Gpath Multiple Sectioning 2 Gpaths Names ney fete Preferemers aa tjm i1 org 14 14 i ong fiz app ha ot SAP inaialdual Reference Sewing does ja deg i i Active
102. PD Visualizer Basic Concepts Neutral Graphic Files You can add any number of textual and binary neutral graphic files during an EPD Visualizer session A textual graphic file contains the definitions of geometric objects colors lights materials and paths in EPD Visualizer ASCII format You can edit or view this file using a standard text editor The host CAD system typically appends a gaf graphic ASCII file extension to the textual file name A binary graphic file is an encoded file that defines geometric objects and colors in EPD Visualizer binary format These files are extremely compact and can be processed many times faster than textual graphic files However unlike a textual file you cannot edit or view this file as readable text The host CAD system typically appends a gbf graphic binary file extension to the binary file name You can convert textual graphic files to binary graphic files and binary graphic files to textual graphic files For further information refer to Appendix B EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File and Appendix C EPD Visualizer Binary Graphic File After you add a graphic file to EPD Visualizer each subsequent graphic file added is automatically converted to the units of the first graphic file such as feet miles or meters For example if you add a graphic file defined in meters then add a graphic file defined in inches and another defined in millimeters the last two graphic f
103. Screen Axis Motions Suppose you want to digitize two points that cannot be visible together in the same view To do so perform the following steps 1 Load the graphics files After you load the files the main view looks as follows 2 Drag down with the middle mouse button while pressing the Shift key Do this without selecting or deactivating any tool The view quickly unzooms so you can view the whole scene 3 Drag left with the middle mouse button to quickly center the scene EPD Visualizer User Guide 1 23 Introduction to EPD Visualizer Permanent Mouse Dynamics 4 Drag left with the right mouse button to rotate the scene and obtain the following view 5 Perform additional rotation and zoom operations to obtain an ideal view for digitizing the first point Now you can accurately digitize a point between the rim and the tire as show below 1 24 EPD Visualizer User Guide Introduction to EPD Visualizer Permanent Mouse Dynamics 6 Perform additional rotation translation and unzoom operations to focus the view on the reverse side of the tire Now you can digitize a second point that was not visible in the previous view as shown below EPD Visualizer User Guide 1 25 Introduction to EPD Visualizer Permanent Mouse Dynamics Model Axis Motions Model Axis motions allow you to translate the camera on a model axis or rotate it around a model axis You can enable the model axis motions at
104. The following is the format for the extents definition section extents_section_number xmin ymin zmin xmax ymax zmax In this format extents_section_number is a 2 byte integer equal to 0 and xmin ymin zmin xmax ymax and zmax are 4 byte single precision floating point numbers defining the extents of the geometry The following examples show a textual extents definition section and a corresponding binary extents definition section in hexadecimal notation Textual Extents Definition EXTENTS xmin 10 0 ymin 10 0 zmin 10 0 xmax 10 0 ymax 10 0 zmax 10 0 END Binary Extents Definition 0000C0240000C0240000C0240000 gt EXTENTS 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 400240004002400040024000 gt 10 0 10 0 10 0 EPD Visualizer User Guide C 5 EPD Visualizer Binary Graphic File Color Definition Color Definition The color definition section is optional This section is used to define colors that you can use when defining the color of geometric items You can define any number of colors within the limits of the color table on your workstation The following is the format for the color definition section color_section_number number_of_colors color_descriptions In this format color_section_number is a 2 byte integer equal to 1 and number of colors is a 4 byte integer specifying the number of colors The following is the format for color_descriptions color_name_length color_name color_intensities In
105. The selection list is empty e Objects are selected These two circumstances as they relate to sectioning planes are described in the following sections Moving the Plane Without Objects Selected When a sectioning plane is moved along a path and the selection list is empty the movement is the same as for any other moving object As the plane moves along the path the scene and section view reflect its motion You can enable the movie recorder during the plane motion At the end of each step EPD Visualizer refreshes the scene and the Section window according to the active parameters produced by the sectioning operations The Section window if visible always shows the section as facing the plane At any time you can use the Sectioning Motion dialog box to manually move the plane For information about the sectioning operations and the Section window refer to Chapter 7 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning EPD Visualizer User Guide 8 3 Moving a Plane Setting Plane Dynamics Orienting During the plane traversal you can use both interactive and time delay methods The orientation setting Constant Vertical or To Path allows you to manage the plane s behavior during the movement The procedure for setting the interactive and time delay methods and the orientation are explained in detail in Item Dynamics on page 3 15 A description of the orientations as they apply to a sectioning plane
106. To display a 2D box or 3D pyramid for your secondary views select View gt Secondary Views gt Position Display gt 2D 3D By default the color of the orientation box is black or white depending on your background color You can switch between this default and a color of your choice by selecting Options gt Temp Color gt User This command specifies to use the 3 44 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu color defined by the PVS_TEMP_COLOR environment variable Refer to Temp Color on page 3 75 for further information on setting this variable To delete secondary views select View gt Secondary Views gt Delete Note that EPD Visualizer removes secondary views when performing radiosity or ray trace display Perspective To increase or decrease your viewing area similar to a wide angle lens select View gt Perspective The Perspective Definition dialog box displays as shown in the following figure Perspecthye Angle zz C PE O O Close Apply Help Use the slider scale to set the perspective angle to increase or decrease your viewing area Rendering EPD Visualizer enables you to generate realistic scenes with a combination of material properties lighting and rendering methods For a general discussion of rendering methods refer to Rendering on page 2 2 EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 45 Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu To render an image
107. Views list and click one of the following buttons located below the Member Views list e Up Arrow Moves the view up a level in the Member Views list e Down Arrow Moves a view down a level in the Member Views list e Right Arrow Moves a view from the Member Views list back to the View List 3 Click Apply after the views are in the proper order To add to a view sequence use the following steps 1 Click the View Sequence name you want to edit 2 Select a view name from the View List and click the Left Arrow button under the View List The view name is added to the list of Member Views and is removed from the View List 3 Click Apply to save your changes To edit a view sequence name use the following steps 1 Click the name in the View Sequence list 2 Click Edit Name and a text box displays the selected name 3 Click OK after you edit the name To delete a view sequence use the following steps 1 Click the name in the View Sequence list 2 Click Delete and the view sequence is removed from the View Sequence list and temporarily stored To restore a deleted view sequence click Undo Delete to restore the view sequence You cannot restore the deleted view sequence after you close the dialog box define a new view sequence or edit a view sequence name EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 63 Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu Playback After you define a view sequence you can play back a view sequence
108. XIS environment variable 7 10 8 9 H 10 PVS_STEREO environment variable H 3 PVS_STEREO_ANGLE environment variable H 3 PVS_TEMP_COLOR environment variable 3 45 H 3 PVS_UNNAMED_REF environment variable B 13 H 8 Q Query type defining 3 87 purpose 3 86 R Radiosity description 2 2 setting controls for 3 50 Raster image capturing 3 9 Ray tracing setting controls for 3 49 References characteristics 3 29 defining 3 32 in sections information about 7 10 sectioning from multiple 7 14 Rendering controlling 1 12 9 15 methods 2 2 ray tracing 2 3 suppressing 1 9 1 12 9 15 Reports of interference checking results 5 10 saving database reports 3 94 Reset Orientation button 3 27 Reset Position button 3 27 Rotation how to rotate selections 3 23 interference checking 2 17 overview 2 16 purpose 3 22 restoring position 3 27 S Save Path dialog box 3 34 Scene clipping 7 5 sectioning 7 6 Screen axis motions behavior 1 22 example 1 23 purpose 1 21 Secondary selection clearing 3 83 creating 3 82 creating for interference checking 5 7 Secondary Views 3 44 Section displaying in a separate view 7 6 measuring distances 7 20 saving in a file 7 29 Section window graphics output 7 36 mouse behavior 7 8 view options 7 9 Sectioning from multiple references configuring 7 17 from multiple references performing 7 19 from multiple references saving result 7 20 purpose 3 97 6 2 starting 6 3 Sectioning M
109. _ td file Currently the Digital version of cadds2pvs cannot read _pd files Therefore use the u option However with this option colors and the Backfacing Polygons option might suffer Assembly Design might only work on some platforms such as Sun and HP Also if the ODB_ SERVER is the wrong revision it might not work well with cadds2pvs Check the version of CADDS 51 or CADDS4X with which the ODB_SERVER is normally used The cadds2pvs version 2 0 relates to an ODB_ SERVER for CADDS 5 Rev 4 1 or later while cadds2pvs 1 0 applies to earlier versions of ODB_SERVER To reduce the size of a graphic ASCII file consider using lower values for the SMOOTH option to the SHADE PICTURE command You can also use The UNIX command compress for long term storage of graphic ASCII files Messages and Errors If an illegal option is supplied help is provided on standard error For example enter the following command to display a description of how to use this command while in csh cadds2pvs help amp more F 6 EPD Visualizer User Guide CADDS Interface Using the CADDS Interface The following informational messages are produced which you can suppress using the s option Units are XXXX As a_pd file is successfully read its model units are displayed No layer color discrimination assigning Refer to Restrictions on page F 6 Colors are assigned automatically XXXXXXX bytes read The number of bytes successfully r
110. a Movie Loading a Movie To load a movie file use the following steps 1 Select File gt Load The following figure shows the EPD Visualizer Movie Selection dialog box Aptinelpop coves tda arin wies ne Directories kosica lhpiin pelbsprajlevpw adal alimiyrie si ihpin pelkup raje atdul ulimit si J Selected Horit Ihpimecibuprojievpualdatu m weap lantar Laud Fillur Cancel Help 2 Double click a file name in the Movies list or enter a file name in the Selected Movie box and click Load The default extension for movie files is mv These files are generated by the EPD Visualizer Movie Recorder Refer to File Selection Dialog Box on page 1 17 for more information on using the filter option Click OK pvsmovie loads all the movie frames specified in the movie file into memory This might take several minutes The amount of memory used is approximately the sum of the sizes of all the movie files If your system does not have adequate memory it will take significantly longer to load and play the movie sequence EPD Visualizer Movie Recorder records movie files using 256 colors If your system s colormap does not have enough color cells to handle this the system displays warning messages and the movie player adjusts the color usage accordingly On any platform it is possible during pvsmovie loading to receive the following error message printed in your startup window Error Unable to
111. aded or transparent surface The normal vector to the plane appears as a short line starting from the plane s center The center of the plane is indicated by a small filled in circle The local X and Y axes of the plane are displayed as two lines belonging to the plane The local X axis is longer than the local Y axis to aid in its identification A plane s local axes are always used to position it at a reference Gpath references include orientation specifications for local axes that position the plane Enabling or disabling the plane display immediately interrupts any display update currently in process Unlike the movement of a plane to a reference either global axes or the plane s local axes control the plane s rotation depending on the option that you choose Getting Started on page 8 2 describes how to rotate a plane with the Sectioning Motion dialog box specifying the Size The size of the plane can automatically fit the extents of the scene or you can define it The size scale allows you to specify the size used for displaying the plane A null value indicates that the plane has to fit the extents of the scene Both visible and invisible objects are used to evaluate the extents You can modify the low value high value step value and the decimal places using the Scale Customization window Click the right mouse button on the current scale value to display the Scale Customization window Scek Customization lwa ule Fle
112. al origin is located at the geometric center of the selection list but you can modify this by selecting the Use Local CPL button in the Translate Rotate Selection List dialog box which is shown in the following figure Setting the environment variable PVS_LOCAL_CPL to any value allows you to start EPD Visualizer with the Local CPL button enabled Selecting the Use Local CPL button has the following effects e The local origin is at the virtual point XO YO ZO of the last selected graphic file e The X Y and Z axes are respectively defined in the EPD Visualizer textual graphic file as 1 0 0 0 1 0 and 0 0 1 e EPD Connect is able to load objects with a translation and rotation of the graphic file The local origin reflects the transformations applied to objects and accounts for the translations and rotations that occur when an object is loaded from EPD Connect e Due to the three preceding effects selecting the Use Local CPL button allows the reproduction of a local origin corresponding to the TOP Cplane used in creating the object in a CAD CAM system 3 22 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus Edit Menu Before you start Translate Rotate perform the following steps 1 Add item s to translate or rotate to the selection list 2 Select Edit gt Item Dynamics gt Translate Rotate The Translate Rotate Selection List dialog box displays as shown in the following figure Tre rile Fee il TE Caordinal
113. alette and use it to select the valve that is highlighted The Object Verification Window should now display information about what was selected and all the database information that has been entered is also stored Please note Database information remains blank if the query types were not added in a previous build or if no information has been entered on the selected item Select the Verification Tool and use it to select an object In order to see all the data populated by parsedb and parsedat you can submit the following queries one at a time in the Query Database window SELECT FROM PLX99 SELECT FROM PLFITTING SELECT FROM PVS OBJECT SELECT FROM PVS QUERY SELECT FROM PVS SQL STMT A 20 EPD Visualizer User Guide Appendix B EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File This appendix provides information about the format and structure of the EPD Visualizer textual graphic file Examples of actual graphics information are provided to help you create or edit a textual graphic file The following topics are discussed in this appendix e Textual Graphic File Contents e Textual Graphic File Format e Control Options e DBMS Control Options e Extents Definitions e Color Definitions e Light Definitions e Material Definitions e Path Definitions e GPath Definitions e Object Definitions e Gpath Multiple Sectioning EPD Visualizer User Guide B 1 EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File Textual Graphic File Con
114. alettes The palettes are located vertically alongside the graphics window The topics discussed in this chapter are e Tool Palette e Walk Through Palettes e Spaceball You can access online help for the palettes by selecting Help gt On Context You can also point to the tools buttons or slider scales and a brief description of each one displays in the prompt window For basics on using the palettes refer to Chapter 1 Introduction to EPD Visualizer EPD Visualizer User Guide 9 1 Palettes Tool Palette Tool Palette The Tool Palette contains tools that require you to perform an action with the mouse in the graphics window Figure 9 1 shows the Tool Palette which is the upper five rows of icons consisting of 15 selections Figure 9 1 Tool Palette Eil o Wiere oirph loela eles o abase nleremnae e nlan Helpi F Hes say z P bee D gt La Pili Bl S Dlplay update conplere You can perform the following tasks with the tools The tools are listed left to right and by row starting with the top row e Select items e Select all items in a specified volume e Retrieve information about selected items e Tree select and scroll e Permanent zoom by rectangular area e Zoom a selected area e Set a new camera position 9 2 EPD Visualizer User Guide Palettes Tool Palette e Set anew camera target e Set anew camera position and camera target e Measure the distanc
115. ame R 1 32 characters none base_color color name or RGB values colorless specular_hue base_color_shades gray_shades base_color_shade s reflectance integers 0 10 0 none 10 maximum 0 transparency integers 0 10 0 opaque 10 clear specular_intensity specular_glare R integers 0 10 0 dull 10 shiny integers 0 10 0 low 10 high symbol_size decimal value distance between position and target EPD Visualizer User Guide EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File Material Definitions The following example a graphics file with material definitions MATERIAL name polished copper base _ color 0 79 0 45 0 15 specular _hue base _ color shades reflectance 5 transparency 0 specular intensity 5 specular _ glare 10 END MATERIAL name shiny paint specular hue gray_shades reflectance 1 transparency 0 specular intensity 7 specular glare 7 END MATERIAL name green glossy paint base_ color green specular _hue gray_shades reflectance 1 transparency 0 specular intensity 10 specular glare 10 END MATERIAL name smoked_glass base color 0 4 0 4 0 4 specular hue gray_shades reflectance 4 transparency 5 specular intensity 10 specular _ glare 10 END EPD Visualizer User Guide B 11 EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File Path Definitions Path Defin
116. amera position over the vertical axis of the 3D scene Orbit Under The Orbit Under tool enables you to orbit the camera position under the vertical axis of the 3D scene Turn Right The Turn Right tool enables you to turn the camera target to the right 9 20 EPD Visualizer User Guide Palettes Walk Through Palettes Turn Left The Turn Left tool enables you to turn the camera target to the left Look Up a t The Look Up tool enables you to look up the vertical axis of the 3D scene Look Down TN f gt The Look Up tool enables you to look up the vertical axis of the 3D scene Level Off to Camera Position The Look Up tool enables you to look up the vertical axis of the 3D scene Level Off to Camera Target The Level Off to Camera Target tool enables you to level off to the camera target As you level off either up or down you maintain the camera target EPD Visualizer User Guide 9 21 Palettes Walk Through Palettes Turn Orbit Angle Slider Scale Turn Orbit Angle Degrees Set the number of degrees the camera position moves in an 13 angular direction E d To customize the slider scale Click your right mouse button on the slider scale value For more information on customizing the slider scale click the HELP button or refer to Slider Scales on page 1 13 9 22 EPD Visualizer User Guide Palettes Spaceball sopaceball The Spaceball interface is su
117. and path definition sections are not available for binary graphic files The information represented in binary format is more compact and can be processed at a much faster rate However binary graphic files are system dependent and the binary data generated must be compatible with or convertible by EPD Visualizer The binary graphic file is a contiguous block of binary data Line breaks blank space s tabs and field separators have been inserted in the examples for clarification The following topics are discussed in this appendix e Binary Graphic File Format e Control Options e Extents Definition e Color Definition e Object Definition EPD Visualizer User Guide C 1 EPD Visualizer Binary Graphic File Binary Graphic File Format Binary Graphic File Format All EPD Visualizer binary graphic files must begin with a file identifier which is an unsigned 1 byte character indicating the system on which it was generated The following are the currently accepted unsigned 1 byte characters e A value of 255 hex FF indicates that the binary graphic file was generated on a DECstation where the byte and bit order are backward e A value of 254 hex FE indicates that the binary graphic file was generated on a Sun or HP workstation or another type of processor where the byte order is forward and the bit order is backward Integers and floating point numbers in the binary graphic file must be compatible with the format of
118. ane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Measuring Distance in Sections Dimensions appear near the Section window boundary To avoid overlaps you can scroll the window before making new dimensions Selecting Distance gt Undo removes the last dimension and you can repeat the operation to remove additional dimensions in a sequence reverse to that in which they were made Pressing the right hand mouse button in the Section window removes all dimensions and recenters the Section window on the extents of the section The dimensions have the following parts e The horizontal vertical or real distance in the current unit The text size is 1 80 the size of the Section window s maximum dimension and the size of the last inserted dimension is applied to all existing ones e One baseline with no arrows e Two extension lines Distance Between Two Points You can use Sections Points to measure the distance between any two points on a section With this tool you need to digitize two points You digitize a point by clicking the left mouse button on a location in a visible section You can digitize the points in the main view if the section is visible in it or in the Section window Also you can digitize vertices as well as points between two vertices of a segment Cross markers appear on the digitized points The distance between these points and the distances along the X Y and Z axes are displayed in the status window as follows Di
119. ast shadows The default is On e Apply Local Apply shadow controls to object s on the selection list e Remove Local Remove shadow controls from object s on the selection list e Remove All Remove shadow controls from all object s Ray Trace Controls If you select ray trace as the rendering method you can control the quality of the image and the rendering speed during ray trace calculations 3 48 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu To set ray tracing controls use the following steps 1 Click Ray Trace Controls in the Rendering Control dialog box The following figure shows the Ray Tracing Control dialog box Ant Aliasing Accuracy Light Bounce Limit cw High o High L EE Rir race Slalus Opdale Inlerrupls on CHT On ae I JE Help 2 Set the following options e Anti Aliasing Accuracy Use the Anti Aliasing Accuracy slider scale to set the level of anti aliasing Anti aliasing controls the stair stepping effect of surface edges The lower the anti alias accuracy the greater the stair stepping effect You can generate fairly realistic scenes with low anti aliasing levels Increasing anti aliasing lengthens the time to perform a ray trace calculation e Light Bounce Limit Use the Light Bounce Limit slider scale to set the light bounce limit Light bounce controls the number of times a ray of light can bounce around a 3D scene You can g
120. aterial Please note You cannot restore the deleted material after you close the dialog box define a new material or edit a material Text Properties With this option you can define the font font type variable or fixed alignment font size text color spacing between characters and text angle Any newly created text or text on the selection list adopts the properties you set in the Text Properties dialog box 3 38 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus Edit Menu To set the text properties use the following steps 1 Select Edit gt Text Properties The following figure shows the Text Properties dialog box Fists Fiul Taper Alignmunt a variuble E ane Civlur l e c a J seca i ste Font Seale Character Spacing Angle l ll 15 Er EE 2 Set the following options as necessary before with the Text and Object Tagging tools e Font Type Variable Define the specific font size with the Font Scale Factor slider scale Fixed Select a predefined font type and size e Fonts Click the name of a font e Alignment Set the alignment of the text based on the digitize marker from one of the following options TL top left TC top center TR top right CL center left CC center center CR center right BL bottom left BC bottom center BR bottom right For example if you select TR the digitize marker appears at the top
121. aterial Editor dialog box displays as shown in the following figure Material Mame i Buse Calor Specular Hur ad Colorless Base Color Shades ditar ae Cire Shades Mirror Refiectaice Specular Intensity Piae ipa qe g C Cancel fut CEBE LIF Age 3 Set the following options as necessary e Material Name Enter a name for the material in the Material Name box 3 36 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus Edit Menu e Base Color Set the base color of the material or click the Colorless button to maintain the original color of the object e Mirror Reflectance Use the Mirror Reflectance scale to set the level of mirror reflectance in a material Mirror reflectance is used in ray tracing operations only None Results in a non reflective surface High Results in a highly reflective surface e Transparency Use the Transparency scale to specify a transparency factor Transparency is used in ray tracing operations only Opaque Results in an opaque or non transparent surface Clear Results in a clear or transparent surface e Specular Hue Set the specular hue of the material Base Color Shades Results in colored specular reflections Gray Shades Results in specular reflections in shades of gray e Specular Intensity Use the Specular Intensity scale to specify whether a material is dull shiny or in between Dull Results in a dull mate
122. ave Path window has a Path Filename field rather than a Selection field You type the location for saving the path or Gpath in the Path Filename field If you do not type the suffix gaf itis added automatically If you specify non existent directories they will be created if permissions permit The environment variable PVS_PATHS_DIR initializes the Filters field and the Directories list The environment variable PVS_PATHS_DIR is read only when EPD Visualizer starts or when you select File gt New Session in the EPD Visualizer window Visual Properties Use visual properties to define the following e Item Color Change the color of items in the 3D scene e Surface Materials Assign properties to the surfaces in the 3D scene Item Color With this option you can change the color of items in the 3D scene that are on the selection list 3 34 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus Edit Menu To change item colors in the 3D scene use the following steps 1 Pick up the Select tool from the palette and select the item s 2 Select Edit gt Visual Properties gt Item Color and the Item Color Editor dialog box displays Tein Color Close Apply He lpr 3 Refer to Color Editor on page 1 19 to use the Editor button 4 Click Apply to change the item color to the new color 5 Click Close when you finish changing colors of other selected items in the 3D scene Surface
123. aving a Metafile 3 8 Graphic Output 3 9 Capturing a Raster Image 3 9 PostScript Graphics Output 3 1 Obtaining Session Information 3 12 Quitting EPD Visualizer 3 13 Contents viii EPD Visualizer User Guide Edit Menu 3 14 Show 3 14 Hide 3 14 Show All 3 15 Hide All 3 15 Item Dynamics 3 15 Path Traversal 3 16 Translate Rotate 3 22 Restoring Positions After Translation or Rotation 3 27 Path Editor 3 28 The Path Editor 3 30 The Path Router 3 31 Visual Properties 3 34 Item Color 3 34 Surface Materials 3 35 Text Properties 3 38 Delete 3 40 View Menu 3 41 Primary View 3 41 Show 3 41 Set 3 41 View 3 42 All 3 42 Visible 3 42 Changing Views 3 43 Secondary Views 3 44 Perspective 3 45 Rendering 3 45 Shadowing Controls 3 48 Ray Trace Controls 3 48 Radiosity Controls 3 50 Lighting 3 51 Editor 3 51 Environment 3 60 View Editor 3 60 EPD Visualizer User Guide Contents ix 3 62 View Sequence Editor 3 62 Playback 3 64 Camera Traversal 3 66 Before You Start 3 66 Start Camera Traversal 3 69 Verify the Path Name 3 69 Blend Colors 3 69 Movie Recorder 3 70 Options Menu 3 73 Hide Show Palette 3 73 Left Right Palette 3 73 Preferences 3 74 Temp Color 3 75 Tools Menu 3 76 Tree 3 76 Item 3 77 Mouse Dynamics 3 77 Zoom 3 77
124. bit buttons You can turn left or right look up or down and orbit left right over or under For example if you click the Orbit Left button the camera position rotates left You can control the rendering of the 3D scene while you are using the walk through buttons The following describes these methods e To move the camera rapidly through the 3D scene without waiting for a complete rendering of all graphics click any of the walk through buttons before the 3D scene is completely displayed e To suppress the rendering of the 3D scene while using any of the walk through buttons hold down the Shift key while clicking the button e To change the Move Distance or Turn Orbit Angle during rendering of the 3D scene click the slider scales EPD Visualizer User Guide 1 9 Introduction to EPD Visualizer Using the EPD Visualizer Window Using the EPD Visualizer Window This section describes the EPD Visualizer window explains how to navigate within EPD Visualizer with the mouse and generally describes how to use the interface In addition to standard windowing features the EPD Visualizer window has specific features as shown below Ostejra visualzer 2 2 shome hennls elz files riar trajinif Pile Fait Wes Oplia Toul Seleri Malahan Inierteenore Kerlinuirg ely Move Dis lgce ell nersrs jum ne i pall The following sections explain the specific features of the EPD Visualizer w
125. by 180 degrees It is then translated by 100 meters along the x axis and 300 meters along the z axis The resulting output is directed to a file called equip upper gaf transpvs u meters 90 180 0 100 0 300 lt equipment gaf gt equip upper gaf cadds2pvsdb A UNIX Bourne shell script that reads graphic ASCII files produced by cadds2pvs and generates the contents of a EPD Visualizer database You can alter the script to suit your needs A suggested format of a pvs database definition file def file is mentioned by comments within the script The syntax for cadds2pvsdb is as follows cadds2pvsdb file gaf the option for cadds2pvsdb is the following file gaf One or more graphic ASCII files produced by cadds2pvs Please note Because the value of Object_ID in the graphics ASCII files created by cadds2pvs is now numeric special decoding is required This is accomplished by understanding that a model sequence number resides in the high order 16 bits starting from 32768 and a master index pointer MIPTR in the low 16 bits In the C language this is described with the formula object_id 32768 model_seq number lt lt 16 miptr F 12 EPD Visualizer User Guide Appendix G EPD Visualizer Movie Player This appendix provides information about the EPD Visualizer movie player pvsmovie and includes details on the following e Getting Started e Loading a Movie e Quitting pysmovie e Playing a Movie Th
126. calculations and keep the current display Off Renders the screen either when the radiosity calculation is complete or when you click Stop on the radiosity status popup menu e Boundary Continuity On Forces continuous shading across common edges of surface facets The radiosity calculation goes more slowly when you turn on boundary continuity e Solution Quality Sets the amount of reflected light that EPD Visualizer accounts for in the radiosity solution High Results in the highest quality radiosity solution it accounts for all direct and radiant light energy A high solution quality setting significantly slows down radiosity calculation time Low Results in lower quality radiosity solutions You can achieve excellent results by setting solution quality between low and medium since the radiosity calculation considers the most important light energy contributors first 3 50 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu e Overall Sensitivity Controls the shadow and illumination of all surfaces without their own local sensitivity settings None Results in no global sensitivity High Results in the maximum amount of sensitivity to shadows and light e Local Sensitivity Controls the shadow and illumination sensitivity of items on the selection list After setting local sensitivity apply your changes with the local sensitivity buttons described below Appl
127. ces attached to Gpaths or text Any new Gpath created by reading a gaf file or using the Path Editor dialog box appears with references in the graphics window regardless of the current path visibility setting Item Dynamics To translate rotate or move items along a path or Gpath and to modify reference point or local axes select Edit gt Item Dynamics EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 15 Using EPD Visualizer Menus Edit Menu Path Traversal This option enables you to move objects along predefined paths and Gpaths through the 3D scene The characteristics and control of path traversal and Gpath traversal differ For an object traversing a path you can select an orientation for the object relative to the path For an object traversing a Gpath you can specify the orientation for the object relative to the reference attached to each vertex The orientation of an object traversing a path remains constant between vertices and if the orientation changes the change occurs at a vertex The orientation of an object traversing a Gpath changes continuously between vertices At each point on a Gpath segment the orientation is a linear combination of the orientations defined at each end of the segment The linear combination is made on each rotation angle and not on the referentials themselves EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus Edit Menu In the following example an object is moving from a reference rf
128. ces in the text boxes Lists Entries such as file names colors or fonts are displayed in lists You can select multiple entries or one entry at a time depending on the dialog box To scroll through a list e Click above or below the vertical scroll bar to move up or down the list Click to the right or left of the horizontal scroll bar to shift the list from side to side e Use the pointer to drag the vertical scroll bar up or down to move the list vertically or drag the horizontal scroll bar from side to side to shift the list horizontally e Click inside the list and press the UP or DOWN arrow to move up or down the list line by line EPD Visualizer User Guide 1 15 Introduction to EPD Visualizer Using the EPD Visualizer Window To select multiple entries in a list either Click and drag the pointer from one entry in the list down the list to select consecutive entries Hold down the Control key and click random entries Option Buttons Click the diamond shaped buttons to switch between the available options Click the square shaped buttons to select one or more options If the button is filled it is selected Tools Tools sometimes appear in a dialog box and require that you perform an action with the mouse in the graphics window Use a tool in a dialog box the same way as the tools in the Tool Palette For further information see Palettes on page 1 11 Buttons The following are some of the button
129. ces visible by selecting Edit gt Show gt References or Edit gt Show All gt References The Select Reference button is irrelevant to the two preceding methods and remains active after you have selected a reference m Teb iel Path Ted i fenliaricr al Serer el E nsl bapley __BeleotHath Ari or collai Hrterences Points Corlentrtion nl 5 irsi b Ca int i r ell ll Hw _ lig Hei A _Selvet Reterrntr Play hirtiod Inherent ee Check enllisisna E Hop ak saliisten ll Ett Batons Objee1 Path Traversal Onder dalog box These Hp ll L Dejen Path Traversal dialog bea EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 19 Using EPD Visualizer Menus Edit Menu 4 Specify settings in the Object Path Traversal Options dialog box if required Behavior Stay at Last Pos Selecting this makes the object stay at the last position when motion ends If it is not selected the object returns to its original position Axis Display Selecting this displays the local axes of the object during motion If it is not selected the local axes are not displayed You cannot switch this setting during path traversal as the button is inactive when motion Starts Ref at Collision Selecting this creates a Gpath from the positions where collisions occur during object motion It is not selected the Gpath is not created The Gpath is named collisions and a new colli
130. click OK EPD Visualizer User Guide 1 13 Introduction to EPD Visualizer Using the EPD Visualizer Window Text Editor A Text Editor dialog box is displayed when you use the Text or Object Tagging tools The Text Editor also displays the xyz coordinates of the digitize or object you selected Before entering text select a different location without closing the Text Editor Click the in the text box to enter text An example of the Text Editor dialog box is shown below ezl Erler led here ul ann 1 LF 7 pozart CK Cantel Help Menu Bar The menu bar is the horizontal bar at the top of the screen and contains menus represented by names Menus To select a menu use one of the following procedures e Click a menu name and drag your pointer down the menu Then release the mouse button on the appropriate menu item e Click the menu name to open the menu which remains open until you select a menu item To close a menu slide off the menu to close it or click outside the menu area Menu Items The menu items are displayed when you select a menu name in the menu bar e Menu items become available depending on the operations you perform If a menu item is grayed out it is not available e If you select a menu item that is followed by an ellipses a dialog box is displayed If buttons on dialog boxes are grayed out they are not available e If you select a menu item that is followed by a f
131. coordinate system Choosing a negative axis results in a clockwise rotation and choosing a positive axis results in a counterclockwise rotation about the selected axis Item Traversal The traversal option enables you to move the items on the selection list along predefined paths or Gpaths Paths and Gpaths are segmented lines defined in textual graphic files gaf files Gpath vertexes are called references and have names and orientation specifications that control the orientation of traversing items Defining Path and Gpaths on page 2 19 summarizes the characteristics of paths and Gpaths Item Dynamics on page 3 15 explains how to move items along a path or Gpath and how to modify reference point or local axes When you perform item path traversal you can define the following attributes e Specify a predefined path e Define the step size and angle increment e Set the orientation of the item with respect to the path e Select either interactive or timed stepping All three orientation modes Constant Vertical and To Path position the item so the origin of its local coordinate system is placed at the start of the path The local origin remains on the path as the item traverses each step You can change the orientation and positioning of the item on a path in the following ways e Set the appropriate orientation mode in the Item Path Traversal dialog box e Adjust the local axes of the item in the Translate Rotate Selection d
132. cs Output on page 7 36 EPD Visualizer User Guide 7 9 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Sectioning the Scene When you make references visible only the references visible in the graphics window become visible if their origin is in the sectioning plane An origin is considered to be in the sectioning plane if its distance from the sectioning plane is less than 0 005 units Any motion of the sectioning plane or the creation of a new Gpath updates the Section window References are represented in two ways in the Section window depending on the orientation of their PVS_SECTION_AXIS axis The PVS_SECTION_AXIS environment variable controls which axis is used as a normal in orienting the plane relative to the reference Normal means 90 degrees plus or minus 0 5 degrees providing a tolerance of one half degree The default value of PVS_SECTION_AXIS is X You can set PVS_SECTION_AXIS to any of the following values xX Y Z x y or z Ifa reference has a PVS_SECTION_AXIS axis normal to the plane the reference has a full representation in the Section window consisting of a name and two axes If a reference has a PVS_SECTION_AXIS axis that is not normal to the plane the reference has a partial representation in the Section window consisting of a plus sign at its origin and a name The color text and axes sizes of references are the same in the graphics window and the Section window You can get infor
133. ction identified by the key word DBMS This section is used to define query types and object _id and file name selection keys used by the EPD Visualizer SQL Interface Query types are the types of data to be retrieved by the Object Verification tool Selection keys are the field names EPD Visualizer uses to select items returned from the connecting DBMS The following example shows the format for defining query types and selection keys DBMS query types construction purchasing object_id OBJECT_ID file name MODEL END EPD Visualizer User Guide B 5 EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File Extents Definitions Extents Definitions Extents are defined in an optional section identified by the key word EXTENT If this section is provided it must appear before any sections where geometry is defined The extents section contains the definition of the three dimensional boundaries or extents of all geometry contained in a graphic file Typically this section is generated by your host CAD system However if you are creating a textual graphic file and omit this section EPD Visualizer automatically computes the 3D extents when the graphic file is added during a EPD Visualizer session The following example shows the format for defining 3D extents using actual decimal values EXTENTS xmin 10 0 ymin 10 0 zmin 10 0 xmax 10 0 ymax 10 0 zmax 10 0 END B 6 EPD Visualizer User Guide EPD Visualize
134. ctions of movement or axes of rotation for an item are the positive and negative axes of the global project or local coordinate systems The local axes coordinate system is attached to the items on the selection list and moves or rotates with the items Initially the local axes are parallel to the project axes with their local origin at the geometric center of the selection list You can move and rotate the local axes to any other position and orientation The following figure shows an example of axes modification Figure 2 3 Modified Local Coordinate System Local Origin K Projed Axes K 30 Scene Local Axes 2 14 EPD Visualizer User Guide Basic Features Item Editing Target of Translation and Rotation Operations You can designate the item of your translate rotate operation by choosing either the selection list or the local axes as the target If you choose the selection list as the target you move the items in the selection list along with the local axes If you choose the local axes as the target you can change the relative position and orientation of the local axes with respect to the item geometry This is useful for the following three reasons e Defines the direction in which to move the selection list e Defines the axes about which to rotate the selection list e Sets the orientation of the item when it traverses a path The modified position of the local axes remains as long as the items remain on the
135. d Selection List dialog box Selection Set A named collection of objects that can be saved and later added to the selection list Single Buffering A rendering option that displays the images on the graphics screen as they are being rendered Slider Scale A control for setting numeric values by dragging the slider or clicking on the bar You can customize many of the EPD Visualizer slider scales by clicking the MENU mouse button over the scale value Smooth Shading A rendering option that displays polygons so you do not see the edges between them This option gives the objects a smooth appearance These polygons are defined as shells in the graphic files and are denoted with an SP in the textual graphic file Specular Glare A surface materials option that determines the focus of the beam of light reflected by a material High specular glare produces a small focused shiny spot low specular glare produces broader and more scattered shiny spots Specular Hue A surface materials option that determines whether the specular reflection of a material displays in color or in shades of gray Glossary 6 EPD Visualizer User Guide Glossary Specular Intensity A surface materials option that determines the sharpness of a reflection Dull surfaces typically appear matted or flat Shiny surfaces typically appear hard and polished Spot Light A type of point light that can be focused on a particular target area Spo
136. d by a reference can be described by the following format COLORS Definition of the color attached to the reference END lt Desc of section of graphic file 1 gt lt Desc of section of graphic file 2 gt OERE lt Desc of section of graphic file n gt The section of a graphic file is an object made of one or several polylines The name of the sectioned object is obj ect_id The name of the color attached to the reference is color The discipline is always gpathsection The following example shows the format of the generated file GRAPHICS FILE CONTROL_ OPTIONS unit millimeters END COLORS bisque 1 000000 0 894121 0 768627 END OBJ object_id referrage_1 collecteur auvent_1 discipline gpathsection group reference _ 1 color bisque PL 419 457916 0 000000 123 002235 Seka 319 848602 0 000000 34 280548 END END EPD Visualizer User Guide B 19 EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File Gpath Multiple Sectioning OBJ object_id breferrage_1 doublure aile av_1 discipline gpathsection group reference 1 color bisque PL 311 016663 0 000000 602 096375 ey eee 202 332581 0 000000 539 660095 END END COLORS ivory 1 000000 1 000000 0 941176 END OBJ object_id referrage_1 collecteur auvent_1 discipline gpathsection group reference 2 color ivory PL 183 442596 0 000000 280 628540 a a 318 448303 0 000000 20 776
137. d down the left mouse button and move the mouse left right up or down to orbit What you see as you orbit is relative to the camera target or relative to the 3D scene To change the camera target click on the Set Camera Target tool and select a new target in the graphics window You cannot orbit upside down The number of degrees you orbit is determined by the setting on the Turn Orbit Angle slider scale To move up down left and right use the following steps This function is equivalent to the Move Up Move Down Move Left and Move Right buttons on the Move Palette It moves up down left or right relative to the coordinate system of the graphics window To use the mouse to move the camera or the 3D scene follow these steps 1 2 Click on the tool and move the pointer into the graphics window Hold down the middle mouse button and move the mouse left right up or down The number of units you move is determined automatically based on the size of the camera opening The size of the camera opening is determined by the perspective angle To move forward and back use the following steps This function is equivalent to the Move Forward and Move Back buttons on the Move Palette It moves forward or back relative to the coordinate system of the graphics window To use the mouse to move the camera or the 3D scene forward or back follow these steps 1 2 Click on the tool and move the pointer into the graphics
138. d in order to place at least two parallel boundaries in one of the main planes of the scene XY YZ or ZX 8 8 EPD Visualizer User Guide Moving a Plane Moving the Plane to a Reference Moving the Plane to a Reference You can move the plane to any visible reference Press the To Reference button in the Sectioning Motion dialog box s Rotation Motion section and select a reference The plane moves to the reference The plane s local axes are always used in positioning it on a reference The PVS_SECTION_AXIS environment variable controls which reference axis is used as a normal in orienting the plane relative to a reference the other axes of a selected reference are used to define the orientation of the local referential of the sectioning plane The axis that precedes the axis defined as PVS_SECTION_AXIS defines the Y axis of the plane The axis that follows the axis defined as PVS_SECTION_AXIS defines the X axis of the plane e When the X axis is defined as the PVS_SECTION_AXIS a selected reference s Z axis defines the Y axis of the plane and the reference s Y axis defines the X axis of the plane e When the Y axis is defined as the PVS_SECTION_AXIS a selected reference s X axis defines the Y axis of the plane and the reference s Z axis defines the X axis of the plane e When the Z axis is defined as the PVS_SECTION_AXIS a selected reference s Y axis defines the Y axis of the plane and the reference s X axi
139. defines polygons as a network of interconnected polygons that share common points and result in a unit typically called a polyhedron Shells can be smooth shaded by EPD Visualizer while flat polygons cannot Polylines are connected sequence of lines EPD Visualizer User Guide B 15 EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File Object Definitions Flat Polygon Definition A flat polygon is defined in a subsection of object definition and identified by the key word FP You can create any number of flat polygon subsections A polygon point is defined using three floating point values that represent an xyz location Flat polygons require a minimum of three points to define a plane The following example shows the format for defining flat polygon points FP 10 0 0 00 0 20 0 0 00 0 20 0 5 00 0 10 0 5 00 0 END Shell Definition A shell polyhedron is defined in a subsection of object definition and identified by the key word SP You can have any number of shell sections within an object section Shells are defined by a network of connected faces that share common points Shell points and faces are defined in separate subsections Shell Points Definition Shell points are defined in a subsection of shell definition and identified by the key word POINTS Points can be specified in any order The points are defined in three floating point values representing an xyz location The following example shows the format for defining shell po
140. defining for sections 7 8 deleting 1 20 enhancing item color 2 17 selecting 1 20 verifying 1 20 Color blending description 3 70 using for a movie 3 70 Color editor defining plane color 7 4 defining section color 7 8 purpose 1 19 Coordinate system active 3 23 Cartesian 1 8 local 2 14 3 22 3 23 XYZ 3 22 CVDPA_CONFIG_DIR environment variable H 2 CVDPA_SECTIONS_DIR environment variable 7 30 H 10 CVDPA_SPACING environment variable H 11 CVDPA_USE_MIRFLAG environment variable H 6 CVDPA_ZONES_DIR environment variable H 11 CVPATH environment variable H 5 Cylinder zone creating 4 7 purpose 4 7 D Database creating A 2 disconnecting from 3 86 opening 3 85 purpose 3 84 querying 3 90 querying data 3 93 saving reports 3 94 using selection keys 3 88 Database definition file example A 3 purpose A 2 structure A 7 Database file description A 2 Database Management System See DBMS DBMS connecting to 3 84 3 86 A 1 SQL interface A 11 Deselection menu operation 2 9 tool 9 12 Dialog boxes displaying 1 15 purpose 1 15 DIMENSION III interface ASCII graphic file contents E 6 color numbers E 6 description E 2 error messages E 7 generating graphic files E 3 processing multiple viewfiles E 4 processing single viewfiles E 3 Directional light defining 3 54 definition attributes B 8 description 2 5 3 51 Documentation printing from Portable Document Format PDF file xxiii Dynamic interference checking purpose
141. del coordinate The xyz values corresponding to the digitize appear in the Position text boxes e Target Set the light target To set the light target you can either Use the three text boxes to set the xyz values Use the Digitize button to digitize a model coordinate The xyz values corresponding to the digitize appear in the Target text boxes e Illumination Angle Use the slider scale to set the illumination angle The illumination angle specifies the conic area that you want the spot light to illuminate The cone size is measured from one edge of the cone through the light direction vector to the opposite cone edge The angle must be larger than 0 and less than or equal to 135 degrees The default is 30 degrees 3 56 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu e Edge Sharpness An edge can be sharp fuzzy or somewhere in between A sharp edge gives an abrupt change in brightness at the edge of the area illuminated A fuzzy edge gives a gradual reduction of the level of brightness so the edge appears softened The default edge sharpness is 80 percent e Symbol Size Set the size in working units of the spot light symbol The larger the number entered the larger the symbol displays To edit a light use the following steps 1 Click a light type in the Light Editor dialog box 2 Click the light name you want to edit then click Edit The current settings for that light display
142. display normals to a selection or surface and then erase the normals with the following selections The normals lengths are determined automatically from the visible parts of the scene A gap of 10 of each normal s length separates it from its surface Surfaces in EPD Visualizer are constructed from polygons The normals are generated from locations stored as the first points of polygons so if polygons share the same first point the normals from them can merge which gives the appearance of a single normal e Tools gt Normals gt Selection This operation displays a set of normals to the current selection You must select the function each time you use it e Tools gt Normals gt Point This operation displays a normal to the surface for each point that you select by clicking You can select any number of points one at a time e Tools gt Normals gt Clear This operation erases normals in the graphics window 3 78 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus Select Menu Select Menu With the Select menu you can manage items by adding them to a selection set or selection list with the Select tool or the following menu items Selection Masks Set selection mask for digitized selections Selection Set Editor Create and manage selection sets Build Selection List Build selection list consisting of items from Graphic Files Selection Sets Disciplines or Groups Copy Sel gt Sel
143. dministrator if you need more information You must have Acrobat Reader installed to view and print PDF files The default documentation directories are e EPD_HOME data html1 pdf doc_number pdf UNIX e EPD_HOME data html1 pdf doc_number pdf Windows NT EPD Visualizer User Guide xxiii Preface Resources and Services For resources and services to help you with PTC Parametric Technology Corporation software products see the PTC Customer Service Guide It includes instructions for using the World Wide Web or fax transmissions for customer support Documentation Comments PTC welcomes your suggestions and comments You can send feedback in the following ways e Send comments electronically to doc webhelp ptc com e Fill out and mail the PTC Documentation Survey located in the PTC Customer Service Guide xxiv EPD Visualizer User Guide Chapter 1 Introduction to EPD Visualizer This chapter introduces you to EPD Visualizer and its basic concepts It also explains Visualizer features and usage The topics discussed are What Is EPD Visualizer Basic Concepts Using the EPD Visualizer Window Color Editor Permanent Mouse Dynamics Starting an EPD Visualizer Session EPD Visualizer User Guide 1 1 Introduction to EPD Visualizer What Is EPD Visualizer What Is EPD Visualizer EPD Visualizer is advanced visualization software that lets you create CAD models from graphical information ge
144. dow Graphics Output In addition to the contents of the Section window section squaring and dimensions the following information appears in a printout 1 Fam 2 Scale area the user tiged or the resulting scaleis displayed 3 comment area comment provided in the Outport Title fieldis displayed here E markersanddistance area coordinates of existing markers distance between markersiftwo markers displayed is sectioning plane area indicates position and orientation ofthe sectioning plane T caption area indicates the names of all sectioned objects with the same color asinthe section 7 38 EPD Visualizer User Guide Chapter 8 Moving a Plane This chapter describes additional operations that you can perform on the cutting and sectioning planes and includes information on the following Getting Started Setting Plane Dynamics Translating the Plane Rotating the Plane Moving the Plane to a Reference Moving the Plane to the Selection List Setting and Retrieving the Primary Plane EPD Visualizer User Guide 8 1 Moving a Plane Getting Started Getting Started You can move a sectioning plane along a path or Gpath and translate or rotate the plane The graphical scene is automatically updated with every movement of the plane To move the plane select Motion from the Sectioning Control window The Sectioning Motion window appears eeSectoning ation Plane Cynic Transl ahon
145. drag the mouse to perform a new motion If any previous updates are still occurring these are interrupted and the scene flashes A mouse drag is effective only when you move the mouse pointer at least the number of pixels indicated by the Threshold scale in the User Preferences dialog box The User Preferences dialog box is available from the Options menu Options gt Preferences EPD Visualizer obtains the steps for each of the screen axis motions in the following way The steps used for screen axis translations come from the view field With translations the camera translates on a horizontal and vertical screen axis so that the scene adheres to the mouse pointer The steps used for zoom and unzoom are computed proportionally from the view field The view field is the width and height of the visible parts of the scene as viewed through the camera The steps used for rotations come from the Turn Orbit Angle slider scale in the Turn Orbit Palette The angle is initially set to 15 degrees All rotation steps are an integer times this angle During rotations the pixel threshold is twice the normal one to avoid unwanted rotations For more information about the Turn Orbit Angle slider scale see Chapter 9 Palettes The total motion that has occurred since your last mouse button action is displayed in the status window 1 22 EPD Visualizer User Guide Introduction to EPD Visualizer Permanent Mouse Dynamics Example of
146. e Deselect k Selecting this icon clears the current selection list Clicking on this icon does not inactivate the currently active tool Text Create or edit text at a specific point in the graphics window To enter new text use the following steps 1 You can either use the default text properties or set new text properties by selecting Edit gt Text Properties 2 Click on the tool and move the pointer into the graphics window You are prompted with Insert Text Digitize text location 3 Digitize a location and the Text Editor with the xyz coordinates of the digitize displays Please note Before you enter text you can select a different location without closing the Text Editor 4 Click in the text box to enter text 5 Click OK and the text appears To edit existing text use the following steps 1 Select the text you want to edit using the Text tool 2 Edit the text in the text box 3 Click OK and the new text displays 9 12 EPD Visualizer User Guide Palettes Tool Palette To change text properties of existing text 1 Select the text with the Select tool 2 Select Edit gt Text Properties 3 Set the new text properties and click Apply The text displays with the new properties Object Tagging e object tagging tool enables you to manually or automatically tag objects The obj gging tool enables y lly ically tag obj Manually Tag Objects To manually tag objects use
147. e in this mode selecting the left arrow moves the scene to the right as an effect of the camera moving to the left This is the default mode e Scene Pressing the Scene button specifies that the four walk though palettes selections with definable focus move the scene For example in this EPD Visualizer User Guide 9 15 Palettes Walk Through Palettes mode selecting the left arrow moves the scene to the left This mode can be specified on the command line by the option scene User Preher erie Working Units Background Color ol Hllihneters _Inzhes _ EW ne bers DERE ee ineters Yards Beters Mouse Dyriwnies akilles aKa meters Ihreshald a P li selections respondto the Camera or Scene selection Other selections may be considered toetfect the camera The following sections describe the walk through palettes the Move Palette and the Turn Orbit Palette Move Palette The Move Palette contains buttons that enable you to move in a linear direction For each of the tools in the Move Palette the number of units you move is determined by the units set on the Move Distance slider scale Refer to the Move Distance Slider Scale on page 9 18 for more information You can specify the working units by selecting Options gt Preferences 9 16 EPD Visualizer User Guide Palettes Walk Through Palettes Figure 9 2 shows the Move Palette including the move buttons and the Move Dista
148. e Set Options button in the Object Path Traversal dialog box You select a path or Gpath by clicking it in the Path Names scrolling list in the Object Path Traversal dialog box or by pressing the Select Path button and selecting a path in the graphics window The vertices of the path or Gpath appear in the References Points scroll list The three following explanations describe the ways to accomplish traversal immediately relying on default settings If default settings are not appropriate you need to configure the traversal in the Object Path Traversal Options dialog box as detailed in the next step e The scrolling list in the Object Path Traversal dialog box displays all the vertices or references in the selected path or Gpath Clicking on a list item moves the object directly to it Buttons beside the scrolling list allow you to make list selections to which the object immediately moves First The object moves to the position described by the first list item Prev The object moves to the position described by the list item preceding the currently selected list item Next The object moves to the position described by the list item following the currently selected list item End The object moves to the position described by the last list item e The scrolling list in the Object Path Traversal dialog box displays all the vertices or references in the selected path or Gpath Push the Play button to make the selection
149. e Syste Ce Iransatlon a e Ea al E al Degel Paniti a To ighne livlaliwn Orival hrariual L Hesel Orenlalhen kora Mune ulace lo Coordinates Loval Mics Worthy ocal Hudi foe Duby lari ocal CHI e l a Hgilhiyhi Serec Slow Achieve Sexi 3 Set the following options as necessary e Active Coordinate System Global Translate rotate with respect to the global axes Local Translate rotate with respect to the local axes EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 23 Using EPD Visualizer Menus Edit Menu To translate with the Distance slider scale use the following steps 1 Set the unit of translation on the Distance slider scale 2 Click the appropriate axis button e Positive X Y or Z moves the target in the positive direction along the selected axis e Negative X Y or Z moves the target in the negative direction along the selected axis For example if you want to move the target 5 units in the negative X direction set the scale to 5 and click X To translate with the To Digitize tool use the following steps 1 Pick up the To Digitize tool and move the pointer into the graphics window If you are translating item s on the selection list you are prompted with the following Specify Selection List Location Digitize new location for the selected items If you are translating the local axes
150. e attribute discipline to section You can then use Select gt Build Selection List to incorporate in the current selection all objects having the discipline attribute equal to section This allows you to select and manipulate all the sections in a single operation The attribute group indicates the coefficients defining the cutting plane aX bY cZ D 0 EPD Visualizer User Guide 7 33 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Saving a Section Listing Interferences The list of interferences is generated only if interferences are detected Because there is no keyword allowing you to describe a point in the gaf format interferences appear as comments in the gaf file A comment begins with an exclamation mark The first comment indicates the number of interferences found and the coefficients defining the cutting plane The last comment closes the list of interferences An example of comments follows NB INTERFERENCES 2 in A 0 89463 B 0 34467 C 0 28433 D 2343 4099 INTERFERENCE X2765 086914 Y 837 465027 2Z556 890625 INTERFERENCE X2755 194580 Y 834 280701 2584 155640 END INTERFERENCES Example File An example output file follows it consists of one cutting plane two graphic files and two interferences GRAPHICS FILE CONTROL_ OPTIONS unit millimeters END EXTENT xmin 2457 839600 ymin 838 364746 zmin 548 950195 xmax 2767 957031 ymax 541 407837 zmax 1164 7381
151. e from the camera position to an item e Measure the distance between two items e Change the position or orientation of the camera using the mouse e Clear current selection e Create or edit text e Manually or automatically tag objects The following sections describe each tool in the Tool Palette from left to right Select hes Select single or multiple items by group or discipline To make a selection use the following steps 1 Select Select gt Selection Mask If you select Discipline or Group and click on an object all objects within the discipline or group are selected 2 Pick up the tool and move the pointer into the graphics window You are prompted with Select Items lt By Discipline By Group gt Digitize items to add to the selection list To select multiple items press the Shift key and continue to select items with the Select tool To select all items in the 3D scene select Select gt Build Selection List and add all Graphic Files to the selection list To deselect all items and clear the selection list select Select gt Deselect All or press the left mouse button in empty space within the graphics window EPD Visualizer User Guide 9 3 Palettes Tool Palette Volume Select Select all individual items in a specified volume Use the Volume Select tool to select individual items within a specified area rather than items by discipline or group To make a selection by volume use the fol
152. e in a small panel in the middle of the screen and it reinitializes the tool You have to reselect the point to use it for another measuring distance operation Cross markers appear on the endpoint and on the point of the section where the minimum distance occurs The distance between these points and the distances along the X Y and Z axes are displayed in the status window The tolerance that EPD Visualizer uses for chaining the polylines of the sections to determine the endpoint is the gap value you enter in the Sectioning Save dialog box The default value is 0 1 The most appropriate tolerance is the tessellation tolerance or a tolerance a little greater than that For more information refer to Considerations on page 7 27 For information about the Sectioning Save dialog box refer to Saving a Section on page 7 29 EPD Visualizer User Guide 7 25 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Measuring Distance in Sections The following illustration shows the digitized endpoint of a section right and the point of minimal distance between it and a second section left The cross marker on the second section indicates the point at which the minimum distance occurs Minimum Distance Between Two Sections You can use mini Sections to measure the minimum distance between two sections and to see where the minimum distance is reached If the two sections are crossing EPD Visualizer shows the crossing po
153. e in the Help menu for more information PVS_STEREO_ANGLE PVS_STEREO_ANGLE sets the stereo factor for stereo mode its default value is 0 03 PVS_TEMP_COLOR PVS_TEMP_COLOR specifies the color used for the selection markers and temporary graphics if you select Options gt Temp Color gt User from the EPD Visualizer window The default value is black or white according to the background color of the 3D scene Black corresponds to a dark background color EPD Visualizer User Guide H 3 Environment Variables General Behavior PV_SYSTEM PV_SYSTEM specifies the location of the user interface directory uif In an environment that does not include EPD Connect the usual location is usr apl CVpvs common In EPD Connect the script that starts EPD Visualizer automatically sets the value of PV_SYSTEM The value depends on where EPD Connect is installed which is normally EPD_HOME common H 4 EPD Visualizer User Guide Environment Variables Graphics Files Loading Graphics Files Loading The following environment variables configure graphics file loading CVPATH CVPATH specifies the search path used to find graphic files if the full name is not provided CVPATH is usually defined in the caddsrc file PVS_CONCAVE_PERFORM PVS_CONCAVE_PERFORM can reconfigure concave polygons to improve performance If PVS_CONCAVE_PERFOR M is set to 1 and the Check for Concave Polygons option is enabled in the Graphic
154. e name that is used in the first line of each DEFINE_ OBJECT section For example in Example of a Database Definition File on page A 3 in the DEFINE OBJECT section the name is PLPIPE OBJECT_ID FOR DIMENSION III Items Objects Every item in a DIMENSION III model is uniquely described in the DIMENSION II database by an XIDPTR extended identification pointer An XIDPTR is a combination of two integer numbers the first number is called the Model ID pointer MID and the second number is called the Element ID pointer EID The following is an example of an XIDPTR 32765 32711 The Model ID pointer MID is 32765 and the Element ID pointer EID is 32711 The Model ID pointer describes a particular submodel within the parent model so all the elements within a particular submodel have the same MID If an element has an MID equal to 32768 then that element belongs to the parent model Submodels begin with the MID 32767 and are incriminated by one for each additional submodel The Element ID pointer identifies a particular item within a model or submodel Every item in a particular model or submodel has a unique EID Submodels might and probably will contain elements with the same EID as elements within other submodels However with the combination of the unique Model ID and the Element ID unique within a model we can uniquely describe each element with the XIDPTR A 8 EPD Visualizer User Guide Database Int
155. e of the connecting DBMS Refer to Select a Query From DBMS on page 3 92 for more information Initialize Sub Variables Scans the contents of the SQL statement in the Query Editor and initializes the names and values of Substitution Variables box to the new variables Submit Submit the contents of the Query Editor to the connecting DBMS If this statement returns any data the Query Database Data dialog displays Refer to Query Database Data on page 3 93 for more information Select a Query from a File To select a query from a file use the following steps 1 Click Select Query From File The following figure shows the Select Query File dialog box iller Ter Sc vp database sll Fre shores m Piece Se rhey Gee idara aRET Lise shou sd atabas el scheduling sql eo d Ir r File URET Aeh p datas male eee 4 Le Filter Clase Help 2 To select an existing file click the file name in the Files list and the file name displays in the File text box The default extension for the SQL files is sql Refer to File Selection Dialog Box on page 1 17 for more information on the filter option EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 91 Using EPD Visualizer Menus Database Menu 3 Click OK The contents of the file displays in the Query Editor Extract and list the names of the substitution variables in the Substitution Variables box Select a Query From DB
156. e or RGB values white switch on or off on position R XYZ coordinates in decimal values none target R XYZ coordinates in decimal values none illumination_angle R 0 180 degrees 30 degrees edge_sharpness R 0 100 80 percent symbol_size decimal value distance between position and target The following example shows the format for defining spot lights SPOT LIGHT name spot_light1 color white switch on position 2 0 0 0 2 0 target 3 0 0 0 4 0 illumination_angle 45 edge _ sharpness 90 symbol size 3 END EPD Visualizer User Guide B 9 EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File Material Definitions Material Definitions Materials are defined in a section identified by the key word MATERIAL Material definitions can be assigned to objects in EPD Visualizer for use in ray tracing You can define any number of materials in a graphics file Each material must have a unique name You can either define a material with or without color For example a material named copper would have a base color while a material named shiny paint would be colorless Table B 4 shows the key words allowable values and settings and defaults for the material definition attributes Certain key words are optional others are required and indicated with R If you omit an allowed value or setting the default is used Table B 4 Material Definition Attributes Key Words Allowed Values Settings Defaults n
157. e position and orientation of the reference If the tool finds no reference close enough it looks for a surface instead If the tool accepts a surface the selection moves to the nearest edge of the surface and the normal provides its orientation The orientation and position are stored in a temporary reference The value of the environment variable PVS_NORMAL_AXIS specifies which axis of the temporary reference is placed along the normal PVS_NORMAL_AXIS has the default value Z the other two axes receive arbitrary positions e Moving only local axes of selection relative to a reference when the Modify Local Axes in the Local Axes area is selected You select the To Ref button and then make a selection in the graphics window e Moving the selection to a surface when the Modify Local Axes in the Local Axes area is not selected You select the To Face button and then make a selection in the graphics window The selection moves to the nearest edge of the surface and the normal provides is the basis for its orientation The position and orientation are stored in a temporary reference The value of the environment variable PVS_NORMAL_AXIS shows which axis of the temporary reference is placed along the normal PVS_NORMAL_AXIS has the default value Z the other two axes receive arbitrary positions If the tool finds no surface close enough it looks for a reference instead and the selection gets both the position and orientation of the reference
158. e s or open a metafile and the 3D scene is displayed in the graphics window you can start using EPD Visualizer starting a New Session If you want to start a new session File gt New Session all data from the current session is cleared unless you save it as a metafile When you start a new session the graphics window is cleared EPD Visualizer User Guide 1 29 Introduction to EPD Visualizer Starting an EPD Visualizer Session Obtaining Session Information You can obtain information about your current session by selecting File gt Session Information The Session Information dialog box provides specific information about the graphics in your 3D scene and your workstation graphic capabilities It provides a current count of the following components in your 3D scene e Graphic files e Objects e Polygons e Average number of polygons for each object In addition the Session Information dialog box provides the following hardware related details about your workstation e Z buffer size e Graphic planes e Maximum number of colors and lights enabled through your hardware e Hardware Cutting Planes e Amount of graphics memory used by your workstation Quitting EPD Visualizer You can quit EPD Visualizer by selecting File gt Quit to return to the operating system prompt 1 30 EPD Visualizer User Guide sate Basic Features This chapter provides an overview of the following features so that you can use EPD
159. e system with a z up vertical orientation Any walk through operations you perform are calculated with respect to this xyz system If your graphic files are based on a y up coordinate system you can select the option Y Axis is Vertical when you add your graphic file After you select this option EPD Visualizer converts the graphic file to the z up coordinate system 1 8 EPD Visualizer User Guide Introduction to EPD Visualizer Basic Concepts Viewing Your eye is the camera position and what you see in the 3D scene is within view of the camera lens The camera target point is always located at the center of the graphics window at a depth you specify All walk through operations are based on this concept of the camera Linear and Angular Movement EPD Visualizer enables you to instantly change the camera position and camera target to view any aspect of your 3D scene You can quickly shift the camera in a linear or an angular direction You can move in a linear direction by a specific number of units using the buttons on the Move palette You can move up or down left or right and forward or back For example if you click the Move Forward button the camera moves forward so you are drawn closer to the 3D scene Likewise if you click the Move Left button the camera position moves to the left You can move in an angular direction about the vertical axis of the 3D scene by a specific number of degrees using the Turn and Or
160. e the sections defining the geometry The other sections can be in any order The following example shows the basic structure of the textual graphic file with variations in the hierarchical form of the file Specific details are described in the sections following the example GRAPHICS FILE section name END section_ name section_ name END END section_ name section_ name section_ name END section_ name END END section_ name END END END EPD Visualizer User Guide B 3 EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File Control Options Control Options Control options are defined in a section identified by the key word CONTROL OPTIONS The control options section is required for all textual graphic files and must be the first section in the file Currently the only information allowed in this section is the geometry unit designation EPD Visualizer uses this unit designation to properly convert geometry in your file to a uniform unit type when more than one graphic file is added Valid unit types include the following mils inches feet yards miles millimeters centimeters decimeters meters kilometers The following example shows the format for the control options section CONTROL_ OPTIONS unit inches END EPD Visualizer User Guide EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File DBMS Control Options DBMS Control Options DBMS related options are defined in an optional se
161. ead from the _ td file are dynamically displayed When the command is done the result matches the total byte size of the td file Reading XXXX _pd Reading Xxxx _ td Reading stdin These messages indicate that these files are being successfully read Warning Xxxx _pd unavailable This message indicates that the _td will be used without the benefits of a_pd file Cannot open xxxx When this message pertains to a _td file then the path name contains a misspelled directory level or you do not have read privileges for that file The command proceeds to the next CADDS part if any Warning XXXX _td is inconsistent with its _pd The _td refers to entities that no longer exist in the _ pd file This usually means that the CADDS part was modified packed or sorted without performing SHADE PICTURE before filing The following error messages might display and return you to the system prompt Cannot open XXXX When this message pertains to the graphic ASCII file then the path name contains a misspelled directory level or you do not have write privileges for that file Unit xxxx was invalid Use the units names described in the SYNTAX SUMMARY Option XXXX was not recognized An option with a leading hyphen was invalid Error at XXXX XXxx Aborted at byte position XXXX Oxhhhh in tessellation data EPD Visualizer User Guide F 7 CADDS Interface Using the CADDS Interface cadds2pvs cannot interpret a section of the _td
162. ead to strange results when you digitize an endpoint It is recommended that you use the tessellation tolerance or a tolerance a little greater than that e Two markers that are too close together can hamper your view and disappear in some views EPD Visualizer User Guide 7 27 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Verifying a Point Verifying a Point You can digitize points in the Section window Select Distance gt Verify Point and select a point in the Section Window An X temporarily displays at the digitized location You see the following digitized information in the status window e current units e coordinates of the selected point expressed in current units relative to global coordinates 7 28 EPD Visualizer User Guide Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Saving a Section saving a Section You can save one or more sections in an external text gaf file that EPD Visualizer generates automatically for each motion of the cutting plane or that you generate manually When you save a section it appears as a collection of objects There is one object for each sectioned graphic file in the scene and one object for each position of the cutting plane Each object is comprised of one or more polylines A single graphic file may contain a complex assembly EPD Visualizer uses the attributes group and object_id to indicate the position of the cutting plane and the name of the
163. ect a new reference to configure and a new Gpath if the reference is in a new Gpath by pressing the Sel Ref button and selecting a reference in the graphics window Performing Multiple Sectioning After configuring the multiple sectioning start it by pressing the Apply button in the Gpath Multiple Sectioning window and observe the results in the Section window which appears automatically Each section appears in a specific color in the Section window You can use the tools discussed in this chapter to analyze the sections You can select another object and press the Apply button again EPD Visualizer User Guide 7 19 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Measuring Distance in Sections From the Section window you can identify a sectioned object and the reference that oriented the sectioning plane when the section holding the object was created Click on the sectioned object in the Section window to show the following information e The reference is selected in the References list in the Gpath Multiple Sectioning window e The name of the graphics file for the sectioned object appears in the status window saving Multiple Sectioning Pressing the Save button in the Gpath Multiple Sectioning window saves all the sections in the Section window toa gaf file The name of the file is formed by adding the suffix gaf to the name of the Gpath You can define the name of the directory in which to save the files by se
164. ed direction You can adjust the step distance or incremental turn angle along a path Camera Traversal is helpful for evaluating every angle as you walk through the 3D scene For a more realistic view when traversing the camera along a path turn on Double Buffering in the Rendering Control dialog box EPD Visualizer User Guide 2 19 Basic Features Traversal Item and Section Plane Traversal You can traverse items you added to the selection list along a selected path by selecting Edit gt Item Dynamics gt Path Traversal If you turn on interference checking all interfering items are highlighted Chapter 8 Moving a Plane explains the movement of a sectioning plane on a path Sectioning the Scene from Multiple References on page 7 14 explains how you can simultaneously see the all sections resulting from sectioning a scene with a plane that is oriented by some or all the references in a Gpath Path traversal simulates the movement of items in the 3D scene to check clearances accessibility and interferences For a more realistic view when traversing along a path turn on Double Buffering in the Rendering Control dialog box 2 20 EPD Visualizer User Guide Basic Features Interference Checking Interference Checking With interference checking you can perform spatial studies to detect potential design flaws early in the engineering process before construction or fabrication begins Interference checking featu
165. ed with Visualizer can have an unlimited number of records with each object record consisting of one line To create an ASCII database the following flat files are required e Database File This file is generated using either your database program or another method to collect the detailed data Each database record must include the following information e Object ID OBJECT_ID e Graphic file name MODEL e Object type OBJECT TYPE The database file can contain records from various disciplines such as piping steel or equipment e Database Definition File This file defines all object types and object record formats in the database file After you create the database file you must define the record structure of objects in the definition file The definition file describes object records from various disciplines When you open a database file using the Database menu items Visualizer uses the information in the database definition file to open it When an object is selected for verification or tagging the OBJECT_ID and MODEL graphic file names are sent to the database program The database program uniquely identifies the database record with OBJECT_ID and MODEL graphic file in the database file and displays the object record or object tag field s A 2 EPD Visualizer User Guide Database Interface Creating an ASCII Database Example of a Database Definition File The following example shows a sample database def
166. elect tool You can build a selection list that consists of Graphic Files Selection Sets Disciplines and Groups by selecting Select gt Build Selection Set Disciplines and groups are attributes of items defined in the input graphic files You can also select items that are hidden setting Selection Masks Before you make selections with the Select tool you can set a selection mask to specify graphics files disciplines groups or items by selecting Select gt Selection Masks The selection mask default is graphics files After you make a selection in your 3D scene the item or all items within the discipline or group are added to the selection list selecting and Deselecting Items You can select items to add to the selection list with the Select tool To select more than one item press the Shift key and continue to select items with the Select tool You can also select items by volume with the Volume Select tool You can clear the selection list either by selecting Select gt Deselect All or by clicking in empty space in the graphics window You can remove items from the selection list with the Deselect tool The Deselect tool also clears items from the product structure tree in EPD Connect EPD Visualizer User Guide 2 9 Basic Features Selecting Items Defining Selection Sets A selection set is a named collection of items that you can save and later add to the selection list You define selection sets by adding the i
167. enerate fairly realistic scenes with a low light bounce limit Increasing the light bounce limit lengthens the time to perform a ray trace calculation e Ray Trace Status Turn ray trace status on or off When ray trace status is on a graduated slider scale displays that shows progress during a ray trace calculation The default is On e Update Interrupts On Enables you to interrupt the ray trace rendering operation Off Improves system performance but you must wait until the rendering process is complete before you regain control of the user interface 3 Click OK to accept ray tracing control settings EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 49 Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu Radiosity Controls If you select radiosity as the rendering method you can control the quality and realism of the image To set radiosity controls use the following steps 1 Click Radiosity Controls in the Rendering Control dialog box and the Radiosity Control dialog box displays Interim Viewing SUAEE Shey l umlnstien Sernaltishy D ell now Chverall Sensitivity aries Mone liigh SPT altel Boundary Cantinuiby al Dn ae Lit Bane or al Me ore lb it oiecal Sen sil Pei be z Solmon Aualry inne ligh Low Hisl m Hemor All C Leen Sci thiby 2 Set the following options as necessary e Interim Viewing On Renders the screen at each periodic radiosity solution step This enables you to terminate additional
168. ered trademarks of their respective holders UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND This document and the software described herein are Commercial Computer Documentation and Software pursuant to FAR 12 212 a b or DFARS 227 7202 1 a and 227 7202 3 a and are provided to the Government under a limited commercial license only For procurements predating the above clauses use duplication or disclosure by the Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software Clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 or Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights at FAR 52 227 19 as applicable Parametric Technology Corporation 140 Kendrick Street Needham MA 02494 2714 8 January 2001 Table of Contents Preface Related Documents xxi Book Conventions xxii Online User Documentation xxiii Printing Documentation xxiii Resources and Services XXIV Documentation Comments XXIV Introduction to EPD Visualizer What Is EPD Visualizer 1 NO How Can You Use EPD Visualizer I w EPD Visualizer Features I w Advanced Rendering Module T N Basic Concepts System Overview Objects and Items Neutral Graphic Files Metafiles 3D Viewing Coordinate System Viewing O0bOOUYNOaa Linear and Angular Movement EPD Visualizer User Guide Contents v
169. erence on which to employ the information b You select the information by selecting a path point or path reference in the graphics Window c If you do not name a path reference in the Reference Name field its default name has two parts The value of the PVS_Unnamed_Ref environment variable is the name s root The line number of the path reference in the list box is the name s suffix d Clicking Mod applies the information to the path point or path reference in the scrolling list Clicking Add places a new path point or path reference after the one selected in the scrolling list The new path point or path reference has the selected information 5 Complete your work in the Path Router e Close Closes the window without applying or saving work e Apply Applies the path or Gpath data that does not appear in the graphics window but exists in the Path Router EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 33 Using EPD Visualizer Menus Edit Menu e Save Displays the Save Path dialog box and also performs the operation that the Apply button performs have ath Tiller fhomietisin ait mpr gal Diredunes THOME es enpad Pahi Filename O O OO Jhomellhenn empe es a Eme Tiller Shue Hele The Save Path dialog box allows you save the path or Gpath to a gaf file The Save Path window offers the functions for saving described in File Selection Dialog Box on page 1 17 except that the S
170. erface Creating an ASCII Database The XIDPTR of an element is verified within a DIMENSION III model with the DAL function AECXIDSCL as follows OUT AECXIDSCL IS Where e 1S an item select of the element e OUT a list of two numbers the first number is the Model ID pointer and the second number is the Element ID pointer Please note In DIMENSION III equipment consists of a set of items Each item has its own XIDPTR Therefore you must create a record in the database for each item XIDPTR that you want to verify in Visualizer In a Visualizer database file OBJECT_ID is created from XIDPTR OBJECT_ID is a long integer 4 bytes that consists of two short integers each 2 bytes of the XIDPTR This conversion can be described by FORTRAN and C languages as follows FORTRAN INTEGER 2 XIDPTR 2 INTEGER 4 OBJECT _ID EQUIVALENCE OBJECT_ID XIDPTR G union short int xidptr 2 long int object_id objectRecord The Visualizer database uses a combination of the OBJECT_ID and model viewfile names to uniquely describe an item in Visualizer DEFINE_OBJECT Section In the DEFINE_ OBJECT section the remaining fields for each object are defined One DEFINE_ OBJECT section is required for each object type The first line in the 1DEFINE_ OBJECT section must be an OBJECT_TYPE lt object type name gt statement This statement determines which of the DEFINE_ OBJECT sections will be used for describing data from each
171. ering of the 3D scene while you are using the Move or Turn Orbit Palette buttons For further information see Linear and Angular Movement on page 1 9 The following describes these methods e To move the camera rapidly through the 3D scene without waiting for a complete rendering of all graphics click any of the walk through buttons before the 3D scene is completely displayed e To suppress the rendering of the 3D scene while using any of the walk through buttons hold down the Shift key while clicking the button e To change the Move Distance or Turn Orbit Angle during rendering of the 3D scene Click the slider scales Tool Palette and Other Palettes The tools in the Tool Palette require action with the mouse in the graphics window A brief description of each tool is displayed in the prompt window when you place the pointer on it To pick up a tool use the following steps 1 Click on the tool to highlight it 2 Move the pointer into the graphics window The name and prompt for the tool are displayed in the prompt window 3 Follow the directions displayed in the prompt window to use the tool 4 Click the tool to clear it when you finish using it Please note Tools remain active until you clear them or until you select other tools Move Palette The buttons in the Move Palette enable you to move in a linear direction Control the distance you move with the Move Distance slider scale Turn Orbit Palette The buttons in
172. es appear equally bright because lights have no effect in the 3D scene with this option Flat Shading Displays a shaded solid view of the 3D scene with the edges between the polygons visible and light settings incorporated Smooth Shading Displays a smooth shaded solid view of the 3D scene Polygons that are defined as shells in the graphic files display so that you do not see the edges between them Refer to Appendix B EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File for a description of a shell and shell definitions Radiosity Displays the light that is reflected between diffusely reflecting surfaces in a 3D scene Objects are illuminated by direct light sources such as light bulbs as well as light reflected from other objects in the scene For example when light shines on a wall the wall radiates its light and color to objects close to it Alternately objects close to the wall radiate their light and color to the wall 2 2 EPD Visualizer User Guide Basic Features Display Controls The quality of an image rendered with radiosity depends on lighting light interpolation and shadow and illumination sensitivity EPD Visualizer enables you to break up large surfaces to produce realistic shadows and illumination You can control sensitivity to shadows and illumination by setting the overall sensitivity local sensitivity and boundary continuity Please note Radiosity does not handle specular lighting and cannot display
173. esume Resume the movie playing from pause Stop Terminate playing the current movie sequence G 6 EPD Visualizer User Guide Appendix H Environment Variables This appendix explains how you can use environment variables to customize the EPD Visualizer The following topics are discussed General Behavior Graphics Files Loading EPD Visualizer EPD Connect Communication Path Editor Path Traversal and Translation and Rotation PostScript Output Section Plane Zoning Selecting Scrolling and Running a Report EPD Visualizer User Guide H 1 Environment Variables General Behavior General Behavior The following examples show you how to set variables in a shell window Either of the following lines sets a non zero value setenv ENVIRONMENT_VARIABLE_NAME setenv ENVIRONMENT_VARIABLE_NAME 1 Either the following line or not writing any command to give the variable a value has the effect of setting a zero value setenv ENVIRONMENT_VARIABLE_NAME o The following environment variables configure general behavior CVDPA_CONFIG_DIR CVDPA_CONFIG_DIR specifies the directory used to save and retrieve the position of the dialog boxes memorized for each user If the variable is not defined the positions of the dialog boxes are not stored If the variable is defined the dialog box locations for each user are stored in a file whose name is formed by adding the suffix cfg to the user name For example positions fo
174. et the following options as necessary Step Size Set the step size the camera takes along the path by setting the Step Size slider scale A zero value causes the camera to take one step for each path segment Turn Angle deg If you selected either the Horizontal Lock or Along Path options set the angle by which the camera incrementally turns when it reaches the corners along a path by setting the Turn Angle slider scale A zero value causes the camera to turn each path corner in one step Focus Point If you selected the Fixed Point option set a fixed focus point for the camera either by entering the xyz coordinates in the text boxes or with the Digitize button to digitize a focus point View Direction If you selected the Fixed Direction option set a fixed view direction for the camera either with the three View Direction slider scales to set the xyz values or with the Digitize button to digitize a view direction The scales range from 1 0 to 1 0 Start Camera Traversal To start camera traversal use the following steps 1 Select a path by one of the following methods e Pick up the Select Path tool and select a path in your 3D scene e Click the path name from the Path Names list e Click Start and a dialog box displays the following message Camera traversal in progress 2 If you selected interactive camera traversal you can either e Click Next View to display the next position on the path e Click Previous View t
175. ever you can specify alternative ways to analyze and display colliding components The options available to you are the following e Graphic File When a collision is detected the entire graphic file containing the colliding component is flagged as colliding and is displayed in red Following the detection any component belonging to the graphic file including the colliding component are ignored until the end of the detection process Each colliding graphic file is recorded separately for reviewing e tem When a collision is detected the item surface containing the colliding component is displayed in red The colliding component itself is still used until the end of the collision detection process Each item is recorded separately for reviewing e Intersection EPD Visualizer User Guide 5 7 Interference Checking Setting Up an Interference Checking Session When a collision is detected between a component and an object of the selection the intersection is displayed in red Following the detection the item containing the colliding component and the component itself are used until the end of the collision detection process Only items and the intersection lines not the colliding components are recorded for reviewing 5 8 EPD Visualizer User Guide Interference Checking Reviewing the Results Reviewing the Results You can view the results of an interference or obtain a report as described in the followin
176. example of this section DEFINE_DB FILE FILE NAME moe b proj cvpvs data mckee db END DEFINE_REQUIRED_FIELDS Section There is only one DEFINE REQUIRED FIELDS section for each definition file In the DEFINE_ REQUIRED FIELDS section you define the OBJECT _ID MODEL and OBJECT_TYPE fields using DEFINE_FIELD statements The OBJECT_ID for DIMENSION III is described in the following section These field names are fixed for all object types and should not be changed However you can choose where these fields start and end in the object records OBJECT_ID MODEL and OBJECT_TYPE are defined by DEFINE_FIELD statements A DEFINE FIELD statement has the following syntax with the comma used as a separator DEFINE FIELD field_name starting_position ending_position EPD Visualizer User Guide A 7 Database Interface Creating an ASCII Database Only the OBJECT_ID MODEL and OBJECT_TYPE fields are defined in the DEFINE REQUIRED FIELDS section e The OBJECT _ID refers to the object ID associated with each object in the Visualizer graphic file e The MODEL is the name of the Visualizer graphic file in which the object resides without an extension e OBJECT_ID and MODEL fields uniquely identify each object in the database Define the remaining fields in the object database in the DEFINE_OBJECT section The OBJECT_TYPE determines which of the DEFINE_ OBJECT sections is used for describing data from each record This is th
177. file This should not occur unless the _ td file is corrupt If you believe your _td is correct supply the message and the version of cadds2pvs in a bug report e Premature end of file encountered The _td file appears to be truncated Converting Tessellation Data Only Although the cadds2pvs interface does not have mandatory options it is recommended that you supply one or more CADDS part names on the command line In that case the td file and _pd file are both used to generate the output file When no CADDS part name is supplied then the contents of a _ ta file is required as standard input and the information from a _pd file is lost Similarly if the pd is missing in the CADDS part directory but the _ td exists the parts are processed and the following message displays Warning equipment pd unavailable The _ pd file contains the following information that cannot be obtained from the _td file e The model units of the part meters inches etc e The colors of CADDS layers from SELECT LDISCRIMINATION e Surface normal flags to improve backface culling e Relationships between solids and surface entities Without the _pd file you might encounter some minor difficulties The following are three examples that avoid the _pd and perform equivalent tasks cat equipment td cadds2pvs o equipment gaf u feet cadds2pvs u feet o equipment gaf lt equipment td cadds2pvs u feet lt equipment td gt equipment gaf Plea
178. following error message Illegal value was entered If you enter null values for proximity tolerance and contact distance only real intersections between components are considered as interferences When you change the values for proximity tolerance and contact distance the previous number of interferences is removed and replaced by question marks This indicates that you need to update the interference checking according to the new values You can perform the update in one of three ways e By moving the sectioning plane e By pressing Return in the either the Proximity tolerance or Contact distance field e By disabling and reenabling interference checking in the Sectioning Control window EPD Visualizer User Guide 7 11 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Sectioning the Scene After entering values you can close the Sectioning Interference dialog box from its frame menu When the dialog box is closed you can see the number of interferences in the status window of the main graphics window The dialog box also disappears when you disable interference checking in the Sectioning Control window Setting a Proximity Tolerance The proximity tolerance indicates the minimum distance used to determine if two components are colliding in the sectioning plane This allows you to include sections that are close together in the interference check By increasing the proximity tolerance you can increase the number
179. follows e Ina constant orientation the plane s orientation remains the same during the motion When performing item dynamics you can display the plane s starting position and starting orientation at the beginning of the path Also you can adjust the starting position and starting orientation from the Sectioning Motion window e Ina vertical orientation the plane is considered attached to a referential moving along the path and able to rotate only around a vertical axis The Z axis of the referential remains vertical during the motion The Y axis of the referential is always tangent to the projection of the path in the XY plane In the default position which is set with the Start Position button in item dynamics the plane is vertical and its normal vector is in a plane tangent to the path Before the traversal begins you can change the starting position and starting orientation from the Sectioning Motion window Figure 8 1 shows the vertical orientation of the plane as it traverses the path Figure 8 1 Vertical Orientation of the Sectioning Plane 8 4 EPD Visualizer User Guide Moving a Plane Setting Plane Dynamics e In orientation of the sectioning plane to the path the plane is considered attached to a referential moving along the path and having its Y axis tangent to the path You can change the starting position and orientation of the plane from the Sectioning Motion window Figure 8 2 shows orientation of the pla
180. ft Right arrow moves the plane to the positive values Left arrow moves the plane to the negative values Moving by Digitizing You can move the plane to contain the digitized vertex If you use the plane s size to display the plane the plane s center is displayed on the digitized point EPD Visualizer User Guide 8 7 Moving a Plane Rotating the Plane Rotating the Plane You can rotate the plane around global or local axes With the Local Axes toggle deactivated you can rotate the plane around the global axes With the Local Axes toggle activated you can rotate the plane around its own axes The local axes of the plane are displayed attached to the plane s center Regardless of whether or not the Local Axes toggle is activated the local axes of the plane move with the plane Rotate the plane using the X Y Z X Y and Z buttons The value of the angle is indicated on the scale You can modify the scale using the Scale Customization window Click the right mouse button on the current scale value to display the Scale Customization window The Scale Customization window is shown in Specifying the Size on page 7 3 Following convention the X and Y axes are in the plane while the Z axis is normal to it The X axis is longer than the other two axes to aid in its identification The X and Y axes are not always parallel to the plane s boundaries because the plane s boundaries are always adjuste
181. g a Metafile A metafile is an ASCII file that contains a complete description of an EPD Visualizer session This file includes all geometric objects views view sequences lights materials paths color definitions annotation and control settings such as working units and slider scale settings You can only open one metafile at a time When a metafile is open the title bar displays the path name of the file To open a metafile perform the following steps 1 Select File gt Open Metafile to display the Open Metafile dialog box as shown in the following figure iller lusersievpusidata mi Liwerclonirs fusera cyjivalilel a Maeralew pwa ula Seclectlon Jusersicepeesidala oy Manei 2 Double click a metafile name in the Files list or enter a metafile name in the Selection box and click Open Refer to the File Selection Dialog Box on page 1 17 for more information on using the filter option 3 4 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus File Menu Adding Textual or Binary Graphics Files You can save numerous textual or binary graphic files in one metafile Textual graphic files are named witha gaf extension Binary files are named witha gbf extension To add a graphic file to a metafile perform the following steps 1 Select File gt Add Graphics gt Textual or Add Graphics gt Binary to display the Graphic File Selection dialog box as shown in the following figure
182. g a Plane on page 6 5 Displaying the plane Chapter 7 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Clipping the scene Chapter 7 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Sectioning the scene Chapter 7 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Measuring distance in sections Chapter 7 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Saving a section Chapter 7 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Setting plane dynamics Chapter 8 Moving a Plane Moving translating and rotating the plane Chapter 8 Moving a Plane EPD Visualizer User Guide Sectioning Defining a Plane Defining a Plane To define the position and orientation of a plane select Sectioning gt Define from the EPD Visualizer window The Sectioning Define window appears Acticin M lim Postthon K nom aa Y aram won Z 0 0000 zo Digit Orlentadon reno ee J Pone Ye K on z Agta DeAlntlon bey Palika Sl Close Apphy Hel Positioning the Plane The three numeric fields X Y Z indicate the center position of the plane These are automatically updated with every movement of the plane You can modify any value by typing a new one or by using the Digitize button When you click the Apply button the plane moves up to contain the new point
183. g box e Query Data A scrolled list containing all the records returned by the query statement e Zoom Zooms to the extents of the object s selected in the data list e Highlight Highlights the object s selected in the data list e Add to Selection List Adds the object s selected in the data list to the selection list e Clear Selection List Clears the selection list EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 93 Using EPD Visualizer Menus Database Menu Save a DBMS Report To save a DBMS report use the following steps 1 Click Select File The following figure shows the DBMS Report File Selection dialog box l iller fuisers cypyeidatabase 1k Hreetarlra I lles SBR es debate sel MEINTE hanee ph MSC stow ps datahas el BOP ees pt Stas pl ile Ser8 vp siaceh ese gate nar eel 2 Click the file name in the Files list to select an existing file and the file name displays in the File text box Enter the directory path and or new file name in the File text box to create a new file Use a rpt extension following the file name to organize your files Refer to File Selection Dialog Box on page 1 17 for more information on the filter option 3 Click OK 4 Click Save and the DBMS data displayed in the Query Data list is written to the file you selected or named Please note You can overwrite an existing file name by entering the same name in the File text box 5 Cl
184. g query statement is used select QUERY NAME from PVS OBJECT PVS_ QUERY where EPD Visualizer User Guide Database Interface DBMS SQL Interface OBJECT _ID OBJECT_ID and QUERY TYPE QUERY_TYPE and PVS_QUERY OBJECT_ TYPE PVS OBJECT OBJECT_ TYPE or PVS_QUERY OBJECT TYPE is NULL and PVS_OBJECT OBJECT TYPE is NULL 3 If the query mode is FILE_NAME only the FILE NAME is used to locate the query name To do this the following query statement is used select QUERY NAME from PVS OBJECT PVS_ QUERY where FILE NAME FILE NAME and QUERY TYPE QUERY_TYPE and PVS_QUERY OBJECT TYPE PVS OBJECT OBJECT TYPE or PVS_QUERY OBJECT TYPE is NULL and PVS_OBJECT OBJECT TYPE is NULL 4 If the query mode is NULL both OBJECT_ID and FILE_NAME are used to locate the query name To do this the following query statement is used select QUERY NAME from PVS OBJECT PVS_ QUERY where OBJECT _ID OBJECT_ID and FILE NAME FILE NAME and QUERY TYPE QUERY_TYPE and PVS_QUERY OBJECT_ TYPE PVS_OBJECT OBJECT_ TYPE or PVS_QUERY OBJECT TYPE is NULL and PVS_OBJECT OBJECT TYPE is NULL 5 The query name returned is used to locate the text of the query statement in the PVS_SQL_ STMT table To do this the following query statement is used select QUERY _ STMT from PVS SQL STMT where QUERY NAME QUERY NAME order by SEQ NUM asc For example if you digitize an object with OBJECT_ID equal to 12345680 and the FI
185. g sections Viewing the Interferences To review the results of your last interference check select the Review option The Interference Review window appears lileri renci Forres Inte terence Humber zam All View hlerterenre lleparl Leip The interference number slider scale which is used for reviewing item traversal operations allows you to examine each operation separately The slider scale ranges from 1 through the number of interferences beginning with the first interference To review an interference move the slider to set the value for the interference number To enlarge your view of an interference select View Interference Use the palette buttons and tools to view the interference from any angle After zooming on an interference use Zoom All to redisplay the entire scene in its original size EPD Visualizer User Guide 5 9 Interference Checking Reviewing the Results Obtaining a Report To obtain a report of the interference select the Report option from the Interference Review window The Interference Report window appears Irete Feu mairr Tape F DateTime Fri Musoga uawa a Palli Harir l Hati liata l Location A 7AF Ye A Aer f SSS Objecl Soul Po Tinted ring Objecls I jus 11k 214577150 Geapbdie File shareccassp_ltsvltch_l1 Dineiplina layo LETRARI sulid IHTELFECIHO WITH Wi j Hal 11k 21457717H Geapbie File shareceasse_lSovitch_l Di stip ite Layi Vir
186. g table Option Description Name Name of the zone This name is stored in the directory defined by the CVDPA_ZONES_DIR environment variable Radius Out In Out Radius is the external radius In Radius is the internal radius Angle Start End Start Angle is the start angle for a partial cylinder End Angle is the end angle for a partial cylinder Offset Offset value for the external faces Transparency Transparency value for the external faces 4 8 EPD Visualizer User Guide Constructing Zones Creating Your Zone Definition Option Description Base Center Coordinates for the base center vertice Top Center Coordinates for the top center vertice Base X Axis Coordinates for the base X axis You can enter numerical values as explicit values in the window s text boxes or specify them by digitizing an existing object EPD Visualizer User Guide 4 9 Chapter 5 Interference Checking This chapter describes interference checking and includes information on the following e About Interference Checking e Starting Interference Checking Setting Up an Interference Checking Session e Reviewing the Results EPD Visualizer User Guide 5 1 Interference Checking About Interference Checking About Interference Checking Interference checking allows you to perform spatial studies to detect potential design flaws early in the engineering
187. gging to manual or automatic Connect You connect to the DBMS through the Database menu Only one ASCII or DBMS file can be active at any time ASCIl An ASCII database can have an unlimited number of records Refer to Appendix A Database Interface for information on how to create a database 3 84 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus Database Menu To open an ASCII database use the following steps 1 Select Database gt Connect Select ASCII the Flat Database File Selection dialog box displays Filter Mirip nnlh pArige lp ope vp dala del Niresterles Files a E EELA ninth Ati BLfprepevpeesid alal Dalabkase Selection Mnp nnlh piri ep nop pes Lo pun Filler Chose Help 2 Select a database definition file name to open from the Files list box The default extension for database definition files is def Refer to File Selection Dialog Box on page 1 17 for more information on the filter option 3 Click Open to open the database The following message displays Database was opened and contains number records You can now access the database information when you use the Verify or Object Tagging tools EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 85 Using EPD Visualizer Menus Database Menu DBMS To connect to a DBMS use the following steps 1 Select Database gt Connect gt DBMS A Database Connection dialog box displays as shown below User it
188. graphic component hold down the Shift key while making your selections e Scroll Scrolls the tree to the tree components associated with graphic components selected in EPD Visualizer e Deselect Clears one graphically selected component from the EPD Visualizer selection list and from the product structure tree Please note The Tree menu commands listed thus far remain selected until another tool or command is selected e Deselect All Clears all product structure tree components and all EPD Visualizer graphic components 3 76 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus Tools Menu e Highlight Visible Highlights in the product structure tree all components for which any part of their associated graphics are visible in EPD Visualizer e Select Selected Selects in the product structure tree all components that have any of their graphics selected in EPD Visualizer Item The Tools gt Item command enables you to select and verify items e Select Select single or multiple items by group or discipline as defined by the Select gt Selection Masks command e Verify Retrieves object information about a selected item Mouse Dynamics The Tools gt Mouse Dynamics command enables you to change your view orientation with the mouse For complete information about this feature refer to Mouse Viewing on page 9 9 ZOOM The Tools gt Zoom command enables you to define a rectangu
189. h Editor on page 3 28 explains in detail what Gpaths are and how to create them A Gpath is a series of points called references each of which is associated with an orientation You can attach a sectioning plane to an object s referential and move the attached pair from reference to reference in a Gpath At each reference the sectioning plane creates a new section that appears in the Section window revealing any interference All the sections appear superimposed in the Section window with a common origin and orientation The dynamic object has the same representation in all the sections so that each section represents the 3D scene as though it had moved around the object relative to other sections Objects should not move while you section the scene from multiple references Moving an object means that you need to perform the sectioning again EPD Visualizer s other sectioning features available from the Section menu should not be used in conjunction with sectioning the scene from multiple references and the Section menu becomes unavailable and windows opened from it close to prevent an inaccurate Section window You can save the results of multiple sectioning to a EPD Visualizer textual graphic file EPD Visualizer User Guide Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Sectioning the Scene from Multiple References The following two figures show typical results of multiple sectioning ices Sree Santi AHN rat
190. h in the scrolling list and click Delete to delete the selected path or Gpath e Undo Delete If you have deleted a path or Gpath clicking Undo Delete reinstates the path or Gpath You cannot restore the deleted path after you define a new path or edit a path 3 30 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus Edit Menu The Path Router The Path Router dialog box allows you to edit or create paths or Gpaths The Path router appears in two forms a complex form for editing or creating Gpaths and a simple form for editing or creating paths Because the complex form includes the features of the simple form this section discusses both forms by describing the complex form and noting where the two forms diverge i Path Rouler ety Name Paattion Detinitian n E EAE n i Ware o Path Ponts open ake i i ELEI i i W Center 4 i 1 llpwn i ainnal H Del Hoo lge EE Absolute WYE Poston on l ALa IO Eor o o Fath Router Puh Harie Reference Harie Posilien Geliniliven Rustereiee Celiriiliven i i Yz it i Vertex _ Get Selecion fads 4 Valh Welerences co Natit s peee i A Ma ah Bre Face Bp Rafi a di Up ete Center AA Domi Wise Legal axes ea AE n o Qrient Normal i 3 i Ea giogo sie Poron ai Edy ig I ci be toc2c020c0co0al Frem Section Planes 3 Mnd Eaiistee oa Sh el nee eR ieee a f Absolute Orienton menre oo A 2 Aldy Editar i She n meeen 4 Close Apply Save
191. hapter 1 Introduction to EPD Visualizer 9 18 EPD Visualizer User Guide Palettes Walk Through Palettes To set the working units select Options gt Preferences For more information on setting the working units refer to Options Menu on page 3 73 Turn Orbit Palette The Turn Orbit Palette contains buttons that enable you to move in an angular direction For each of the tools in the Turn Orbit Palette what you see as you orbit is relative to the camera target To change the camera target click on the Set Camera Target tool and select a new target point in the graphics window The number of degrees you orbit turn or look up and down is determined by the setting on the Turn Orbit Angle slider scale Refer to Turn Orbit Angle Slider Scale on page 9 22 for more information You cannot orbit upside down Figure 9 3 shows the Turn Orbit Palette including the orbit look turn and level buttons and the Turn Orbit Angle slider scale Figure 9 3 Turn Orbit Palette Tum f rbil Angle Degrees Le O p EPD Visualizer User Guide 9 19 Palettes Walk Through Palettes Orbit Left The Orbit Left tool enables you to orbit the camera position to the left around the vertical axis of the 3D scene Orbit Right The Orbit Right tool enables you to orbit the camera position to the right around the vertical axis of the 3D scene Orbit Over The Orbit Over tool enables you to orbit the c
192. he Session Information window shown in the following figure Session Intonm anon Meee ee O Graphic Files H Objects 22m Niky SASHA TA Sed Bc Peolyeqems 1 objet 71 THA 2 Buffer Siz g4 bits Graphle Planet 21 0 none biaxin Choline 1A777716 klasinn ighis Hardware Cirtting Planes Graphies keno ry Used Ciraphics Win ilow I 21 hardware lighis ues 20209 kh 261 kh Hal Abid EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus File Menu Session information consists of a current count of the following Graphic files Objects Polygons Displays five counts e Number of flat polygons e Number of faces defined in shells e For faces defined in shells T precedes the number of triangles e For faces defined in shells Q precedes the number of quadrangles e For faces defined in shells H precedes the number of holes Polygons Object Displays two counts e Average number of faces including flat polygons by object e Average number of faces including flat polygons by graphics file In addition the following hardware related information displays Z buffer size Graphic planes Maximum number of colors and lights allowed with your hardware Hardware Cutting Planes Amount of graphics memory used by your workstation X11 window ID of the EPD Visualizer graphics window Quitting EPD Visualizer 1 Select File gt Quit and you are prompted Are you sure you want to quit
193. he color of items select the items and then select Edit gt Visual Properties gt Item Color The Color Editor dialog box provides the following options e Select an existing color from the Colors list e Select an existing color in your 3D scene e Define a new color You can define new colors by adjusting the Color Composition slider scales Surface Materials In addition to defining colors for objects in your 3D scene you can define material properties for them Material properties control the following features e Color of a surface e How much light it reflects e How transparent or opaque it is e Color and intensity of its reflection e Focus of the glare produced by the surface when light shines on it EPD Visualizer User Guide 2 17 Basic Features Item Editing These factors are primarily important when using ray tracing Surface material colors take precedence over an object s original color when you define a base color If you define the base color of a copper surface material for example this color takes precedence over the original color of the object To maintain the original color of the object use the colorless feature To define material properties for surfaces select the objects then select Edit gt Visual Properties gt Surface Materials 2 18 EPD Visualizer User Guide Basic Features Traversal Traversal This section briefly describes paths and Gpaths creating path and Gpath def
194. he following list e a Obtain layer colors from selected assembly adrawing There should be a_pd file in a corresponding directory e b Output graphic binary files gbf instead of ASCII e c Convert assembly components into separate files in the form of dir c_i x where e dir the directory portion from the o option or pwd e c i the name of the component instance e x gafor gbf e Any amp characters in c_i are converted to The o file or standard output receives any non component output e C Process only the indicated assembly component Use the c option with this option e d Obtain ECHO LAYER information from selected drawing rather than arbitrary drawing Use the e option with this option e e Restrict output to echoed layers only EPD Visualizer User Guide F 3 CADDS Interface Using the CADDS Interface f Convert SP blocks to FP blocks o Output file name instead of standard output s Silence the progress report on standard error S Convert FP to SP blocks Normally cadds2pvs tries to create SP blocks where needed t Eliminate every facet edge in a shell polygon whose sum of xyz components is less than the specified tolerance The default is 1 0 It must be expressed in millimeters Use 0 for no elimination See the v option u Identify the units of tessellation data when a __ pd file is unavailable The following are the valid u
195. hoose one of the following options Visible Only Only visible item s are added to the selection list Hidden Only Only hidden item s are added to the selection list Visible Or Hidden Visible and hidden item s are added to the selection list To add item s to the selection list select the entry or entries in the listing Then click Add To Selection List Please note To select multiple entries hold down the Control key and click random entries To clear the selection list click Clear Selection List Copy Selection to Secondary Selection Select Select gt Copy Sel gt Sel 2 to create a secondary selection by copying the current selection to it This is useful for both static and dynamic interference checking as described in Chapter 5 Interference Checking Sectioning and multiple sectioning from Gpath references can operate on the secondary selection Deselect All If you select Select gt Deselect All all items are cleared and the selection list is cleared 3 82 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus Select Menu Clear Secondary Selection Select Select gt Clear Selection 2 to clear the secondary selection you created with Select gt Copy Sel gt Sel 2 as described previously Highlight Selection With this option switch you can turn the highlighting of items on the selection list on or off Please note The Highlight Selection switch is also located on the T
196. hts on and off The default is On e Type Select the type of light Directional Point or Spot lights EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 53 Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu 3 Select a light type 4 Click New its editor dialog box displays 5 Enter a name for the light in the text box 6 Set the light color To use the Light Color Editor refer to Color Editor on page 1 19 7 Set the option s for the new light as described in the following sections on defining directional lights point lights or spot lights 8 Click Show for point or spot lights to view the position of the light relative to the 3D scene 9 Click Accept to insert the light The Light Editor dialog box redisplays 10 Define the light 11 Click Apply to see the effects of the light on the 3D scene You can define multiple lights then apply them all at once To define a directional light use the following steps 1 Click Directional then click New The Directional Light Editor displays Dinsclion Cueul Accrpl Help 2 Name the light and set the light color 3 Set the following options as necessary e Direction Set the direction of the light Direction is defined by a simple vector passing through the origin of the 3D scene from the source position that you define 3 54 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu To set the light direction you can either Use the three Direction slider scales to set the
197. ialog box The orientation and position of an item or sectioning plane traversing a Gpath are defined in the Gpath and you cannot change them with specifications in the Item Path Traversal dialog box An item traversing a path stops with its local origin at each path vertex and then rotates in steps of the angle increment until it is appropriately aligned to the next path segment An object traversing a Gpath changes orientation continuously between references EPD Visualizer User Guide Basic Features Item Editing Dynamic Interference Checking If you turn on interference checking the selection list is checked dynamically for interferences with all surrounding objects after each translation or rotation or after each step during item traversal An option allows the storage of positions that imply collisions with another item when an item traverses a path or Gpath to allow you to reproduce the events Refer to Chapter 5 Interference Checking for detailed information about interference checking Item Color EPD Visualizer enables you to enhance the color of items in your 3D scene beyond the level provided in your original graphic files By changing the colors of items you can e Draw attention to certain components e Color code items according to particular classification for example construction status assembly order or engineering discipline e Increase the realism in appearance of geometric items To modify t
198. ick Append to append the report to the end of the file you selected or named Any additional Save or Append commands access the current file until you click Select File to select or name another file 3 94 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus Database Menu Manual or Automatic lagging You can either select automatic object tagging which is based on a tag defined in the database or you can manually tag objects when you use the Object Tagging tool Refer to Tool Palette on page 9 2 for an explanation of the Object Tagging tool EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 95 Using EPD Visualizer Menus Interference Checking Menu Interference Checking Menu Interference Checking allows you to perform interference checking between objects in the selection list and surrounding objects By selecting Interference on the menu bar you can access the following menu items e Item Dynamics Turn interference checking on or off for item editing or item traversal operations The status of this item automatically synchronizes with the following e Item Dynamics in the Interference Checking Control dialog box e Check Collisions in the Object Path Traversal dialog box e Control Set up your interference checking session e Clear Deactivates interference checking and restores original colors Refer to Chapter 5 Interference Checking for detailed information about interference checking 3 96 EPD Vi
199. ide items the selection list is cleared To hide the items selected and display only the unselected items select Edit gt Hide gt Selected Items To hide all the unselected items and display only the selected items select Edit gt Hide gt Unselected Items 3 14 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus Edit Menu To hide selected items use the following steps 1 Highlight the items you want hidden To select multiple items in a 3D scene hold down Shift then click each item 2 Select Edit gt Hide gt Selected Items The selected items are hidden in the 3D scene To display only the selected items use the following steps 1 Select the items you want displayed 2 Select Edit gt Hide gt Unselected Items The selected items are displayed and the remainder of the scene is hidden To hide the references of one or more Gpaths use the following steps 1 Select the Gpaths whose references you wish to hide 2 Select Edit gt Hide gt References Show All To redisplay hidden items select Edit gt Show All The Show All menu appears You can choose to show all objects lights paths Gpaths references attached to Gpaths or text References appear in a size that is appropriate for the 3D scene 10 of its maximum visible measurement Hide All To hide groups of items select Edit gt Hide All The Hide All menu appears You can choose to hide all objects lights paths Gpaths referen
200. iew Processing 2 7 Showing and Setting the Primary View 2 7 Viewing All Items 2 7 Saving Views and Notes 2 7 Defining and Playing Back View Sequences 2 7 Selecting Items 2 9 Building a Selection List 2 9 Setting Selection Masks 2 9 Selecting and Deselecting Items 2 9 Defining Selection Sets 2 10 Verification 2 11 Verify 2 11 Measure Distance from Camera to Item 2 11 Measure Distance Between Items or Graphics Files 2 12 Measuring Distance in Sections 2 12 Item Editing a Controlling Visibility 2 13 Deleting Items 2 13 Translating and Rotating Items 2 14 Spatial Orientation 2 14 Target of Translation and Rotation Operations 2 15 EPD Visualizer User Guide Contents vii Traversal Text File Menu Translation 2 15 Rotation 2 16 Item Traversal 2 16 Dynamic Interference Checking 2 17 Item Color 2 17 Surface Materials 2 17 2 19 Defining Path and Gpaths 2 19 Camera Traversal 2 19 Item and Section Plane Traversal 2 20 Interference Checking 2 21 Static Interference Checking 2 2 Dynamic Interference Checking 2 21 2 22 Defining Text Properties 2 22 Creating Editing and Deleting Text 2 22 Attaching Text or Tags to Objects 2 22 Accessing Online Help 2 23 Using EPD Visualizer Menus EPD Visualizer Main Menus 3 2 3 3 Starting a New Session 3 3 Opening a Metafile 3 4 Adding Textual or Binary Graphics Files 3 5 Removing Graphic Files 3 7 S
201. iles added are converted to meters You can also work in different units by setting the working units When you perform walk through operations item traversal or item verification all calculations are displayed in the working units you select Metafiles A metafile is an ASCII file that contains a complete description of an EPD Visualizer session This includes all geometric objects views view sequences lights paths color definitions materials notes and control settings such as working units and slider scale settings EPD Visualizer User Guide 1 7 Introduction to EPD Visualizer Basic Concepts If you add several textual and binary graphic files to an EPD Visualizer session you can save the graphic files into one metafile as shown in Figure 1 3 Figure 1 3 Graphic File and Metafile Relationship PCRAFHIC_FILE POHTROL OPTIONS urit isst PEHD FATH aie Pathi p molar yellow Meta file PFOINTS O 0 1400 0 4 0 d d d a 5 0 20 0 0 0 45 0 PEND PEND RENDO Graphic Files When you save a metafile if you do not add an extension EPD Visualizer appends a mf extension to the metafile name 3D Viewing After you become familiar with the coordinate system and general viewing concepts used in EPD Visualizer you can easily manage your 3D scene These spatial concepts are described in this section Coordinate System The global environment used in EPD Visualizer is based on the Cartesian coordinat
202. illed right arrow an additional menu is displayed e If you click the diamond shaped buttons next to a menu item you can switch between the available options If the button is filled it is selected EPD Visualizer User Guide Introduction to EPD Visualizer Using the EPD Visualizer Window e If you click the square shaped buttons next to a menu item you can select one or more options If the button is filled it is selected e Ifamenu item has no symbol next to it the particular action takes effect as soon as you select it For example if you select Edit gt Hide selected items in your 3D scene instantly disappear from view Dialog Boxes When you select menu items followed by ellipses a dialog box is displayed The dialog box provides options that enable you to perform numerous tasks such as setting attributes changing colors and defining properties Each user can define the screen positions of dialog boxes when they open for an explanation of this feature see CVDPA_CONFIG_DIR on page H 2 Some dialog boxes might require that you make a selection or interact with it before proceeding which is indicated by a beep The following sections describe items contained in the dialog box or that are displayed as a result of an action within the dialog box Text Box Click inside the text box to enter text EPD Visualizer is not case sensitive You can use any alphabetic characters numbers 0 9 underscores and spa
203. imary view e View Center and zoom the 3D scene within the limits of the coordinates of the items e Change View Change to an orthogonal view a view defined by two points or switch between orthographic and perspective views e Secondary Views Create secondary views e Perspective Change perspective angle of the camera e Rendering Select rendering method of objects e Lighting Define duplicate and edit lights and control scene brightness e View Editor Define views and save notes e View Sequence Define view sequences and play them back e Camera Traversal Traverse the camera along defined paths e Movie Recorder Define movie parameters controls The View menu items enable you to manage the display of items in your 3D scene define views based on camera position and use camera traversal to move through the 3D scene Primary View The primary view is a view that you can return to if you become disoriented while moving through the 3D scene The initial primary view is defined when you add your first graphic file The primary view is saved with a metafile and is later restored when you open a metafile You can also set a new primary view Show To show the primary view select View gt Primary View gt Show Set To set a new primary view define the view and select View gt Primary View gt Set EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 41 Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu View To di
204. inches END EXTENTS xmin 10 0 ymin 10 0 zmin 10 0 xmax 10 0 ymax 10 0 zmax 10 0 END COLORS red 1 0 0 0 0 0 green 0 0 1 0 0 0 blue 0 0 0 0 1 0 END OBJ object_id 2124343233 discipline structural group 100 color blue FP 10 0 0 0 0 0 20 0 0 0 0 0 20 0 5 0 0 0 HOOF 50 0 END SP POINTS 70 35 20 09 0 5 60 0 10 0 5 0 90 0 15 0 5 5 30 2 10 1 0 0 15 0 20 0 2 0 10 7 30 2 2 4 EPD Visualizer User Guide C 15 EPD Visualizer Binary Graphic File Object Definition 10 0 0 0 0 0 END FDS 4 O0 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 6 5 3 10 2 4 5 4 2 5 3 40 END END END END Binary FF00030000000100060002 gt DECstation FF CONTROL_ OPTIONS 3 1 unit 6 a Ae el oll gt l inches 2 0000C0240000C0240000C0240000 gt EXTENTS 0 10 0 10 0 10 0 400240004002400040024000 gt 10 0 10 0 10 0 000100000003 gt COLORS 1 number of colors 3 Il 000000037265643FFF00000000000000000000 gt name length 3 red 1 0 0 0 0 0 00000005677265656E000000003FFF000000000000 gt name length 5 green 0 0 1 0 0 0 00000004626C756500000000000000003FFF0000 gt name length 4 blue 0 0 0 0 1 0 000200020000000B2D32313234333433323333 gt 0BJ 2 object _id 2 11 2124343233 00000000000A7374727563747572616C gt discipline 0 10 structural Il
205. indow 1 10 EPD Visualizer User Guide Introduction to EPD Visualizer Using the EPD Visualizer Window Graphics Window Most of the EPD Visualizer window is occupied by the graphics window Your 3D scene is displayed in the graphics window To the right of the graphics window are three palettes Beneath the graphics window are the prompt window on the left and the status window on the right Prompt and Status Windows The prompt window displays prompts that require a response from you The status window displays the status of operations as you perform them Palettes Three palettes are located vertically alongside the graphics window e Tool Palette e Move Palette e Turn Orbit Palette Slider scales are found in palettes and dialog boxes and are explained in this section The prompt window displays a brief description of each tool and button when you place the mouse cursor to a tool button or the slider scale Customize the layout of your EPD Visualizer window with the following menu items e Move the palettes to the left or right side of the graphics window by selecting Options gt Left Right Palette e Hide or show the palettes by selecting Options gt Hide Show Palette e Vertically stretch or shrink the palettes with the slider located on the bottom right of the palette EPD Visualizer User Guide 1 11 Introduction to EPD Visualizer Using the EPD Visualizer Window You can control the rend
206. ing 2 appl I T Active Section Color 3 r i sce i eeeeeee 5 nsomonnnnnnnnnn nunnunnnnunmannnnmnnnnn senueneeues i re alice blue I fantique_white BE Be aquamarine _ pel Ref 7 18 EPD Visualizer User Guide Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Sectioning the Scene from Multiple References You can compose a list of active references by typing in the Active References area Two types of entries are possible and all entries must be separated by spaces e Single references Type the number associated with the reference in the References scrolling list e Inclusive ranges Type the numbers associated with the endpoint references in the References scrolling list and separate them with a minus sign The reference status in the Active References area rules if it is inconsistent with a setting created with the Active toggle button Changing a reference s active status with the Active toggle button immediately changes the Active References list Active References You set the color of a reference by clicking it in the references list and clicking selecting the desired color in the Section Color scrolling list in the Individual Reference Setting area Colors whose names exceed 15 characters do not appear in the scrolling list Individual Reference Setting ry H 2 alice blue antique_white aquamarine er aao i H aonacb uraaco as rbeucr cemin cre uaaueu docete rrai You can sel
207. initial colors If you release a mouse button and at the same time press the Shift key the model axis motions remain enabled You can select another axis or perform another motion Behavior of Model Axis Motions The behavior of model axis motions is similar to screen axis motions EPD Visualizer obtains the steps used for translations from the view field It obtains the steps used for rotations from the Turn Orbit Angle slider scale in the Turn Orbit Palette The angle is initially set to 15 degrees All rotation steps are an integer times this angle During rotations the pixel threshold is twice the normal one to avoid unwanted rotations For more information about the Turn Orbit Angle slider scale refer to Chapter 9 Palettes 1 26 EPD Visualizer User Guide Introduction to EPD Visualizer Permanent Mouse Dynamics The total motion that has occurred since your last mouse button action is displayed in the status window Example of Model Axis Motions Suppose you want to move the camera so that the scene appears to translate on an axis that is oblique and does not correspond to a screen axis To do so perform the following steps 1 Click the middle or right mouse button Do this without selecting or deactivating any tool The X axis appears in red The Y and Z axes appear in yellow 2 Drag up or right with the middle mouse button to translate the scene positively along the X axis When you release the mouse butt
208. inition file and the structure of the file DEFINE Any character after an exclamation point is regarded as a comment and is ignored by the database program Blank lines are also ignored Field names are not case sensitive DEFINE DB FILE FILE NAME hp moe b proj cvpvs data mckee db END The DEFINE REQUIRED FIELDS section must appear before the DEFINE OBJECT section In this section OBJECT_ID MODEL and OBJECT TYPE fields are defined by DEFINE FIELD statements Only one 1 DEFINE REQUIRED FIELDS section is required per definition file OBJECT_ID MODEL and OBJECT TYPE data must appear in every record in the database file Define other fields in the DEFINE_ OBJECT section A DEFINE FIELD statement has the following syntax DEFINE FIELD field _ name starting position ending position A comma is a separator OBJECT_ID MODEL and OBJECT TYPE field names are fixed for all object types and should not be changed However you can choose starting and ending column positions for these fields to customize EPD Visualizer User Guide A 3 Database Interface Creating an ASCII Database your object record Refer to the DEFINE OBJECT section if you I want to designate any of these fields for automatic tagging DEFINE REQUIRED FIELDS DEFINE FIELD OBJECT_ID 1 16 DEFINE FIELD MODEL 17 44 DEFINE FIELD OBJECT _TYP
209. initions camera traversal sectioning plane traversal and item traversal A path is a sequence of line segments consisting of any number of points along which you can traverse objects and a Gpath is similar to a path except that its points include orientations Sectioning planes objects and the camera can traverse paths sectioning planes and objects can traverse Gpaths You can add any number of paths or Gpaths to your 3D scene Defining Path and Gpaths You can define paths or Gpaths by creating graphic files or by using the Path Editor dialog box A path definition contains the units the path name and color and the coordinates of the path A Gpath definition includes references and each Gpath reference has a location rotations around the global axes and an optional name After you create the graphic files that define paths and Gpaths you can select the paths and Gpaths to be displayed as lines within the 3D scene and to guide traversal Refer to Appendix B EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File for information on creating or editing a textual graphic file containing path definitions or Gpath definitions The Path Editor on page 3 28 explains how to define paths and Gpaths with dialog boxes Camera Traversal You can traverse the camera along a selected path in the 3D scene by selecting View gt Camera Traversal The camera is focused in any of the following ways e Horizontal lock e Along the path e Fixed point e Fix
210. ints POINTS POS 209045 60 0 10 0 5 0 9030 S15 0H 55 30 2 10 10 0 15 0 20 02 0 10 7 30 22 4 10 0 0 00 0 END B 16 EPD Visualizer User Guide EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File Object Definitions Shell Faces Definition Shell faces are defined in a subsection of shell definition and identified by the key word FDS The shell faces definition subsection must follow the shell points subsection Each shell face that you define must have at least three points to define a valid face A shell face is defined by specifying the number of points that define a face followed by a list of integers that index into the point list This list of integers identifies the points to use when defining a face The first point in the point section is indexed at position 0 A hole in a shell is defined in the same manner as a regular face except that the integer defining the number of points for each face is negative instead of positive The negative number instructs EPD Visualizer to subtract the face from the shell definition This results in the display of a hole The following example shows the format for defining shell faces and holes FDS 5 0 T2 3 6 3 2 34 5 3 02 4 5 4 2 53 0 END Polyline Definition A polyline is defined in a subsection of object definition identified by the key word PL You can create any number of polyline subsections A poly point is defined with three floating point values that represen
211. ints With this tool you need to digitize two sections EPD Visualizer uses the digitized points to select the associated sections Cross markers appear on points where the minimum distance occurs The distance between these points and the distances along the X Y and Z axes are displayed in the status window If the two digitized sections are the same EPD Visualizer displays a warning message Also if the sections are crossing EPD Visualizer displays a warning message and cross markers to indicate the points where the sections cross 7 26 EPD Visualizer User Guide Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Measuring Distance in Sections The following illustration shows two sections Cross markers indicate the point at which the minimum distance between them occurs Neo Considerations Some restrictions and limitations that apply to measuring distances are the following e You may want to identify an object in the Section window while measuring a distance To identify an object without disabling distance measuring press the Shift key while selecting the object in the Section window with the left mouse button For information about selecting objects in the Section window refer to Mouse Behavior in the Section Window on page 7 8 e You must enter an appropriate tolerance gap value for EPD Visualizer to use for chaining the polylines of sections to determine the endpoint Inappropriate values can l
212. ion process Color color_number name_of_component The color_number is a number in the range 0 15 indicating the color in the EPD Connect application The file specified by PVS_COLOR_FILE file establishes the RGB values of the colors to be used in EPD Visualizer For EPD Connect a default table is supplied in SEPD HOME data exlorer pvs_ color file EPD Visualizer User Guide H 7 Environment Variables Path Editor Path Traversal and Translation and Rotation Path Editor Path Traversal and Translation and Rotation The following environment variables configure Path Editor Path traversal and translation and rotation behavior PVS_LOCAL_CPL PVS_LOCAL_CPL controls the default setting of the Local CPL toggle button in the Translate Rotate Selection List dialog box Setting the variable to any value specifies that the default setting of the toggle is active Local CPL The setting affects sectioning from multiple Gpath references of the current selection PVS_NORMAL_AXIS PVS_NORMAL_AXIS specifies which axis of Gpath references is considered as normal to the material Legal values are x y z X Y or Z The default value is Z PVS_PATHS_DIR PVS_PATHS_DIR specifies the default directory used to save the paths created from the Path Editor dialog box PVS_UNNAMED_REF PVS_UNNAMED_REF specifies the default string name used in creating names for new references If the variable is not defined the default string is rf
213. ional optional attributes such as discipline group and color The discipline attribute specifies that an object belongs to a particular engineering discipline such as electrical hydraulics piping structural or drive train The group attribute assigns an object to an EPD Visualizer group which is often equivalent to a level layer or class on your CAD system EPD Visualizer has many features that allow you to perform on disciplines and groups to make editing convenient and easy to use The following examples show the format for defining object attributes geometries definitions are not shown OBJ object_id 2124343233 discipline structural group 100 color aquamarine END OBJ object_id id_9823_t discipline drive train group transmission color metallic gray END From a geometric viewpoint all objects are defined using polygons and polylines Polygons are defined in accordance with the right hand rule This rule specifies that polygon points are ordered in a counterclockwise direction with respect to the outer or visible side of the polygon face B 14 EPD Visualizer User Guide EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File Object Definitions Polygon points that define a face must be coplanar which means that the points must define a flat plane Please note Polygons that are not coplanar might display erratically Polygons are specified in two formats flat or shell polygons The shell format
214. ions gt Preferences Glossary 8 EPD Visualizer User Guide Index symbols gof files B 1 A Ambient light description 2 6 Angular movement 1 9 Assembly data trees F 10 Assembly design data storing F 2 Axes global 3 22 3 23 local 2 14 3 22 project 2 14 verifying 3 25 B Back facing polygons description 3 47 Binary graphic file adding 3 5 color definition C 6 control options C 3 conversion to textual file D 1 converting to a textual file 1 7 description 1 7 C 1 example c 15 extents definition C 5 format C 2 geometry specifications C 11 object definition C 8 removing 3 7 Box zone creating 4 4 purpose 4 4 Buffering display 3 47 double 3 47 single 3 47 C CADDS interface assembly data trees F 10 converting entities to explicit F 6 converting tessellation data F 8 creating tessellation data F 2 errors F 6 example F 5 generating _td files F 10 messages F 6 multiple input and output F 9 purpose F 1 F 2 restrictions F 6 updating the _td file F 6 using F 3 Camera measuring distance 9 8 setting position 9 6 setting position and target 9 7 setting target 9 7 Camera traversal color blending 3 70 EPD Visualizer User Guide Index 1 Index focus 3 67 overview 2 19 purpose 3 66 starting 3 69 view direction 3 69 Centering quick view centering 1 28 Clipping description 7 5 starting 7 5 Color changing in graphics window 3 74 changing item color 2 17 defining 1 19
215. is application enables you to view image sequences captured during the item and camera traversals at a much higher speed than real time rendering To replay a movie sequence on the Silicon Graphics you can select RGB format in the EPD Visualizer Movie Recorder dialog and use the movie player provided with all IRIX systems On the Sun you can select RAS format and use the CV Animator provided with CADDS systems To run the EPD Visualizer Movie Player add the following directory to the platform specific shared library path environment variable VIS_HOME lib For example on platforms such as Sun Compaq or SGI you would add this directory path to the LD_LIBRARY_PATH environment variable On the HP platform you would add this path to the SHLIB_PATH environment variable For IBM you would add it to the LIBPATH variable EPD Visualizer User Guide G 1 EPD Visualizer Movie Player When executing pvsmovie the EPD Visualizer Movie Player window displays as shown in the following figure Deleg ollie coned a Sharky rae Lowey rane CUT EIL FHINE start ar HESI Sin I Repeat Hrverse G 2 EPD Visualizer User Guide EPD Visualizer Movie Player Getting Started Getting Started By selecting File in the menu bar you can access the following menu items e Load Load a movie file e Quit Quit EPD Visualizer EPD Visualizer User Guide G 3 EPD Visualizer Movie Player Loading
216. ist of all sectioned objects in which the names appear in the same colors as the objects e Output Title Typing a title in this field makes that title appear as a comment in the printout 2 Type a file name in the Output Filename field Full and relative UNIX names are legal UNIX variable substitutions are not allowed The tilde is not a valid first character but the following slash and dot combinations are legal slash dot slash and dot dot slash 3 Press the Write HPGL button to write an HPGL file or press the Write Postscript button to write a PostScript file An existing file of the same name is overwritten without a message You can print the contents of the Section window The file that prints is a temporary file usr tmp sectionoutput tmp that is automatically deleted after printing By default the lpr command prints the file but you can specify a different command for PostScript files by defining the PVS_PRINT_COMMAND environment variable You give the variable the value of an executable file such as a binary or script no additional argument for the command is allowed For example the following line changes the default print command for PostScript files to lp setenv PVS_ PRINT COMMAND usr bin lp To print the contents of the Section window press the Print HPGL or Print PostScript button EPD Visualizer User Guide 7 37 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Section Win
217. isualizer DBMS Demo Before Using SQL Interface On All Hosts On Hosts Running Oracle On Hosts Running Visualizer Testing the Interface Query and Verification Testing the Visualizer Interface Testing the Query Database Testing Verification EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File Textual Graphic File Contents A 2 A 3 A 7 A 7 A 7 A 9 A 11 A 11 A 14 A 16 A 16 A 16 A 16 A 16 Any A 17 A 18 A 18 A 18 A 18 A 19 A 19 A 19 B 2 Textual Graphic File Format B 3 Control Options B 4 DBMS Control Options B 5 Extents Definitions B 6 Color Definitions B 7 Contents xvi EPD Visualizer User Guide Light Definitions B 8 Material Definitions B 10 Path Definitions B 12 GPath Definitions B 13 Object Definitions B 14 Flat Polygon Definition B 16 Shell Definition B 16 Shell Points Definition B 16 Shell Faces Definition B 17 Polyline Definition B 17 Object Definition Example B 18 Gpath Multiple Sectioning B 19 EPD Visualizer Binary Graphic File Binary Graphic File Format C 2 Control Options C 3 Extents Definition C 5 Color Definition C 6 Object Definition C 8 Geometry Specifications C 11 Flat Polygons C 11 Shell Polygons C 12 Polyline C 14 Textual and Binary Graphic File Example C 15 Binary C 16 Textual and Binary Graphic File Conversion Syntax D 2 E
218. isualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus File Menu Graphic Output Capturing a Raster Image You can capture a raster image of a view displayed in the EPD Visualizer graphics window for printing or viewing outside of EPD Visualizer To use this feature the EPD Visualizer pvs_write raster program must be available and executable on your system This program is distributed with EPD Visualizer and is installed on the VIS_HOME bin directory Please note On Sun platforms running xg1 do not allow any window or menu to occlude the EPD Visualizer window while performing the capture operation Otherwise the output raster file will not be created properly To capture a raster image perform the following steps 1 Select File gt Graphics Output gt Raster Image The Raster Image Capture dialog box displays Naster Image le Hame raster til Dimension pixels File Farma width E40 w WD we RGE Ill wr AS lleighk ran a GIF TO Color Space Imagi Ceplt RGR 4 Gray are fe AR a a Resize Window Wrrile Rasler File 2 In the Raster Image File Name field enter the file name with or without a directory path 3 Set the following options as necessary a Dimension Width pixels Height pixels After entering the new dimension click Resize Window EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 9 Using EPD Visualizer Menus File Menu b File Format XWD X11 windows dump format T
219. it to the existing geometry Selectable geometry must exist under the center point of the rectangular area that you select For more information about this feature refer to Zoom on page 9 6 EPD Visualizer User Guide 9 5 Palettes Tool Palette ZOOM F The Zoom tool enables you to define a rectangular area to be a temporary close up view of your 3D scene A temporary close up view is useful for briefly enlarging an area of your scene The close up view is similar to looking through binoculars To zoom a selected area use the following steps 1 Click on the tool and move the pointer into the graphics window You are prompted with Zoom By Rectangular Area Press SELECT mouse button and drag 2 As you Start to drag the pointer you are prompted with the following Drag pointer to define zoom area and release 3 The selected area is magnified and you are prompted with the following Click any mouse button to restore previous view Set Camera Position 4 A The Set Camera Position tool enables you to set a new position or your eye point for the camera 5y To set a new Camera Position use the following steps 1 Click on the tool and move the pointer into the graphics window You are prompted with the following Set Camera Position Digitize a vertex point 2 After you digitize an item the camera moves to that new point 9 6 EPD Visualizer User Guide Palettes Tool Palette
220. itions Paths are defined in a section identified by the key word PATH Paths are used by item and camera traversal You can define any number of path sections in a graphic file Each path must have a unique name and an assigned color The path points subsection is identified by the key word POINTS Each point is defined using three floating point values that represent an xyz location The first point in the path points definition specifies the head of the path You can define any number of path points The following example shows the format for defining paths PATH name fire route _1 color red POINTS 0 0 5 05 0 0 00 05 0 30 00 05 0 END END PATH name pathway_1 color blue POINTS 90 0 10 00 0 90 0 10 0 5 0 20 0 10 0 5 0 20 0 10 00 0 20 020 00 0 END END B 12 EPD Visualizer User Guide EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File GPath Definitions GPath Definitions Gpaths are defined in a section identified by the keyword GPATH Sectioning planes and objects can traverse Gpaths or translate and rotate by moving to a Gpath reference You can define any number of Gpath sections in a graphic file The Gpath points references subsection is identified by the keyword REFPOINTS Each reference is defined by the following e three floating point values that represent an XYZ location e three floating point values indicating the rotation angles around the global axis in degrees AX AY AZ e
221. itize marker snaps to the nearest vertex The following message displays Distance to selected item distance The distance displays in working units such as feet miles or meters defined in Options gt Preferences Measure Distance Between Items 7 h The Measure Distance Between Items tool enables you to measure the distance are between two items in the 3D scene The distance is measured by the straight line distance calculated from vertex to vertex and the delta xyz distances expressed as the xyz component parts of the straight line distance To measure the distance between two items use the following steps 1 Click on the tool and move the pointer into the graphics window You are prompted with the following Measure Distance Between Items Digitize first vertex point 2 After you digitize the first item a digitize marker snaps to the nearest vertex You are prompted with the following 9 8 EPD Visualizer User Guide Palettes Tool Palette Measure Distance Between Items Digitize second vertex point 3 After you digitize the second item the following message displays Distance between items distance dx distance dy distance dz distance The distance between the items is the straight line distance and is calculated in working units such as feet miles or meters defined in Options gt Preferences The dx dy and dz distance is the delta xyz distance Mouse Viewing The Mouse
222. izer Menus Database Menu To define a new substitution variable use the following steps 1 Select Database gt Substitution Variables The Substitution Variable dialog box displays Mames Walie model s Pever TTEN tal Hew Cdit Delete Undo Delete Help 2 Click New 3 Enter a name and value 4 Click OK To edit a substitution variable use the following steps 5 Click the name of the variable to be edited in the Names list 6 Click Edit 7 Click OK after you edit the name and value To delete a substitution variable click the name of the variable to be deleted Then click Delete and the name is removed from the Names list To restore a deleted substitution variable click Undo Delete You cannot restore the deleted variable after you define a new variable or edit a variable EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 89 Using EPD Visualizer Menus Database Menu Query Database The DBMS Interface enables you send SQL query statements to the connecting DBMS database The SQL query statements can be pre defined in a file in the connecting DBMS or entered interactively To create or edit an SQL query statement use the following steps 1 Select Database gt Query Database A Query Database dialog box displays Query Editar sue esctl lasg Hi 1hzncir iji nnalaza tad artigos i acil fram plwg wir re tar nm Hkaq noe and modal Frm head Substitution Variables Mime l
223. izer User Guide 5 5 Interference Checking Setting Up an Interference Checking Session Highlighting Colliding Components in EPD Connect You can highlight the colliding components in the product structure tree by selecting the Highlight in Navigator option in the Interference Checking Control window Components are highlighted for static and dynamic interference checking except for item traversal operations Highlighting is removed from noncolliding components that were previously highlighted in the product structure tree Checking Against the Selection During interference checking three kinds of checking can be performed against the current selection as follows e All other components in the scene are checked against the selection e A secondary selection is checked against the selection e All visible components in the scene are checked against the selection With color mode enabled you can check all components in the scene against the selection For static interference checking you can check the selection against a secondary selection or check the selection against itself With color mode disabled you can check all visible components against the selection Checking Options The following options allow you to specify the kind of check you want applied to the current selection e Selection This checks all other components in the scene against the selection with no component in the selection being checked against itself Fo
224. jaane Penn 7 Select Cuery Select Diery Initial ire Fror Mle From DOMS Sub Vadables _ Submit 2 Set the following options as necessary Query Editor Contains the contents of the SQL statement You can enter the query interactively load it from a previously created query file or load it from the connecting DBMS Substitution Variables A substitution variable in a query statement is denoted by a preceding character When a query statement is read in from a file or the DBMS the Substitution Variables box is initialized with a list of variable names and their default values If a variable is defined as a persistent variable it is initialized to the previously defined value Other variables obtained from the query statements are transient variables Transient variables are deleted after the submission of the query e Name Variable name e Value Variable value Values for string variables must be enclosed in single quotes 3 90 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus Database Menu You can use the up and down arrows to move between variables or you can enter a lt CR gt from the Substitution Value box to move to the next variable Select Query From File Load a query statement from a previously created query file Refer to Select a Query from a File on page 3 91 for more information Select Query From DBMS Load a query statement from the PVS_SQL_ STMT tabl
225. jects are the same in the Section window as in the graphics window EPD Visualizer User Guide 7 7 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Sectioning the Scene You can display the section objects colors identical to those in the graphics window or specify another color using the color editor The User Color option in the Sectioning Control window allows you to apply the color you have selected with the color editor Any color change performed from EPD Connect such as changing indicator colors or highlighting components is immediately reflected in the section The Section window displays only a front view of the current section with the interference markers visible if interference checking is enabled see Interference Checking on page 7 11 The window automatically adjusts to fit each newly created section You can then scroll zoom or reset the view You can resize move and refresh the Section window in the same way you do other windows The Section window automatically closes when you disable sectioning in the Sectioning Control window You can also close it manually as you do any other window Mouse Behavior in the Section Window When working with the view displayed in the Section window you can use the mouse to scroll zoom center and reset the view and to select objects You use the left mouse button to select objects and the middle and right mouse buttons to manage the view The mouse actions that
226. lar area to be a temporary or permanent close up view of your 3D scene For more information about this feature refer to Zoom on page 9 6 Set Camera The Tools gt Set Camera command provides the following selections that enable you to manipulate the camera e Position Set a new position eye point for the camera Refer to Set Camera Position on page 9 6 for further information on position e Target Set a point around which the orbit buttons operate Refer to Set Camera Target on page 9 7 for further information on target e Position and Target Set a new camera position and camera target Refer to Set Camera Position on page 9 6 and Set Camera Target on page 9 7 for further information EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 77 Using EPD Visualizer Menus Tools Menu Measure Distance The Tools gt Measure Distance command measures the distance between the camera position and a vertex point you select in the 3D scene or the distance between two vertices It also measures distances in sections Refer to Chapter 7 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning for information about measuring distances in sections Zone Definition The Tools gt Zone Definition command allows you to construct three dimensional zones for circumscribing areas for clash detection Refer to Chapter 4 Constructing Zones for detailed information about constructing zones Normals You can
227. le dynamic interference checking as described in Turning On or Off Item Dynamics on page 5 4 EPD Visualizer User Guide 2 21 Basic Features Text Text This section briefly describes defining text properties creating editing and deleting text and attaching tags to objects either manually or automatically Defining Text Properties Text properties are specific settings consisting of font font type variable or fixed text alignment font size text color and spacing between characters You can define the text properties by selecting Edit gt Text Properties before you enter text or attach tags Otherwise you can use the default text properties After you define the text properties any text you add in the graphics window adopts these properties You can also change the properties of existing text with the Select tool to select the text After you change the properties the selected text displays the new properties Creating Editing and Deleting Text You can create text anywhere in the graphics window with the Text tool You can also edit existing text after you select it with the Text tool You can delete text by selecting it with the Select tool and then selecting Edit gt Delete You enter text in the Text Editor which also displays the xyz coordinates of the text Attaching Text or Tags to Objects You can manually attach text to objects or you can automatically attach tags from the database to objects If
228. lection 2 Item All Visible Intersection em Dynamics _J Highlight in Navigator Interference Checking Check Now Reviex Close The Interference Checking Control window allows you to define the interference check you want performed This includes such actions as applying colors to the components involved in the interference check specifying the components you want checked against the current selection choosing how you want interferences analyzed and displayed and reviewing and reporting the results Turning On or Off Item Dynamics You can turn interference checking on or off for item editing or item traversal operations To do so select the Item Dynamics option or select Interference gt Item Dynamics from the EPD Visualizer window Interference checking can be turned on or off from the Object Path Traversal dialog box by switching the Check Collisions button in the Play area 5 4 EPD Visualizer User Guide Interference Checking Setting Up an Interference Checking Session Coloring and Highlighting Colliding Components You can view colliding components in color in EPD Visualizer as well as highlight them in EPD Connect Alternately you can choose to see the bounding boxes or the edges of the colliding components Refer to Viewing Results Without Color on page 5 5 Applying Color to Components By default color mode is preselected in the Interference Checking Control window causing colo
229. llowing fields e QUERY TYPE The type of data to be returned for example properties construction scheduling e OBJECT TYPE The specific type of an object for example valve pipe steel This field can be NULL A NULL object type indicates that it is not needed to be used in searching for the query statement e QUERY NAME The name of the query statement used to locate the query text in the query statement table Below is an example of this table Table A 2 Sample PVS_QUERY Table QUERY_TYPE OBJECT_TYPE QUERY_NAME construction lt NULL gt construction properties lt NULL gt properties construction pipe construction properties pipe properties construction valve construction properties valve properties The third table is called PVS_QUERY_MODE This table contains the following fields e QUERY TYPE The type of data e QUERY MODE The fieldname used to retrieve the appropriate query statement It can have values of either OBJECT_ID FILE NAME or NULL A NULL value indicates that both OBJECT_ID and FILE NAME are used A 12 EPD Visualizer User Guide Database Interface DBMS SQL Interface This table is optional If it does not exist the query mode is considered to be NULL Below is an example of this table Table A 3 Sample PVS_QUERY_MODE Table QUERY_TYPE QUERY_MODE construction lt NULL gt maintenance OBJECT_ID properties OBJECT_
230. llows lt Desc of section of graphic file 1 gt Each graphic file intersected by lt Desc of section of graphic file 2 gt the cutting plane generates one object lt Desc of section of graphic file n gt lt List of interferences gt 7 32 EPD Visualizer User Guide Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Saving a Section Description of a Sectioned Graphic File Each sectioned graphic file produces a portion of the gaf file A description of a sectioned graphic file shown as lt Desc of section of graphic filel file 2 file n gt in the previous example follows COLORS yellow 1 000000 1 000000 0 000000 END OBJ object_id name_graphic_file discipline section group a 0 89463 b 0 34467 c 0 28433 d2343 4099 color yellow PL 43 850868 67 349365 159 731003 43 256786 68 456612 159 924911 42 777077 69 621246 159 749084 42 452496 70 735733 159 228958 42 309612 71 702507 158 414810 END PL 2765 166504 838 056274 557 356689 2759 955566 837 041016 572 521973 2758 226074 836 646484 577 484985 END END An explanation of this example follows The color is that of the first object found in the graphic file With EPD Visualizer associating a single color to a graphic file is common practice The attribute object _id contains the last thirty one characters of the name of the sectioned graphic file The suffix gaf or gbf is omitted Always set th
231. lowing steps 1 Pick up the tool and move the pointer into the graphics window You are prompted with Select By Volume Digitize first vertex point 2 After you digitize an item a digitize marker snaps to the nearest vertex and you are prompted with Select By Volume Digitize second vertex point 3 After you digitize the second item the selected items are highlighted and the following message displays Number of selected items number Verify F i Retrieve information about a selected item To verify items use the following steps 1 Pick up the tool and move the pointer into the graphics window You are prompted with Verify Item Digitize item to verify 2 After you digitize the item the Verification dialog box appears 9 4 EPD Visualizer User Guide Palettes Tool Palette Tree Select and Scroll Et x Retrieve information about a selected item Select this command then select a graphic component In the EPD Connect the product structure tree scrolls to the items associated with the selected component The selected component joins the selection list To select multiple items press the Shift key and continue to select items with the Tree Select and Scroll Tool Permanent Zoom Selecting this icon enables you to define a rectangular area to be a permanent close up view of your 3D scene The Permanent Zoom moves the camera to the center of the selected rectangular area and attaches
232. mation about a reference that appears in the Section window Clicking on the representation of the reference in the Section window displays the name of the Gpath and reference in the status window EPD Visualizer User Guide Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Sectioning the Scene Interference Checking You can enable or disable interference checking from the Sectioning Control window With interference checking enabled you can highlight the common points of sections obtained by cutting different graphic files When a section is displayed you can enable interference checking to highlight the common points without regenerating the section Interferences are highlighted in red in the section When you enable interference checking the Sectioning Interference dialog box appears Soctlonlag interfer ciee F Proximity tolerance j antach distance Humber ot intere rencPsS In the Sectioning Interference dialog box you can enter values for proximity tolerance and contact distance The number of interferences detected is displayed in the dialog box as well as in the status window of the main graphics window Interference checking uses the values you enter for proximity tolerance and contact distance to detect interference between components that are close together If you enter illegal characters such as alphabetical characters and punctuation signs and negative values EPD Visualizer displays the
233. me s from the list of Loaded Graphic Files To select multiple file names hold down the Control key and click the file names you want to select 3 Click Remove and then Close EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 7 Using EPD Visualizer Menus File Menu saving a Metafile When a metafile is open the title bar displays the metafile path name To save changes to a new metafile select File gt Save Metafile As to display the Save Metafile dialog box as shown in the following figure Filter Mer espai Bree Ml Direcbories Fiela les Fusersacayevs datad Maap ra espes id aber ad Hietafile Hame Maerkel atoiplarnt r Type the name of the file in the Metafile Name field and click Save The Save Metafile Options Selection box is displayed next By default EPD Visualizer saves metafiles with all geometry materials and path information If you want to save the entire metafile without any of this information select the information categories you do not want saved and click OK To save recent changes to an existing metafile select File gt Save Metafile to display the Save Metafile Options Selection box When you choose to save a metafile without a particular type of information the entire metafile is saved without the information not just the information added since the previous save Refer to the File Selection Dialog Box on page 1 17 for more information on using the filter option 3 8 EPD V
234. mote shell to feed a_td file to your local system for conversion enter the following command remsh bar n cat usr tmp car td cadds2pvs gt car gaf Please note The remsh command is the UNIX rsh command on Sun and Digital systems EPD Visualizer User Guide F 9 CADDS Interface Using the CADDS Interface Assembly Design Trees You can process assemblies that were created by Assembly Design commands In place of the CADDSpart option supply the name of your assembly Set the CVPATH UNIX environment variable just as the caddsrc file would set it Itis used for locating the components of an assembly tree If you forget to set CVPATH then cadds2pvs supplies a default value The following is the syntax for setting the CVPATH setenv CVPATH directory directory directory In addition you can override the following defaults setenv DB DAEMON HOST bin hostname setenv ODB_am_wh usr apl cadds bin ODB_ SERVER setenv DB DAEMON 20000001 The DB_DAEMON_HOST system must be running the ODB_DAEMON process before using the cadds2pvs command on assemblies Remember to use the SHADE PICTURE command to generate _ td files for the components in your assembly F 10 EPD Visualizer User Guide CADDS Interface Reorienting Objects in Graphic ASCII Files Reorienting Objects in Graphic ASCII Files In some instances your CADDS model might involve viewing other parts with arbitrary orientations and locations without the
235. n Sets list 2 Click the Highlight button and the items in the selection set are highlighted Build Selection List You can build selection list that consist of items from Graphic Files Selection Sets Disciplines or Groups You can add any number of items to the selection list To build a selection list use the following steps 1 Select Select gt Build Selection List The Build Selection List dialog box displays Graphis ilex Seleclion Cale gories rGi_tutoral gal lt Craphle Mlles r Sileclian Srls ay Nlselplines ae Groupes electability Mask 4 Visible Only ay ddan Cink ae Wisible Dr Hidden i EEE Add la Selection Lisl Highligh Seleclion Chear Selvelion Lisl Kilosu Hulp EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 81 Using EPD Visualizer Menus Select Menu 2 Set the following options as necessary Selection Categories Click one of the following categories and a listing of that category displays to the left of the Selection Categories box Graphic Files All currently added graphic files Selection Sets All existing selection sets Disciplines All disciplines defined in the graphic files Groups All groups defined in the graphic files Highlight Selection Turn Highlight Selection on or off depending on whether you want to highlight items on the selection list To highlight items on the selection list click the button on Selectability Mask C
236. n a small panel in the middle of the screen and it reinitializes the tool You have to reselect the point to use it for another measuring distance operation Cross markers appear on the first point and on the point of the section point where the minimum distance occurs The distance between these points and the distances along the X Y and Z axes are displayed in the status window 7 24 EPD Visualizer User Guide Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Measuring Distance in Sections The following illustration shows a digitized point on a section upper and the point of minimal distance between it and a second section lower The cross marker on the second section indicates the point at which the minimum distance occurs Minimum Distance Between an Endpoint and a section You can use mini End amp Section to measure the minimum distance between an endpoint of a section and another section and to see where the minimum distance is reached With this tool you need to digitize a point and a section When you digitize the first point EPD Visualizer selects the nearest endpoint If there is no endpoint which is the case if the section is a closed polygon EPD Visualizer accepts the digitized point instead of an endpoint It uses the second digitized point to select the section associated with that point If you digitize the first and second points in the same section EPD Visualizer displays a warning messag
237. n of these axes is at the point XO YO Z0 of the 3D scene The specifications of local axes are relative to these axes Gpath A path that has a referential associated with each vertex The term comes from generalized path A Gpath can have a single vertex Hidden Line A rendering option that displays a solid view of the 3D scene with black polygon edges and lights off Item Geometry text lights paths and objects that is part of your 3D scene in EPD Visualizer Local Axes The local axes coordinate system is attached to the items on the selection list and rotates with the items The initial default condition of local axes is parallel to the project axes with their local origin at the geometric center of the selection list If the Use Local CPL button is selected in the Translate Rotate dialog box the local axes have a different condition explained in Translate Rotate on page 3 22 EPD Visualizer User Guide Glossary 3 Glossary Matrix Duplication A lighting feature that enables you to copy a selected light into a matrix of evenly spaced rows and columns This option works with all light types except directional Menu Bar The bar that displays across the top of the EPD Visualizer window containing the menu names Metafile An ASCII file that contains a complete description of a EPD Visualizer session This includes all geometric objects views view sequences lights paths color definitions annotati
238. nce slider scale Figure 9 2 Move Palette tea Vials Kdove Distance 10 Move Up 7 The Move Up tool enables you to move the 3D scene up relative to the coordinate system of the graphics window Move Down wy The Move Down tool enables you to move the 3D scene down relative to the coordinate system of the graphics window Move Left a The Move Left tool enables you to move the 3D scene left relative to the coordinate system of the graphics window EPD Visualizer User Guide 9 17 Palettes Walk Through Palettes Move Right gt The Move Right tool enables you to move the 3D scene right relative to the coordinate system of the graphics window Move Forward The Move Forward tool enables you to move the 3D scene forward relative to the coordinate system of the graphics window If you move beyond the camera target a new camera target is automatically set Move Back 4 The Move Back tool enables you to move the 3D scene back relative to the coordinate system of the graphics window Each time you click the button you move away from the 3D scene and more of the scene comes into view Move Distance Slider Scale Hove Dislanee Set the number of units the camera position moves in a linear 10 direction Dmm To customize the slider scale click your right mouse button on the slider scale value For more information on customizing the slider scale refer to Slider Scales on page 1 13 in C
239. ndent of the Gpath that includes it Some functions can use a reference to orient an object For example a referential defined by the three angles 45 0 30 is obtained by successively rotating the global referential around X 45 degrees and Z 30 degrees as the following figure demonstrates a Le Global referential Istrotanion 45 degrees around And rotation 30 degrees around X global axis amp global axis EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 29 Using EPD Visualizer Menus Edit Menu The Path Editor To delete a path or Gpath or to begin creating or editing a path or Gpath make selections in the Path Editor dialog box Select Edit gt Path Editor The Path Editor dialog box appears Path ditor Wears re oe Ge ele re nec ae plantrace z Iraj pin ced oc Hew Points The Path Editor dialog box presents the following selections e New References Click New References to create a Gpath The Path Router dialog box displays the more complex of its two forms which is discussed in the next section e New Points Click New Points to create a path The Path Router dialog box displays the simpler of its two forms which is discussed in the next section e Edit Select a path or Gpath in the scrolling list and click Edit to edit the selected path or Gpath The appropriate form of the Path Router dialog box appears The next section discusses the Path Router dialog box e Delete Select a path or Gpat
240. ne CVDPA_SPACING CVDPA_SPACING defines the distance between internal faces in zone definition EPD Visualizer User Guide H 11 Environment Variables Selecting Scrolling and Running a Report selecting Scrolling and Running a Report The following environment variables allow you to run a custom report on Select and Scroll PVS SELECT SCROLL REP Set the variable PVS_SELECT SCROLL REP in the explorer ini file to Y to enable you to run a custom report on Select and Scroll The default value is N CA_ENV_REPORT The variable CA_ENV_REPORT defines the custom report that is to be run This can be set in the following two ways e CA _ENV_REPORT LOOKUP lt number gt In this case the report is fetched from the lookup rep file The number is the number of the report to be run e CA _ENV_REPORT ACTION Report type t Tree data wanted t Program The report is fetched based on the action that you specify For details of Report type Tree data wanted Program refer to Action Number 6500 See Customizing EPD Connect for details H 12 EPD Visualizer User Guide Glossary This glossary includes general terms and terms specific to EPD Visualizer used in this manual and in online help 3D Scene A collection of objects including graphics text or lights that display in the EPD Visualizer graphics window Active Coordinate System The set of axes currently in control Ambie
241. ne to the path Figure 8 2 Orientation of the Sectioning Plane to the Path Translating and Rotating If you want to translate or rotate the sectioning plane without a selected object you must use the Sectioning Motion window If you attempt to translate or rotate the plane using item dynamics specifically by opening or using the Translate Rotate Selection List dialog box with an empty selection list EPD Visualizer displays the following error message The selection list is empty EPD Visualizer User Guide 8 5 Moving a Plane Setting Plane Dynamics Moving the Plane with Objects Selected When the sectioning plane is dynamic and objects are selected the plane attaches rigidly to the selection list and moving the list moves the plane As with a plane that is not attached to objects EPD Visualizer uses the active sectioning parameters to refresh the scene and the Section window You can use the Sectioning Motion dialog box to change the plane position relative to the selected objects This is particularly useful for adjusting the starting position and starting orientation Positioning the plane precisely on the selection before moving them is possible with the feature discussed in Moving the Plane to the Selection List on page 8 10 Selecting Item Dynamics from the Edit menu allows you to move a sectioning plane in conjunction with the selection list to which it is rigidly linked by specifying the plane s mo
242. nerated by a variety of CAD systems You can enter the CAD models visually and traverse paths through them You can record animated movies as you move through the models and play them back later EPD Visualizer can simulate virtual walk throughs of 3D scenes such as power or process plants offshore platforms and ships manufacturing and office facilities and civil sites These 3D scenes can be accented with lights and specific material surfaces such as chrome to create shadows and reflection for greater realism EPD Visualizer can also access the Database Management System DBMS for live engineering data through the SQL interface EPD Visualizer lets you analyze of complex models through sectioning interference checking and path traversal You can export some EPD Visualizer sections and other results to CAD systems You can examine expansive and equally complex 3D scenes of jets automobiles or engine assemblies for the inspection of the complete assembly subassemblies and individual components In addition you can simulate high quality presentations with clarity detail and graphics performance with the compatible Hewlett Packard HP Sun Silicon Graphics Digital and IBM workstations to assess aesthetics clearances construction or manufacturing requirements and overall site conditions In a matter of minutes you can easily transfer information from many CAD lines to EPD Visualizer for on screen viewing Models from DIMENSION
243. nformation The Verify tool displays object data that is retrieved from the connecting DBMS in the Object Verification dialog The Visualizer DBMS interface requires that you construct several tables Once these tables are constructed you can retrieve an SQL query statement This statement is used to retrieve specific verification data for the digitized object Verification Tables There are four tables required by the interface e PVS_ OBJECT See Table A 1 on page A 12 PVS_QUERY See Table A 2 on page A 12 e PVS_ QUERY MODE See Table A 3 on page A 13 e PVS_ SQL STMT See Table A 4 on page A 13 The first table is called the PVS_OBJECT table This table contains the following fields e OBJECT ID Object identification that corresponds to the object id attribute in Visualizer FILE NAME Graphics file name where object resides e OBJECT_TYPE A specific type of an object for example valve pipe steel This field can be NULL A null object type indicates that it is not needed when searching for a query statement EPD Visualizer User Guide A 11 Database Interface DBMS SQL Interface Below is an example of this table Table A 1 Sample PVS_OBJECT table OBJECT_ID FILE_NAME OBJECT_TYPE 12345678 plant valve 12345679 plant valve 12345680 plant pipe 12345681 plant pipe 12345682 plant lt NULL gt The second table is called PVS_ QUERY This table contains the fo
244. ng system level for example there might be a protection problem Notify your System Administrator for assistance e Error in removing binary polygon file A problem exists at the operating system level for example there might be a protection problem Notify your System Administrator for assistance EPD Visualizer User Guide E 7 Appendix F CAD DS Interface With the CADDS interface you can display CADDS 5 and CADDS4x parts or assemblies in EPD Visualizer With this interface you can process CADDS parts or assemblies transfer the files then review them with EPD Visualizer The CADDS interface also provides a command for rotating or translating information You can use the CADDS interface at the UNIX level on the HP Silicon Graphics and Sun systems The following topics are discussed in this appendix e Introduction e Using the CADDS Interface e Reorienting Objects in Graphic ASCII Files Please note This interface is distributed only with CADDS systems EPD Visualizer User Guide F 1 CADDS Interface Introduction Introduction The CADDS interface cadds2pvs converts tessellation data from CADDS 5 and CADDS4x parts or assemblies into graphic ASCII files or graphic binary files It accepts two styles of input You can provide a CADDS part name for cadds2pvs or you can use the command as a filter by piping CADDS tessellation data into it Output can go to standard error or you can redirect it to a file Message
245. nge to the directory containing the CADDS part by entering cd users joe parts demo equipment 2 Enter the interface command and options as the following example shows cadds2pvs gt gaf To avoid confusion when you move the gaf file to another directory you can create a symbolic link as the following example shows ln s users joe parts pvsdemo equipment gaf usr pvsdemo equipment gaf EPD Visualizer User Guide F 5 CADDS Interface Using the CADDS Interface Restrictions The following restrictions apply when using the cadds2pvs interface If standard input is used you can supply the contents of only one _ td file When colors for layers are unavailable because the _ pd is to be ignored or SELECT LDISCRIMINATION was never performed then colors are assigned by the following formula color layer modulo 64 1 If some surfaces are not treated as backfaces turn off the EPD Visualizer option View gt Rendering Backfacing Polygons If your graphic ASCII file was produced with the help of a _pd file then this should be considered a bug and you should report it If the model was designed in Parametric Mode then use the CHANGE ENTITY command in CADDS to convert entities to explicit This action permits cadds2pvs to read surface normal flags to improve the results of surface culling in EPD Visualizer Remember to follow the PACK DBASE and SORT DBASE commands with the SHADE PICTURE command to update the
246. nits mils inches feet default yards miles millimeters centimeters meters decimeters kilometers v Tolerance for flat or shell polygon vertices which should be identical The default is 0 01 See the t option w Formats the output with extra white space CADDSpart Path name of your CADDS part directory Alternatively it might be the name of an assembly created by Assembly Design You can supply more than one F 4 EPD Visualizer User Guide CADDS Interface Using the CADDS Interface Examples The following is an example of the basic use of the cadds2pvs interface under UNIX 1 Change to the directory containing the CADDS part by entering cd directory_path_name For example cd users joe parts demo equipment 2 List the directory contents by entering ls The following is a sample of the directory contents _pd td drawing1 3 Enter the interface command and options as the following example shows cadds2pvs o equipment gaf cadds2pvs reads the _tdand_pd files in the directory and generates a file named equipment gaf in the demo directory If you want to have the graphic ASCII file reside in the CADDS part directory follow the steps in this example 1 Change to the directory containing the CADDS part by entering cd users joe parts demo equipment 2 Enter the interface command and options as follows cadds2pvs o gaf For standard output follow the steps in this example 1 Cha
247. nt Light A diffuse background lighting radiating from all directions Ambient light applies to all planar geometry in the 3D scene You can set the brightness of the light or turn the ambient light on or off Back Facing Polygons A rendering option that controls the display of back facing polygons When Back Facing Polygons is on back facing polygons are removed Turning this option on might increase the rendering speed of your 3D scene The Back Facing Polygons option is beneficial when objects in your 3D scene are closed polyhedrons Likewise open polyhedrons are displayed with back facing polygons missing when viewing through open areas Binary Graphic File An encoded file containing the definitions of geometric objects and colors in EPD Visualizer binary format This file cannot be edited or viewed as readable text and is generated by software on your host CAD system EPD Visualizer User Guide Glossary Glossary Binary files usually are assigned a gbf extension These files are extremely compact and can be processed many times faster than Textual Graphic Files Buffering See Double Buffering on page Glosssary 2 and Single Buffering on page Glosssary 6 Click Press and release a mouse button Context Sensitive Help Access online help by selecting a specific menu name button tool or slider scale Database Management System A computer program for general purpose data storage and retrieval
248. o display the previous position on the path Verify the Path Name To verify the name of a path pick up the Select Path tool and select the path in the 3D scene The name is highlighted in the Path Name list Blend Colors If camera traversal is done with the Time Delay method and the Movie Recorder is turned on movie color blending is done automatically If the traversal is canceled you have the option to continue with the blending EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 69 Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu Color blending averages the colors used in the movie frames and creates a new color table containing 256 of the most used and averaged colors It will rewrite the movie frames to use this new color table Please note You must blend the colors of the movie files before you can view them with the Movie Player Color blending could take several minutes depending on the size of the file and the length of the movie To blend colors for a movie use the following steps 1 Click Blend and a dialog box displays the following message Movie frame color blending is in progress 2 Click Close when color blending is complete Movie Recorder Use this option to capture sequences of images to disk files during object and camera traversals The purpose of recording images is to enable you to view these sequences at a much higher speed than real time rendering With a movie player you can view image files with CV Animator pvsmovie o
249. of the sections to determine the endpoints is the gap value you enter in the Sectioning Save dialog box The default value is 0 1 The most appropriate tolerance is the tessellation tolerance or a tolerance a little greater than that For more information refer to Considerations on page 7 27 For information about the Sectioning Save dialog box refer to Saving a Section on page 7 29 As with the other measuring tools this tool remains active until you select another tool The markers remain until you select another tool or start a new measure The following illustration shows two endpoints of the same section EPD Visualizer User Guide 7 23 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Measuring Distance in Sections The following illustration shows endpoints of two different sections Minimum Distance Between a Point and a Section You can use mini Point amp Section to measure the minimum distance between any point of a section and another section and to see where the minimum distance is reached With this tool you need to digitize a point and a section EPD Visualizer accepts the first digitized point as is It uses the second digitized point to select the section associated with the point For the first point you can digitize vertices as well as points between two vertices of a segment If you digitize the first and second points in the same section EPD Visualizer displays a warning message i
250. oming in for a closer look e Controlling the location of the camera and its ultimate target e Using context sensitive online help to obtain the assistance for each button tool menu or dialog box as well as quick reference help on the palettes e Translating rotating hiding or deleting items for a better view of your 3D scene or other surrounding items e Creating lighting to add dimension and realism to the 3D scene e Selecting rendering features to visualize different finishes such as matte or mirrored radiosity ray tracing and shadowing for realistic evaluations Advanced Rendering Module This manual documents the advanced rendering features radiosity and ray tracing If you have not purchased the advanced module the items on the menus are grayed out however the basic rendering features are available 1 4 EPD Visualizer User Guide Introduction to EPD Visualizer Basic Concepts Basic Concepts This section provides the basic concepts you need to understand EPD Visualizer e System Overview e Neutral Graphic Files e Metafiles e 3D Viewing While using EPD Visualizer refer to this section for an explanation of how EPD Visualizer works The glossary provides descriptions of terms used in EPD Visualizer system Overview EPD Visualizer is designed so you can merge information from several CAD systems for simultaneous display of a complete 3D scene You can process DIMENSION III CADDS MEDUSA
251. on and control settings such as working units and slider scale settings Mirror Reflectance A surface materials option that determines how much light a material reflects Wood for example is not reflective whereas chrome is highly reflective Movie A sequence of image files that are displayed at a specific speed to simulate animation Movie File An ASCII file that contains information about a movie The information includes image type and start and end frame number Object The design geometry that you import to EPD Visualizer from your CAD system Path A sequence of line segments consisting of any number of points along which you can traverse the camera or objects Point Move the pointer until it rests on the item of choice Glossary 4 EPD Visualizer User Guide Glossary Point Light A point light is like a tiny light bulb It occupies one point and radiates light equally in all directions in your 3D scene Primary View A view that you can return to if you become disoriented while moving through your 3D scene The initial primary view is defined when you add your first graphics file The primary view is saved with a metafile and is later restored when you open a metafile Project Axes The axes whose orientation is always represented in the lower left corner of the Graphics Window also called Global Axes The origin of these axes is at the point XO YO Z0 of the 3D scene The specifications of local a
252. on the axes recover their initial colors and EPD Visualizer resumes its current operation The scene as it appears before and after you move the camera is show below Before Aer EPD Visualizer User Guide 1 27 Introduction to EPD Visualizer Permanent Mouse Dynamics Quick View Centering Quick view centering allows you to quickly center the view on a point in the viewing area It allows you to center a view more quickly and accurately than by using screen axis translations This centering is only available when no tool is active such as at startup or when a tool has been deactivated You center a view by clicking the left mouse button on a point in the viewing area even on a point where there is no geometry By digitizing the point you to set the current camera target called the orbit point to center all camera rotations The digitized point flashes rapidly and the scene is centered on it You set the digitized point as the new orbit point in a way similar to the Set Camera Target tool available in the Tool Palette For information about the Set Camera Target tool refer to Chapter 9 Palettes Considerations Some restrictions and limitations that apply to permanent mouse dynamics are the following e To explicitly set the orbit point you must first exit an active tool e Whenever axis display is disabled it is automatically enabled when you begin model axis motions to allow axis selection e The direction
253. on again If you select Radiosity as the rendering method to set the appropriate options click the Radiosity Controls button Refer to Radiosity Controls on page 3 50 for more information Please note Radiosity does not handle specular lighting and cannot display specular highlights reflections or refraction e Ray Trace Display reflections and refractions in the 3D scene Ray tracing shows reflections mirroring transparency and refraction Ray tracing produces transient pixel based images Therefore you might want to keep window sizes small to reduce the amount of time it takes to generate the ray traced image If you select Ray Trace as the rendering method to set the appropriate options click the Ray Trace Controls button Refer to Ray Trace Controls on page 3 48 for more information Please note Ray tracing does not handle matte or diffusely reflecting surfaces Back Facing Polygons e Display Polygons facing the back that you cannot normally see are included in the display e Remove Polygons facing the back that you cannot normally see are removed from the display Please note Removing back facing polygons works well when the objects are completely closed However if objects contain holes or openings the back facing polygons that you ordinarily see through the openings are invisible Display Buffering e Single Each item displays in the graphics window as it is rendered e Double
254. or concave polygons Check each flat polygon for concavity and set proper flags to ensure the correct display This option is not needed for EPD Visualizer running on HP IBM and Digital On the SGI and UltraSPARC this option should be set when the input data contains concave polygons By default this option is set for the SGI but not set for the HP IBM Digital and Sun When this option is selected and the environment variable PVS_CONCAVE_PERFORM is set to a non null value concave polygons are converted into a set of triangles After conversion the image is stored in RAM which improves performance but may be limited by RAM limitations If the image is not converted updating the screen may require more time but the image is not stored in RAM 3 Double click a file name in the Files list or enter a file name in the Selection box and click Add Refer to the File Selection Dialog Box on page 1 17 for more information on using the filter option 3 6 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus File Menu Removing Graphic Files You can remove textual or binary graphic files from the metafile This action removes all geometry associated with the removed files To remove a graphic file perform the following actions 1 Select File gt Remove Graphics The following figure shows the Graphic File Removal dialog box Loaded Sraphic Files rK_tutariall gat Close Remove Help 2 Click the file na
255. ote text box EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 61 Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu To edit a note select the view name and edit the text View Sequence After you define views you can organize them into view sequences for subsequent review or presentation You can then play back the view sequence either interactively or by time delay Editor To define a view sequence with the View Editor use the following steps 1 Select View gt View Sequence gt Editor The View Sequence Editor dialog box displays WIC SCQUC mc cs Hew N ara Edit Hune f Dcletc view She l Hima O f j Adda A 1 Click New and a text box displays 2 Enter a name in the text box 3 Click OK to save the name The name displays in the View Sequence list and the existing views display in the View List 4 Select the view name in the View List and click the Left Arrow button to move views from the View List to the Member Views list 5 Click Apply to save your changes gi To display a view select a view name and click the View button 3 62 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu To display a note for a view select a view name and click the Note button to the right of the view button The note displays in the View Note dialog box To rearrange the views use the following steps 1 Click the View Sequence name you want to rearrange 2 Select the view in the Member
256. otion dialog box 8 2 Selectability mask setting 3 82 Selection copying to secondary selection 3 82 Selection list adding to 2 9 3 82 building 2 9 2 10 3 79 3 81 clearing 2 9 purpose 2 9 rotating 3 24 Selection mask purpose 2 9 3 79 setting 2 9 Selection set creating 3 79 defining 2 10 3 80 description 3 80 editing name 3 80 highlighting 3 81 Index 6 EPD Visualizer User Guide Index purpose 2 10 Session obtaining information about 1 30 3 12 Shadows setting controls for 3 48 Showing 2 13 3 14 Slider scales Color Composition 1 19 customizing 9 22 location of 1 11 1 13 Move Distance 9 18 Turn Angle 3 20 Turn Orbit Angle 9 22 Smooth shading description 2 2 Spot light defining 3 56 definition attributes B 9 description 2 5 3 52 SQL interface environment setup A 16 purpose A 1 A 11 required tables A 11 SQL query statement creating 3 90 selecting from DBMS 3 92 selecting from file 3 91 Static interference checking purpose 2 21 Status window 1 11 Substitution variable defining 3 89 description 3 90 editing 3 89 purpose 3 88 Surfaces assigning material properties 3 35 1 Tags attaching to objects 2 22 Target choosing 2 15 Tessellation data converting F 8 creating F 2 Text attaching to objects 2 22 changing properties 9 13 creating 2 22 defining properties 2 22 deleting 2 22 editing 2 22 9 12 entering 9 12 tagging with 2 15 Text properties changing 9 13 defining 2 22 setting
257. ou use the filter Otherwise this text box is empty EPD Visualizer User Guide 1 17 Introduction to EPD Visualizer Using the EPD Visualizer Window Use the following steps for the Filter button 1 Enter a path name with or without wild card symbols in the Filter text box to display a specific list of directory or file names 2 Click Filter The existing directories or files in the path name you entered are displayed For example to display other directories and all of the files contained in the directory Samples list filter the following path name HP Drawing Samples To display all the files with a gaf extension in the Samples directory filter the following path name with the wild card symbol and extension HP Drawing Samples gaf To select from the Directories list double click the appropriate directory name and the names of any files in that directory are displayed in the Files list To select from the Files list double click the appropriate file name and the name is displayed in the Selection text box Use the following steps for the Selection text box 1 Enter the directory and or file name 2 Click OK Add Save or Open Slider Scale Refer to Slider Scales on page 1 13 for more information EPD Visualizer User Guide Introduction to EPD Visualizer Color Editor Color Editor The Color Editor enables you to specify new colors for planar surfaces the graphics window sec
258. p Yule p do High Value Dreimal Places 1000 o Caneel Help EPD Visualizer User Guide 7 3 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Displaying the Plane setting the Display Characteristics You can specify the plane s display characteristics using the options described in the following table Option Description Boundary Displays the plane as a simple contour on top of the scene With this option enabled and with clipping and sectioning disabled you can move the plane without refreshing the display thus avoiding unwanted redisplays of the screen Opaque Displays the plane as a rectangular opaque surface on top of the scene without refreshing the entire scene The appearance of the objects returns to normal after the next redisplay With this option enabled any change causes the scene or a portion of the scene to be refreshed Transparent Displays the plane as a transparent coefficient 0 6 rectangular surface With this option enabled any change causes the scene or a portion of the scene to be refreshed Defining the Color You can use the color editor to define the color when you have set the display characteristics to opaque or transparent When you use the color editor the new color appears only if there is a change to the plane s display For information about the color editor refer to Color Editor on page 1 19 7 4 EPD Visualizer User Guide Con
259. paper size The image is scaled to the paper size you select 4 Select the orientation of the page The options are shown below Portrait Land sc ape 5 To save the file click Write PostScript and then Close You can print the file from the operating system The file that prints is a temporary file usr tmp sectionoutput tmp that is automatically deleted after printing By default the lpr command prints the file but you can specify a different command for PostScript files by defining the PVS_PRINT_COMMAND environment variable You give the variable the value of an executable file such as a binary or script no additional argument for the command EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 11 Using EPD Visualizer Menus File Menu is allowed For example the following line changes the default print command for PostScript files to 1p setenv PVS_ PRINT COMMAND usr bin 1lp To print the contents of the section window you perform the following actions 1 Set the options Paper Size If one of the standard paper formats is selected the contents of the section window will be automatically scaled to fit the paper size with adjustment for the orientation Orientation Select Landscape or Portrait 2 Press the Print PostScript button Obtaining Session Information To obtain specific information about the graphics in your 3D scene and your workstation graphic capabilities select File gt Session Information to display t
260. pported for EPD Visualizer but information about it is included here for users who want to evaluate and test the product for use with EPD Visualizer setting Up Spaceball You must complete the following steps before using Spaceball with EPD Visualizer 1 Attach Spaceball to an RS232 port on the back of the workstation 2 Connect the A C adapter to the Spaceball cable and plug the power supply into an A C outlet The Spaceball should beep twice 3 Create a symbolic link called dev spacebal11 by logging in as root and entering the following In s device_file dev spaceball Where device_file is the name of the device file for the serial port where Spaceball is connected such as dev tty00 For detailed instructions for each workstation manufacturer please refer to your Spaceball Manual 4 Start the Spaceball daemon located in the usr apl1 CVpvs bin directory by entering the following cd VIS_HOME bin sballd_XCM amp For IRIX 6 5 AIX 4 2 1 and OSF 3 2c use the following cd VIS_HOME bin sballd_XCM GLE amp The Spaceball beeps twice if all is well spaceball Button Summary e Button 1 Turns rotations on For Object Edit mode toggles translations on or off e Button 2 Turns translations on For Object Edit mode toggles rotations on or off e Button 4 Turns Camera mode on If you are already in Camera mode it toggles between Camera Orbit and Camera Walk Through modes e Button
261. process before construction or fabrication begins Interference checking allows you to do the following Perform static and dynamic interference checking Color and highlight colliding components Check components against a selection Analyze and display colliding components Review the results Generate reports of the results These topics are described in detail in the following sections 5 2 EPD Visualizer User Guide Interference Checking Starting Interference Checking starting Interference Checking To start your interference check first set up your session according to the guidelines described in the next section then select the Check Now option During the detection process a beep indicates that interferences have been detected When the checking is completed the components that were checked are displayed in red or green to indicate the detection results Also the number of interferences is displayed in the status window EPD Visualizer User Guide 5 3 Interference Checking Setting Up an Interference Checking Session setting Up an Interference Checking Session To set up your interference checking session select Interference gt Control from the EPD Visualizer window The Interference Checking Control window appears __Interference Checking Control _ W Color Mode _ Selection Blue z Clear Colors M Transparent Options Selection against Analyze Output _ Selection Graphic File _ Se
262. r Guide Set Camera Position and Target 9 7 Measure Distance from Camera to Item 9 8 Measure Distance Between Items 9 8 Mouse Viewing 9 9 Deselect 9 12 Text 9 12 Object Tagging 9 13 Manually Tag Objects 9 13 Automatically Tag Objects 9 13 Walk Through Palettes 9 15 Move Palette 9 16 Move Up 9 17 Move Down 9 17 Move Left 9 17 Move Right 9 18 Move Forward 9 18 Move Back 9 18 Move Distance Slider Scale 9 18 Turn Orbit Palette 9 19 Orbit Left 9 20 Orbit Right 9 20 Orbit Over 9 20 Orbit Under 9 20 Turn Right 9 20 Turn Left 9 21 Look Up 9 21 Look Down 9 21 Level Off to Camera Position 9 21 Level Off to Camera Target 9 21 Turn Orbit Angle Slider Scale 9 22 Spaceball 9 23 Setting Up Spaceball 9 23 Spaceball Button Summary 9 23 Using the Sepaceball with EPD Visualizer 9 24 Camera Mode 9 24 Object Edit Mode 9 24 EPD Visualizer User Guide Contents xv Database Interface Creating an ASCII Database Example of a Database Definition File Structure of Database Definition File DEFINE_DB_FILE Section DEFINE_REQUIRED_FIELDS Section OBJECT_ID FOR DIMENSION III Items Objects DEFINE_OBJECT Section DBMS SQL Interface Verification Tables Verification Procedures Automatic Tag Tool Environment Setup On all Hosts On Hosts Running Oracle On Hosts Running V
263. r Guide Constructing Zones Creating Your Zone Definition To create a box zone select Box from the Zone Definition menu The Zone Box Creation window appears mee Lhe C1 ean First Mint o K ype y 7 Cernicrs A adis si Pichi tive se Selection Let Ole Second Palt Tranapanncy Opayne Clear Ligitize Closer Arpt Clear He ljr The options available in the Zone Box Creation window are described in the following table Option Description Name Name of the zone This name is stored in the directory defined by the CVDPA_ZONES_DIR environment variable Type Corners Radius Type of box you want to create Selection List Corners is a two point definition Radius is one point and an inscribed sphere radius Selection List requires a previously created selection The box encloses all objects in the selection list Offset Offset value for the external faces Transparency Transparency value for the external faces First Point Coordinates for the first point Corners type only Second Point Coordinates for the second point Corners type only You can enter explicit numerical values for the first and second points in the window s text boxes or specify them by digitizing an existing object EPD Visualizer User Guide 4 5 Constructing Zones Creating Your Zone Definition The buttons at the bottom of the Zone Box Creation window are described in
264. r Textual Graphic File Color Definitions Color Definitions The color definition section is identified by the key word COLORS This section is used to define colors that you can use when defining the color of items in EPD Visualizer Each color defined in the colors section must be given a unique name Color intensity is defined using three floating point values that represent red green and blue intensities RGB in that order Valid RGB values range from 0 0 to 1 0 where 1 0 represents the highest intensity allowable You can define any number of colors within the limits of the color table on your workstation The following example shows the format for defining colors COLORS red green blue cyan gray black white END BH O OOG OOH 003 O1 00 Ol 50 00 OLA EPD Visualizer User Guide B 7 EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File Light Definitions Light Definitions There are three types of lights directional point and spot Directional lights are defined in a section identified by the key words DIRECTIONAL_LIGHT Point lights are defined in a section identified by the key words POINT_LIGHT Spot lights are defined in a section identified by the key words SPOT_LIGHT You can define any number of lights in a graphic file Each light must have a unique name The following tables show the key words allowable values and settings and defaults for the light definition attributes
265. r any other desktop movie viewer that can read TIF RGB and Sun Raster files All recorded movie images have the extensions tif rgb or ras and all the movie files have the extension mv The Movie Recorder dialog box contains components that let you define specific features of a movie Please note On Sun platforms running xg1 do not allow any window or menu to occlude the EPD Visualizer window while performing the capture operation Otherwise the output raster file will not be created properly 3 70 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu To Define Movie Features use the following steps 1 Select View gt Movie Recorder The Movie Recorder dialog box displays Howie Girechume Hamne I Recorder Color Space 9 brain Sbe Ferla aw Cn a Crin v UU x Jz o w ara PE ss dri Sa ellena sad x dO Movie urinal v dEl x Gl VWisuiedicer Howie TI wAn Adie w Silicon Graphics HGH Curel r SLI Palco ysteins Ha Cancel 2 Enter a movie directory any valid directory name in the Movie Directory Name text box 3 Set the following options as necessary Recorder Turns recording on or off When on the image frames are recorded to the movie directory during object and camera traversals Color Space e Color Record movie in full color e Gray Record movie in gray scale e Stereo Produce stereoscopic animations for viewing through special 3D glasses Outpu
266. r example if the selection is the contents of a graphic file components belonging to the graphic file are not checked against each other Please note With this type of selection the red color of the colliding components may run together causing some difficulty in viewing the results 5 6 EPD Visualizer User Guide Interference Checking Setting Up an Interference Checking Session e Selection 2 This checks all components in the secondary selection except those belonging to the selection against the selection This option is not available if the secondary selection is empty e All Visible This checks all visible components except those belonging to the selection against the selection Creating Secondary Selections A secondary selection gives you flexibility in the way you apply your current selection during an interference check You create a secondary selection by copying the current selection to it To do this select Select gt Copy Sel gt Sel 2 from the EPD Visualizer window This copies the current selection to the secondary selection automatically clearing any previously copied secondary set The secondary selection remains visible and colored in yellow as long as it contains at least one component To clear the secondary selection select Select gt Clear Selection 2 setting Analysis Options During interference checking a colliding component appears in red This procedure is automatically enabled How
267. r offset and transparency values appear Se Wes reat lype y Carnea az Mailius Selection List Ose 1 0 lrahsparency pague Clear m Close Apply Clem Hiclp Creating a Cylinder Zone A cylinder zone is a three dimensional cylindrical volume filled with parallel faces spaced according to the value defined into CVDPA_SPACING variable A cylinder zone has base and top faces centered in points that you specify as well as an axis along the line defined by the two points The circular inner and outer shapes are tessellated with a number of 20 points This value is set with the CVDPA_SPACING variable You offset and display the external faces of the cylinder by specifying an offset value and a transparency value The internal faces are defined in two directions along the cylinder axis and normal to the axis itself and along the cylinder radius Depending on the outer inner radius and the start end angle you specify your cylinder can have a cylindrical wedge or tubular shape EPD Visualizer User Guide 4 7 Constructing Zones Creating Your Zone Definition To create a cylinder zone select Cylinder from the Zone Definition menu The Zone Cylinder Creation window appears Se Hame Base Center e Hadis Migihrr Base Finis Transparency papie l O p Migilirt Close App Clear Help The options available in the Zone Cylinder Creation window are described in the followin
268. r the user tester are stored in the file tester cfg in the directory specified by CVDPA_CONFIG_DIR If the variable is defined the dialog boxes display at the beginning of each session in the locations selected by each user with the following behavior configured by permissions e Ifthe cfg file has read and write permissions open the file stores new and altered dialog box positions e Ifthe cfg file has only read permission open the file cannot store new or altered dialog box positions and presents the same positions HOOPS_PICTURE HOOPS_PICTURE defines the Hoops driver used for display for example x11 xgl See help on release in the Help menu for more information H 2 EPD Visualizer User Guide Environment Variables General Behavior PVS_ORTHO_MODE PVS_ORTHO_MODE controls the default perspective mode The mode is orthographic if PVS_ORTHO_MODE is defined and its value is not equal to 0 The mode is perspective if PVS_ORTHO_MODE is not defined or its value is equal to 0 The perspective mode specified by PVS_ORTHO_MODE is automatically set when EPD Visualizer starts and at the beginning of every new session See Changing Views on page 3 43 PVS_SECOND_VIEW_SIZE PVS_SECOND_VIEW_SIZE defines the size of secondary views in relation to the main view for example setenv PVS SECOND VIEW SIZE 0 3 PVS_STEREO PVS_STEREO If defined and not set to 0 allows HOOPS to use stereo mode See help on releas
269. ra You can perform the following operations using the walk through buttons and slider scales e Move in a linear direction by a specific number of units e Move in an angular direction by a specific number of degrees e Level the camera position or camera target to a horizontal plane You can control the rendering of the 3D scene while you use the walk through buttons The following describes these methods e To move the camera rapidly through the 3D scene without waiting for a complete rendering of all graphics click any of the walk through buttons before the 3D scene completely displays e To suppress the rendering of the 3D scene while using any of the walk through buttons hold down the Shift key while clicking the mouse button e To change the Move Distance or Turn Orbit Angle during rendering of the 3D scene click the slider scales The selection in the Target area of the User Preferences dialog box determines the effect of four walk though palettes tools identified in the following figure The four tools move either the camera or the scene depending on your selection in the Target area of the User Preferences dialog box You display the User Preferences dialog box by selecting Options gt Preferences The selections in the Target area of the User Preferences dialog box are the following e Camera Pressing the Camera button specifies that the four walk though palettes selections with definable focus move the camera For exampl
270. ranslate Rotate Selection List dialog box and Build Selection List dialog box If you turn one of these switches on or off all of the switches are affected EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 83 Using EPD Visualizer Menus Database Menu Database Menu The Visualizer release 1 1 1 has an SQL interface that lets you connect to the Oracle Database Management System DBMS in addition to opening an ASCII database file You connect and disconnect from the DBMS through the Database menu Only one DBMS or ASCII file can be active at any time You can use a database for the following purposes Obtain an object s engineering data with the Verify tool Tag an object with the tag stored in the database file by selecting Database gt Tagging gt Automatic and then the Object Tagging tool Send SQL statements to edit or select data from DBMS tables Objects selected from the DBMS can be highlighted zoomed or added to the selection list The following menu items are available within the Database menu Connect Open an ASCII database file or connect to a DBMS Disconnect Close an ASCII database file or disconnect from a DBMS Query Types Specify the type of data to be retrieved Selection Keys Define key field names for object selection Substitution Variables Define substitution variables used in query statements Query Database Send an SQL statement to the connecting DBMS for selecting data Tagging Set object ta
271. raphics developed from the Section window by making selections in the Section Output window You display the Section Output window by selecting Output gt Section Output in the Section window sector Output Paper Sit Orientation f WS Letter B54 11 n f i Landscape US begal AG 3 17 IA _ 2D artralt z cH A117 in BS af Aad nin Ag HIONZIS mm AS a7 eazommy o PINE HPGL F 0 XS mm Print Postaeript CAD MeL DT rin Wilriles ICa i Blucken section radd caption E Write Poslaeripl t Cirtput Tide Chose Help 3 To write the contents of the Section window as a file you perform the following actions 1 Set the options e Paper Size If one of the standard paper formats is selected the contents of the Section window will be automatically scaled to fit the paper size and to adjust for the orientation Selecting Scale 1 x and entering a scale value in the adjacent field adjusts the size of the graphic that prints The choice of an inappropriate scale may cause some graphics to disappear e Orientation Select Landscape or Portrait e Blacken Section Selecting this makes the section print black Clearing it specifies the colors in the Section window The names of sectioned objects are the same colors as the sections 7 36 EPD Visualizer User Guide Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Section Window Graphics Output e Add Caption Selecting this makes a l
272. re prompted for the viewfile name with the following Enter viewfile name You can enter either an entire path name or the viewfile name or you can press Return to exit the interface After you enter the viewfile name with or without the vf extension press Return If you do not use the vf extension it is automatically appended to the end of the viewfile name You are prompted with the following Menu 1 Specify file type to generate 1 ASCII file 2 binary file 3 both file types Enter 1 2 or 3 After you select an option press Return and you are prompted with the following Menu 2 Specify unit type 1 mils 2 inches 3 feet 4 yards 5 miles 6 millimeters EPD Visualizer User Guide E 3 DIMENSION III Interface Generating Graphic Files 7 centimeters 8 decimeters 9 meters 10 kilometers Enter number for unit type After you select an option press Return The following message displays Generating graphic file s After the graphic files are generated the following message displays Graphic files are successfully generated If you selected option 1 on Menu 1 an ASCII graphic file is generated The new graphic file name is the same as the viewfile name appended with a gaf extension If you selected option 2 on Menu 1 a binary graphic file is generated The new graphic file name is the same as the viewfile name appended with a gbf extension If you selected option 3
273. res are easily accessed through menu options Specific capabilities include e Static and dynamic interference checking e Coloring and highlighting colliding components e Reviewing the results e Generating reports of the results Static and dynamic interference checking are described in the following sections Refer to Chapter 5 Interference Checking for additional information about interference checking static Interference Checking Static interference checking allows you to manually check for interferences between stationary components belonging to the current selection and the surrounding three dimensional scene You can perform a static interference check by selecting components in your scene and performing interference checking as described in Setting Up an Interference Checking Session on page 5 4 Dynamic Interference Checking Dynamic interference checking allows you to automatically check for interferences during item editing and item traversal During item editing interferences are automatically detected and highlighted for each translation or rotation operation During item traversal interferences are detected and highlighted at each step position along the traversal path All positions implying interference are recorded in a new Gpath so that you can reproduce them You can specify that the first interference stops the item traversal and whether or not the traversing item remains at its last position You can enab
274. rial surface Shiny Results in a shiny material surface e Specular Glare Use the Specular Glare scale to control the degree of focus of specular highlights shiny spots of a material High Results in a material with highly focused specular highlights Low Results in a material with broad specular highlights 4 Click Accept to save your material definitions To assign material definition to an object use the following steps 1 Click a material definition from the Material Properties list in the Material Selection dialog box 2 Pick up the Select tool from the palette and select the object s with planar surfaces 3 Click Apply to assign the material to the object s To select material pick up the Select tool from the palette and select an object to retrieve its material If the object you select has material assigned to it the definition for that material is highlighted in the Material Properties box EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 37 Using EPD Visualizer Menus Edit Menu To edit a material definition use the following steps 1 Select the material 2 Click Edit 3 Edit the settings as needed 4 Click Accept to save your changes To delete a material use the following steps 1 Click the material name in the Material Properties list 2 Click Delete and the material is removed from the Material Properties list and temporarily stored To restore deleted material click Undo Delete to restore the m
275. ribes how to use each menu in the order they appear on the menu bar For information on menu basics refer to Chapter 1 Introduction to EPD Visualizer e EPD Visualizer Main Menus e File Menu e Edit Menu e View Menu e Options Menu e Tools Menu e Select Menu e Database Menu e Interference Checking Menu e Sectioning Menu e Online Help Menu EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 1 Using EPD Visualizer Menus EPD Visualizer Main Menus EPD Visualizer Main Menus The following figure shows the menu bar located at the top of the EPD Visualizer window Mew Options tools Select Gatebase 0 Intenierence Sectioning The following briefly describes the menus on the menu bar File Manage graphic files and metafiles start and stop sessions and print screens Edit Edit items and text properties and manage the display of items View Show primary view save and playback views traverse the camera along paths and manage lights rendering and display controls Options Customize working environment Tools Use Tool Palette functions and Interact with the product structure tree Select Manage selection of items Database Access a database and set object tagging Interference Perform interference checking review the interferences and generate reports Sectioning Scan an assembly by defining and moving a plane Help Access online help 3 2 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Vi
276. right of the text The default is CC center center EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 39 Using EPD Visualizer Menus Edit Menu e Color Editor Set the text color To use the Color Editor refer to the Color Editor on page 1 19 e Character Spacing Set the amount of space between each character with the Character Spacing slider scale A spacing value of 1 0 means that the normal spacing for the selected text is used A value of 2 0 results in two times the normal spacing A spacing value of 0 0 causes the letters to stack on top of each other The default value is 1 0 e Angle Degrees Set the Angle slider scale to define the direction and angle of text The default is zero Text with an angle of zero displays as follows TEXT Text with an angle of 45 degrees displays as follows T E X T Text with an angle of 45 degrees displays as follows T E X Ai 3 Click Apply and Close after you set the properties Delete After you select item s you can delete them by selecting Edit gt Delete You are prompted with the following message All items on the selection list will be deleted Click OK to delete To delete the item click OK If you do not want to delete the item click Cancel 3 40 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu View Menu By selecting View on the menu bar you can access the following menu items e Primary View Set and show the pr
277. roprietary information and is protected by the copyright laws of the United States and other countries UNAUTHORIZED USE OF SOFTWARE OR ITS DOCUMENTATION CAN RESULT IN CIVIL DAMAGES AND CRIMINAL PROSECUTION Registered Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary Advanced Surface Design CADDS CADDShade Computervision Computervision Services Electronic Product Definition EPD HARNESSDESIGN Info Engine InPart MEDUSA Optegra Parametric Technology Parametric Technology Corporation Pro ENGINEER Pro HELP Pro INTRALINK Pro MECHANICA Pro TOOLKIT PTC PT Products Windchill InPart logo and PTC logo Trademarks of Parametric Technology Corporation or a Subsidiary 3DPAINT Associative Topology Bus Behavioral Modeler BOMBOT CDRS CounterPart CV CVact CVaec CVdesign CV DORS CVMAC CVNC CVToolmaker DesignSuite DIMENSION III DIVISION DVSAFEWORK DVS e Series EDE e ENGINEER Electrical Design Entry Expert Machinist Expert Toolmaker Flexible Engineering iSeries ICEM Import Data Doctor Information for Innovation ISSM MEDEA ModelCHECk NC Builder Nitidus PARTBOT PartSpeak Pro ANIMATE Pro ASSEMBLY Pro CABLING Pro CASTING Pro CDT Pro CMM Pro COMPOSITE Pro CONVERT Pro DATA for PDGS Pro DESIGNER Pro DESKTOP Pro DETAIL Pro DIAGRAM Pro DIEFACE Pro DRAW Pro ECAD Pro ENGINE Pro FEATURE Pro FEM POST Pro FLY THROUGH Pro HARNESS MFG Pro INTERFACE for CADDS 5 Pro INTERFACE for CATIA Pro L
278. rovide substitution values for the queries These tables are optional and are used if additional substitution values are needed Below is an example of this type of table OBJECT_ID FILE_NAME LINE_NUM VENDOR PART_NUM 12345678 plant LN 1000 Tube Turn PN 1000 12345679 plant LN 1000 Tube Turn PN 1001 12345680 plant LN 2000 Crane PN 2000 12345681 plant LN 2000 Crane PN 2000 12345682 plant LN 3000 Crane PN 2001 Table A 4 Sample PVS_SQL_ STMT Table on page A 13 shows an example of how this table is used in a query statement in the construction query of the PVS_SQL_STMT table Verification Procedures Visualizer obtains verification information by performing the following steps 1 The currently selected QUERY_TYPE from the Visualizer session is used with the PVS_QUERY table to locate the query mode To do this the following query statement is used select QUERY MODE from PVS_ QUERY MODE where QUERY TYPE QUERY TYPE 2 With the query mode returned from the above query PVS_ OBJECT and PVS_ QUERY tables are joined to locate the query name The OBJECT_ID and FILE NAME fields of PVS_OBJECT table are matched with the information obtained from the digitized object and the value of the QUERY_TYPE field of the PVS_ QUERY table is matched with the query type obtained from Visualizer If the query mode is OBJECT_ID only the OBJECT_ID is used to locate the query name To do this the followin
279. rs to be applied to colliding components The colors have specific meanings Color Description red Indicates colliding components green Indicates noncolliding components yellow Indicates a secondary selection Selection Set 2 These colors appear the first time you perform or review an interference check The colors are applied to the wire frame hidden line flat shading and smooth shading rendering methods A secondary selection appears in yellow if that selection contains anything You can restore the component s original colors using the Clear Colors button or by selecting Interference gt Clear from the EPD Visualizer window Viewing Results Without Color You can choose not to apply color to colliding components by disabling color You may prefer to see the bounding boxes or edges of the colliding components To use boxes and edges to differentiate components select Options gt Preferences in the EPD Visualizer window and select either boxes or edges as the highlight mode Displaying the Selected Object in Blue In addition to using red green and yellow to distinguish components you can display the current selection in blue This distinguishes the current selection from the surrounding components This option is enabled by default in the Interference Checking Control window Making Selected Objects Transparent To make the selected parts transparent select Selected Transparency EPD Visual
280. s Four menus are available in the Section window These options allow you to manage the section visibility measure distances control the automatic view adjustment and generate graphics output in a PostScript file The four menus available in the Section window are described in the following table Option Description Visibility Displays a menu containing two options Main Window enables disables display of the section with the other components in the graphics window This is disabled by default References Controls the visibility of Gpath references in the sectioning plane as explained in text following this table Squaring places a grid of lines in the Section window to assist in estimating distances Squaring Size displays selections to control the size of the grid in terms of the current unit If the selection would create more than 100 by 100 lines EPD Visualizer corrects the situation by multiplying the selection by the nearest lower power of 10 that displays less than 100 by 100 lines Text Size alters the size of the text and numbers that help you interpret the scale of the Section window You select the plus or Minus symbol that appears following the option to make the change Squaring Center moves a grid intersection to the point that you select Squaring Recenter restores the grid intersection to its former position Clear removes the Section window and disables sectioning in the Sectioning Control
281. s defines the X axis of the plane The default value of PVS_SECTION_AXIS is x You can set PVS_SECTION_AXIS to any of the following values X Y Z x y or Z EPD Visualizer User Guide 8 9 Moving a Plane Moving the Plane to the Selection List Moving the Plane to the Selection List You can move the plane to the referential of the current selection list by pressing the To Selection button in the Sectioning Motion dialog box s Rotation Motion section This feature is useful in preparing for the Plane Dynamic condition discussed in Setting Plane Dynamics on page 8 3 The selection list has a local referential The PVS_SECTION_AXIS environment variable controls which axis from the selection list s local referential defines the plane s normal The other axes of the selection list define the orientation of the local referential of the sectioning plane The default value of PVS_SECTION_AXIS is x You can set PVS_SECTION_AXIS to any of the following values X Y Z x y or Z 8 10 EPD Visualizer User Guide Moving a Plane Setting and Retrieving the Primary Plane setting and Retrieving the Primary Plane You can use the Set option to set your primary plane To retrieve the plane you have designated your primary plane use the Show option EPD Visualizer User Guide 8 11 Chapter 9 Palettes This chapter provides detailed information on the Tool palette and Walk Through palettes Move and Turn Orbit p
282. s described in this section for using model axis motions may for some views seem unnatural to you This is because it is impossible to orient properly spaced axes in a plane 1 28 EPD Visualizer User Guide Introduction to EPD Visualizer Starting an EPD Visualizer Session starting an EPD Visualizer Session This section helps you to start a EPD Visualizer session You should read the following sections before you begin e Adding graphic files or opening metafiles e Starting a new session e Quitting EPD Visualizer Running EPD Visualizer After you install EPD Visualizer and the its license manager refer to the on line release notes available from the Help menu pulldown for important information that might pertain to your system Please note You cannot start EPD Visualizer without proper licensing Before proceeding be sure you create a license file as described in the Installing EPD Connect EPD Roles and EPD Visualizer Adding Graphic Files or Opening Metafiles Before you can begin using EPD Visualizer you must first add a graphic file either textual or binary or open a metafile under the File menu You can add sample graphic file s or open a sample metafile located in the common data directory Please note Textual graphic files are appended with a gaf extension binary graphic files are appended with a gbf extension and metafiles are appended with a mf extension After you add the graphic fil
283. s found in dialog boxes and their functions Help Displays on line help for the dialog box OK Accepts the current change s and closes the dialog box Accept Accepts the current change s Apply Applies the current change s in your 3D scene and the dialog box remains open Add Adds a selected graphic file Open Opens the selected metafile Filter Updates a file selection dialog box with directories and files refer to the following section for an explanation on how to use the Filter Save Saves a graphical element such as a section or Gpath in an EPD Visualizer textual graphics file Close Closes the dialog box EPD Visualizer User Guide Introduction to EPD Visualizer Using the EPD Visualizer Window File Selection Dialog Box This section explains the dialog box that is displayed when you are selecting or saving files and describes the following options e Filter text box e Directories list e Files list e Selection text box An example of the File Selection dialog box is shown below Iter Hip m tp mioeate pro ew psia tar it Di reeterles lles m mh m a ia 3 I MABE ie RB pele ee St al Inns chi propels yp stata gh k_redowunt aeie chon Hmp m ntp moca ro jine psrsdat or Filter Displays the current directory Directories Displays existing directory names Files Displays existing file names Selection Displays the path name if y
284. s go to standard error which is usually your screen The SHADE PICTURE command creates the CADDS tessellation data the td file in the directory of the CADDS part In the same directory the _ pd file stores part data information and the _ db files stores assembly design data If required you can use the transpvs command to rotate or translate information in the graphic ASCII files Refer to Reorienting Objects in Graphic ASCII Files on page F 11 F 2 EPD Visualizer User Guide CADDS Interface Using the CADDS Interface Using the CADDS Interface The following is a description of how to use the CADDS interface cadds2pvs followed by some examples The following conventions are used for modifiers in command syntax e No Brackets Must be used once and cannot be repeated e Square Brackets Optional information that can only be used once e Braces Items listed in braces are exclusive only one can be used Please note Items within braces might or might not be required according to bracket no bracket conventions The first step to using cadds2pvs interface is to convert CADDS parts or assemblies to graphic ASCII files or graphic binary files with the following command syntax cadds2pvs a adrawing b c C comp_id d drawing name e f o file name s S t tolerance u unit_type v tolerance w CADDSpart The options in the preceding example are explained in t
285. s motions behavior 1 26 example 1 27 purpose 1 26 Mouse changing dynamics of 3 74 mouse viewing 9 9 permanent dynamics 1 21 section view behavior 7 8 Move Palette purpose 1 12 Move to Coordinates dialog box 3 27 Movie loading G 4 playing G 6 Movie recorder color blending 3 70 defining 3 71 description 3 70 N New session starting 3 3 Normals displaying 3 78 orientation of references 3 32 O Object definition of 1 6 Object definition discipline attribute B 14 example B 18 format B 14 group attribute B 14 Object Path Traversal dialog box 3 19 Object Path Traversal Options dialog box 3 19 Object tagging automatic 3 95 9 13 A 16 manual 3 95 9 13 Index 4 EPD Visualizer User Guide Index purpose 9 13 OLD_GLOBAL_SPELLING environment variable H 6 Orientation constant 2 16 3 20 to path 2 16 3 20 vertical 2 16 3 20 P Palettes hiding or showing 1 11 3 73 kinds 1 11 Move Palette 1 12 moving left or right 1 11 3 73 stretching or shrinking 1 11 Tool Palette 1 12 9 2 Turn Orbit Palette 1 12 9 19 walk through 9 15 Part data storing F 2 Path creating or editing 3 30 making items traverse 3 18 overview 2 19 purpose B 12 traversal options 3 20 Path editor purpose 3 28 Path Editor dialog box 3 30 Path Router dialog box 3 31 Permanent Zoom tool 9 5 Perspective angle description 2 3 Perspective view changing 2 3 Plane clipping the scene 7 5 constant orientation 8 4 cutting plane
286. s that represent an xyz location Flat polygons must have a minimum of three points to define a plane The following example shows a textual flat polygon definition and a corresponding binary flat polygon definition in hexadecimal notation Textual Flat Polygon Definition FP 10 0 0 0 0 0 20 0 0 0 0 0 20 0 5 0 0 0 10 0 5 0 0 0 END Binary Flat Polygon Definition 000000000004400240000000000000000000 s gt FP 0 4 10 0 0 0 0 0 400340000000000000000000 gt 520 0 0 0 0 0 400340004001400000000000 gt 520 0 5 0 0 0 400240004001400000000000 510 0 5 0 0 0 Shell Polygons The following is the format for the shell polygon definition shell_polyhedron_type_number point_specification face_descriptions In this format shell_polynedron_type_number is a 2 byte integer equal to 1 The point_specifications define a list of points used to make up a shell and the face_descriptions definition identifies which points to use when defining a face EPD Visualizer User Guide EPD Visualizer Binary Graphic File Object Definition The following is the format for the point specification definition number_of_points point_list In this format number_of_points is a 4 byte integer with a value indicating the number of points in the point list and point_list is a list of three 4 byte single precision floating point values that represent an xyz location The following example shows a textual point specifica
287. sapi id Elnar n Report Content pel Ssrleck File Hr Ip The information provided in the interference report is described in the following table Report Item Description Date Time The date and time the interference was encountered Path Name Name of the path the item was traversing when the interference was encountered This information is displayed when the interference occurs during item traversal Path Data Segment number of the path and the step number This information is displayed when the interference occurs during item traversal If the interference occurred during a rotation the vertex number and rotation number are displayed Location The XYZ coordinates of the interference location if the interference occurred along a path Object Count Number of interfering objects Interfering Objects Interfering objects listed by object ID graphic file name discipline and group 5 10 EPD Visualizer User Guide Interference Checking Reviewing the Results Filing the Report To save the interference report in a new or existing ASCII file click Select File The Interference Report File Selection dialog box appears This typical dialog box is described in the section File Selection Dialog Box on page 1 17 kilar terres Hepu l Ale decti inp mothomrbathichi pE Dre ctorlaes np Inthe me bse hith np imnth a melkas hirti de pom Whon metls hiner fin
288. se note The u option is used in these examples You must specify the units manually otherwise the _pd file will be ignored F 8 EPD Visualizer User Guide CADDS Interface Using the CADDS Interface Multiple Inout and Output Now that you have learned how to use cadds2pvs you can use system level commands in conjunction with it To generate one graphic ASCII file for several parts follow the steps in this example 1 Change to the directory containing the CADDS part by entering cd users joe parts demo 2 List the directory contents by entering ls The following is a sample of the directory contents arch equipment hvac piping site structure 3 Enter the interface command and options as the following example shows cadds2pvs o model gaf To generate individual graphic ASCII files for selected CADDS parts with csh enter the following command foreach part arch equipment hvac piping site structure echo Processing S part cadds2pvs o Spart gaf Spart end To generate individual graphic ASCII files for all CADDS parts in all subdirectories with sh enter the following command sh find users joe parts name pd print sed sX pdxx while read part do echo Processing S part cadds2pvs o Spart gaf Spart done To use a remote shell to run cadds2pvs creating the graphic ASCII file locally on a system enter the following command remsh foo n cadds2pvs usr tmp house gt house gaf To use a re
289. sion starting Your Sectioning Session To begin your sectioning session select Sectioning from the EPD Visualizer window The Sectioning menu appears providing options that allow you to do the following e Enable plane dynamics e Control the plane s display and behavior To deactivate sectioning select Sectioning gt Clear All windows and dialog boxes related to sectioning are closed For a description of plane dynamics refer to Chapter 8 Moving a Plane EPD Visualizer User Guide 6 3 Sectioning Displaying the Main Sectioning Window Displaying the Main Sectioning Window You can perform all your sectioning activities including plane dynamics from one main sectioning window To display this window select Control from the Sectioning menu The Sectioning Control window appears Sec thing Contr J Clipping Thicke i E Eoundur r paqir aw IANS parent E taor Hormal Yw J eztian J InteiTercnsg se Agthe Sele etha aw Selection 2 All Visille J User Cer tator Clase Delne Bitni Hane Help Table 6 1 provides a brief explanation of the operations you can perform from the Sectioning Control window with pointers to sections in this chapter and to subsequent chapters where the operations are explained in detail Table 6 1 Clipping and Sectioning Operations Operation For more information refer to Defining a plane Definin
290. sions Gpath replaces a preexisting one The collisions Gpath displays in the Object Path Traversal dialog box and is selectable like other Gpaths Traversal of the collisions Gpath does not cause it to be replaced The default color of the collisions Gpath is white but you can change it in the Path Editor for the current session Orientation Constant Maintain the original orientation of the item s along the entire path This is not available for Gpaths Vertical Rotate the item s horizontally to follow the path but always maintain the up direction local Z axis direction This is not available for Gpaths To Path Rotate the item s to keep the forward direction local X axis direction aligned to each path segment and the up direction local Z axis direction in a vertical plane This is not available for Gpaths Time Delay Automatically traverse the path with the Time Delay slider scale to set the number of seconds to delay between each step If the Movie Recorder is turned on while with this method movie images are generated for the traversal sequences By default the units are seconds and tenths of seconds Step Size Set the step size the item s take along the path with the Step Size slider scale A zero value causes the item s to take one step for each path segment Turn Angle Set the angle by which the item s incrementally turn when reaching the corners along a path with the Turn Angle slider scale A
291. so it faces the cutting or sectioning plane If a visible or hidden section exists EPD Visualizer adjusts the zooming factor to fit the extents of the section If there is no section there are two possible results as follows e The cutting or sectioning plane intersects the bounding box of the objects in the scene The zooming factor fits the virtual intersection of the bounding box and the plane e The cutting or sectioning plane has no common part with the bounding box of the scene objects The zooming factor fits the entire scene EPD Visualizer User Guide 7 5 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Sectioning the Scene sectioning the Scene The scene is comprised of graphic files or objects that you can section with the plane To section the scene select Section from the Sectioning Control window When you enable sectioning sectioning of the 3D objects by the plane is computed and displayed The section is recomputed and redisplayed with every movement of the plane or any sectioned object If the last computed section was exactly evaluated in the same plane you can redisplay the section without updating it However if you do this such changes as new colors and moved or deleted objects are ignored Any display of the section refreshes the scene or partially refreshes it Enabling or disabling sectioning immediately interrupts any display update currently in process The sectioning process itself is not interr
292. splay all items centered and within the limits of the graphics window select View gt All You can also view only the visible items by selecting View gt Visible All To view all items regardless of visibility select View gt All Visible To view only the visible items select View gt Visible Please note Because there is no visibility checking done for View gt All this option is much faster than View gt Visible 3 42 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu Changing Views The Change View option provides the following e Seven main orthogonal views which are automatically computed when you set the camera position and target e A view defined by two points selections e Orthographic and perspective view representations To change your view select View gt Change View The Change View dialog box appears Change View 4 Perspective w Grthographic Close Help The views available in the Change View dialog box are defined in the following table Row Orthogonal Views Top Rear Top Isometric Middle Left Front Right Bottom 2 point Bottom EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 43 Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu The view representation mode resets in the following cases e When you select Perspective in the dialog box e When you select View gt Perspective to choose a perspective angle e At EPD Visualizer startup or when selecting File gt
293. ssible to create lights in a matrix that have the same names as existing light names If Override is off you receive a warning if a new light has the same name as an existing light The default is On If Override is on the new lights override existing lights without warning you Number of Rows Sets the number of rows in your matrix 3 58 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu e Row Distance Sets the distance between lights in the same row e Row Direction Specifies where relative to the original light position to place the duplicated row of lights To set row direction you can either Use the three Row Direction slider scales to set the xyz values The scales range from 1 0 to 1 0 Use the Digitize button to digitize two coordinates in the 3D scene The xyz values corresponding to the digitize appear in the Row Direction xyz slider scales e Number of Columns Sets the number of columns in your matrix e Column Distance Sets the distance between lights in the same column e Column Direction Specifies where relative to the original light position to place the duplicated column of lights To set column direction you can either Use the three Column Direction slider scales to set the xyz values The scales range from 1 0 to 1 0 Use the Digitize button to digitize two coordinates in the 3D scene The xyz values corresponding to the digitize appear in
294. stance between points o7 084711 min OM 0 00000 OY 36 085 98 df OSes This tool remains active until you select another tool The markers remain until you select another tool or start a new measure This behavior applies to all the measuring tools described in this section EPD Visualizer User Guide 7 21 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Measuring Distance in Sections The following illustration shows the main view with two digitized points on a section The following illustration shows the digitized section shown in the previous illustration as it appears in the Section window 7 22 EPD Visualizer User Guide Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Measuring Distance in Sections Distance Between Two Endpoints You can use Sections Ends to measure the distance between two endpoints of the same section or of two different sections With this tool you need to digitize two points in the same way you do for the other measuring tools When you digitize two points EPD Visualizer selects the nearest endpoints If there is no endpoint which is the case if the section is a closed polygon EPD Visualizer accepts the digitized point instead of an endpoint Cross markers appear on the endpoints The distance between these points and the distances along the X Y and Z axes are displayed in the status window The tolerance that EPD Visualizer uses for chaining the polylines
295. statement table pvs_sql_stmt nosubvar sql File containing an SQL statement that does not use substitution variables subvar sql File containing an SQL statement that uses substitution variables dbms gaf A gaf file containing definitions for query types and selection keys Before Using SQL Interface Before using the SQL Interface make sure Oracle is running on a node on the network EPD Visualizer User Guide A 17 Database Interface DBMS Demo On All Hosts Register the DBMS network daemon program ID by adding dbmsnetd 200007 to all the ect rpc files Alternately you can set an environment variable as follows setenv dbmsnetd 200007 On Hosts Running Oracle 1 Set Oracle SID by entering the following command setenv ORACLE SID SID_name 2 Execute DBMS daemon Daemons for supported platforms are distributed with the product software and are located in the following directory VIS_HOME common sqlbin mach_os On Hosts Running Visualizer 1 Set Oracle SID by entering the following command setenv ORACLE SID SID_name Specify the DBMS host as follows setenv DBMS HOST Oracle_hostname N 3 Change to the following demonstration directory VIS_HOME common sqldemo 4 Populate the database by entering the following command popdb Oracle_username Oracle_password 5 Enter demo def for the definition file These steps create two tables PLX99 and PLFITTING containing a total of
296. sualizer Menus File Menu File Menu By selecting File on the menu bar you can access the following menu items New Session Start a new session Open Metafile Open a metafile Add Graphics Add textual or binary graphic files Remove Graphics Remove graphic files Save Metafile Save changes to an open metafile Save Metafile As Save a new metafile Graphics Output Capture view in graphics window to a raster or PostScript file Session Information Obtain session information Quit Quit EPD Visualizer After you start EPD Visualizer you can either add one or more graphic files or open a metafile starting a New Session When you start a new session all data from the current session is cleared unless you save it in a metafile To start a new session perform the following steps 1 Select File gt New Session If you have not already saved your current session in a metafile you are prompted as follows Current session has not been saved in a metafile Do you still want to start a new session 2 If you want to save a metafile click No and select File gt Save Metafile As Then select File gt New Session again and the graphics window is cleared If you do not want to save the current metafile click Yes and the graphics window is cleared 3 You can now add new graphic files or open a metafile EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 3 Using EPD Visualizer Menus File Menu Openin
297. sualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus Sectioning Menu sectioning Menu Sectioning allows you to scan an assembly by defining and moving a plane By selecting Sectioning on the menu bar you can access the following menu items e Plane Dynamic Set a sectioning plane to be dynamic e Control Specify the display and behavior of a sectioning plane e Clear Deactivate clipping and sectioning Refer to Chapter 6 Sectioning Chapter 7 Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning and Chapter 8 Moving a Plane for detailed information about clipping and sectioning EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 97 Using EPD Visualizer Menus Online Helo Menu Online Helo Menu You can access the EPD Visualizer online help to obtain immediate assistance By clicking on Help in the menu bar you can access the following menu items On Help Describes how to use context sensitive help and other options On Context Provides online help for the menu bar and palettes On General Provides basics on the EPD Visualizer interface On Glossary Provides a glossary of terms used in EPD Visualizer For quick reference help you can point to the tools buttons or slider scales and a brief description displays in the prompt window On Help Select Help gt On Help for an explanation on how to use context sensitive help and the other help options On Context You can obtain context sensiti
298. t New Session e You can provide the name of a new directory or file by defining it with CVDPA_SECTIONS_DIR or by typing it EPD Visualizer creates all the necessary subdirectories when saving a section in the new directory or file e When typing the names of gaf files you can omit the gaf suffix EPD Visualizer automatically appends the suffix if it is missing save Options Options allow you to save one or more sections in a gaf file Each newly created section can be automatically added to the current gaf file or saved in a new file You can define the file names or have EPD Visualizer generate them by adding a number to the name you define Five options are available in the Sectioning Save dialog box Three options assist you in managing the creation of the output files Two of the options define the criteria EPD Visualizer uses to generate polylines for the section The options are described in the following table Option Description Overwrite existing files With this option enabled you allow EPD Visualizer to overwrite an existing file without your permission This may be useful with the Automatic saving of any section option enabled By default when saving a section you have to confirm file overwriting by EPD Visualizer Automatic name incrementation With this option enabled EPD Visualizer increments the file name by a step of 1 when you save a section It saves only one section in a file and
299. t lights can be sharp edged fuzzy edged or variable focused SQL The ANSI standard language used to manipulate information in a relational database SQL is the language used in Oracle relational database management systems Textual Graphic File A text file containing the definitions of geometric objects colors and paths in EPD Visualizer ASCII format You can edit this file with a standard text editor The Textual Graphic file is generated by software on your host CAD system and is usually assigned a gaf extension Text Properties Specific settings for text consisting of font font type variable or fixed text alignment font size text color and character spacing View Specific settings with a specific camera orientation including camera position camera target and perspective angle You can save label and retrieve individual views for display at a later time You can save any number of views Views are saved with metafiles View Sequence A sequence of saved views that you play back interactively or by time delay You can define any number of view sequences Wire Frame A rendering option that displays all surface edges of a 3D scene as lines EPD Visualizer User Guide Glossary 7 Glossary Working Units The unit type such as feet miles or meters used for calculations when you perform walk through operations object traversal or item verification You define the working units by selecting Opt
300. t select Options gt Temp Color gt Standard EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 75 Using EPD Visualizer Menus Tools Menu Tools Menu The Tools menu contains selections that perform the functions represented by the icons in the tools palette section of the EPD Visualizer window This menu gives you the option of the tool capability without opening the tool palette In addition to the tool palette the Tools menu contains selections that interact with the product structure tree This section briefly describes the Tools menu commands For a complete description of the functions associated with the EPD Visualizer tools palette refer to Chapter 9 Palettes The following sections explain the tools that are available The Tools gt Tree command enables you to define how graphic components are selected e Select amp Scroll Select this command then select a graphic component In the EPD Connect window the product structure tree scrolls to the items associated with the selected component A Tree Select and Scroll tool is also available in the Palette You can run custom reports by using the Select and Scroll option Set the values of the variables PVS_SELECT_SCROLL_REP and CA_ENV_REPORT See Selecting Scrolling and Running a Report on page H 12 for details e Select Select this command to select the graphic component and the tree items associated with the component Please note To select more than one
301. t 4 2 3 4 6 000000050000000300000000000000020000000400000005 55 3 0 2 4 FFFFFFFCO0000002000000050000000300000000 gt 4 2 5 3 0 Polyline The following is the format for the polyline definition polyline_type_number number_of_points point_list In this format polyline_type_number is a 2 byte integer equal to 4 number_of_points is a 4 byte integer with a value indicating the number of points in the polyline and point_list is a list of polyline points A polyline point is defined with three 4 byte single precision floating point values that represent an xyz location Polylines must have a minimum of two points to define a line The following example shows a textual polyline definition and a corresponding binary polyline definition in hexadecimal notation Textual Flat Polyline Definition PL 10 0 0 0 0 0 20 0 0 0 0 0 20 0 5 0 0 0 10 0 5 0 0 0 END EPD Visualizer User Guide EPD Visualizer Binary Graphic File Object Definition Binary Flat Polyline Definition 000400000004400240000000000000000000 gt FPL 4 4 10 0 0 0 0 0 400340000000000000000000 520 0 0 0 0 0 400340004001400000000000 520 0 5 0 0 0 400240004001400000000000 510 0 5 0 0 0 Textual and Binary Graphic File Example The following example shows a complete textual graphic file and a corresponding binary graphic file in hexadecimal notation The textual graphic file follows GRAPHICS FILE CONTROL_ OPTIONS unit
302. t Palette To move the palettes to the left or right side of the graphics window select Options gt Left Right Palette EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 73 Using EPD Visualizer Menus Options Menu Preferences To change the working units for the 3D scene the color of the graphics window or the behavior of the mouse dynamics select Options gt Preferences The User Preferences dialog box displays Working Units wr Mils ae nehet gel a Yards wr MIRS lHahlight hii de zae Close Background Color BoE Color Editor e Centliehers ve Decinelers w klebers Mouse Dynamis s se k llemeters Threshold large Camera a _ i ve Scene ae ges apply Help e Working Units To set the working units select the appropriate working unit click Close and the working unit displays wherever units display e Highlight Mode To set the highlighting mode select one of the following modes The default is boxes Please note Boxes highlighting mode executes much faster then Edges mode when selecting a large number of items e Boxes Highlight selected objects with their extents boxes e Edges Highlight selected objects with their polygon edges e Background Color To set the color of the graphics window select the color in the Background Color Editor To use the Color Editor refer to Color Editor on page 1 19 3 74 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Men
303. t an xyz location Polylines require a minimum of two points to define a line The following example shows the format for defining flat polygon points PL 20 0 0 00 0 30 0 0 00 0 30 0 5 00 0 20 0 5 00 0 END EPD Visualizer User Guide B 17 EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File Object Definitions Object Definition Example The following example shows a complete object definition section using flat polygons and shells OBJ object_id id 9823 t discipline drive_train group transmission color metallic_gray FP 10 0 0 0 5 0 10 0 0 0 5 0 20 0 7 0 5 0 3 0 5 0 0 END SP POINTS 70 5 20 9 0 5 60 0 10 0 5 0 9 00 ALSO sb2e5 30 2 10 1 0 0 15 0 20 0 2 0 10 7 30 2 2 4 END FDS 4 0 1 2 3 3o 20 53s 4 By TB vO 2 Aa 5 4 2 5 3 0 END END PL 20 0 0 0 0 0 30 0 0 0 0 0 30 0 5 0 0 0 END END B 18 EPD Visualizer User Guide EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File Gpath Multiple Sectioning Gpath Multiple Sectioning When you save the result of Gpath multiple sectioning in an EPD Visualizer textual graphic file the file has the following format GRAPHICS FILE CONTROL_ OPTIONS unit The unit is defined from the Options Preferences menu Working Unit END lt Section generated by the 1st visible reference gt I lt Section generated by the 2nd visible reference gt af eas lt Section generated by the nth visible reference gt END The section generate
304. t is through movie creation as 8 bit TIFF files in your movie directory Frame Size e Click the desired frame size and the window resizes to the selected dimension e Current Use the current graphics window size Movie Format e Visualizer Movie TIF e Silicon Graphics RGB e Sun Microsystems RAS EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 71 Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu 4 Click OK and the following message displays Movie recording is now enabled for Camera and Object traversal This message also displays the movie directory and the starting frame number After the movie recorder is turned on you can start recording movies with Camera or Object Traversal Refer to Camera Traversal on page 3 66 and Path Traversal on page 3 16 for more information 3 72 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus Options Menu Options Menu By selecting Options on the menu bar you can customize your working environment with the following menu items e Hide Show Palette Hide or show the palettes e Left Right Palette Move the palettes to the left or right side of the graphics window e Preferences Set working units graphics window color and mouse dynamics e Temp Color Set the color of temporary graphics and secondary view boxes e Axis Display Switch display of axis on off Hide Show Palette To hide or show the palettes select Options gt Hide Show Palette Left Righ
305. t the axes you want to display Global or Local in the Coordinate System area 2 Click Show Active Axes and the selected axes are displayed in the 3D scene To show the selection list click Highlight Selection and the selection list is highlighted in the 3D scene To verify Local Origin and Axes click Verify Local Axes in the Translate Rotate Selection List dialog box The Local Axes Verification dialog box displays the following information e Coordinates of the local origin in the global coordinate system e Angles that would orient a reference in a Gpath like the current coordinate system The information in the Local Axes Verification dialog box updates during motion except motion initiated from the Object Path traversal dialog box The Local Axes Verification dialog box updates after motion initiated from the Object Path traversal dialog box Oidgin The Orient Normal button allows you to orient a selection so that its Z axis is parallel to a normal without moving the selection s origin You press the Orient Normal button and select a surface or a reference EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 25 Using EPD Visualizer Menus Edit Menu With the buttons in the Move area you can move selections in the following ways e Moving selection to a reference when the Modify Local Axes in the Local Axes area is not selected You select the To Ref button and then make a selection in the graphics window The selection gets both th
306. t viewfile name 1 gt 1 9 y lt viewfile name 2 gt 2 1 Y lt viewfile name 3 gt 3 5 n LABEL To execute the script file at the system prompt enter the script file name EPD Visualizer User Guide E 5 DIMENSION III Interface ASCII Graphic File Contents ASCII Graphic File Contents The ASCII graphic files generated from DIMENSION III viewfiles contain the following information e CONTROL_ OPTIONS block Contains the unit type you selected when you generated the graphic file such as inches millimeters e COLOR block Contains definitions for eight colors The color numbers names and RGB values for DIMENSION III items are mapped to the colors shown in Table E 1 Table E 1 DIMENSION III Color Map Color Number Color Name RGB Value 0 black 0 00 00 0 1 red 1 00 00 0 2 green 0 01 00 0 3 yellow 1 01 00 0 4 blue 0 00 01 0 5 magenta 1 00 01 0 6 cyan 0 01 01 0 7 gray 0 50 50 5 e 0BJ block Each object block corresponds to a DIMENSION III item Each OBJ block contains the following attributes e Group Name The item s class number e Object _ID A combination of the ID pointer and the model ID number extended ID pointer e Color Name A name corresponding to the item s color number specified in Table E 1 You can edit the color definitions in an ASCII graphic file to contain different RGB values e Polygon Definitions The
307. tant DY Relative distance from the currently selected point along the Y axis When you select this mode the new point changes only in the Y value X and Z values remain constant DZ Relative distance from the currently selected point along the Z axis When you select this mode the new point changes only in the Z value X and Y values remain constant e Position Definition Digitizing tools Vertex Snap to the end vertex of the edge you digitized Center Snap to the center of the edge you digitized Edge Snap to exactly where you digitized In creating Gpaths you make a list of path references each of which includes information in the Absolute XYZ Position field and information in the Absolute Orientation field Select one of the following tools in the Reference Definition area to automatically create the information for references This information controls the orientation and position of the traversing object e Get Selection Axis When you translate or rotate an object belonging to the selection list this tool makes the object s position and orientation into specifications for the references that you create e By Face The reference is derived from the position and orientation of the face of an object selected in the graphics window e By Ref The position and orientation are copied from the reference that you select in the graphics window e Orient Normal The orientation of the reference is
308. tation including camera position camera target and perspective angle You can save any number of views which you can later save with a metafile 3 60 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu To define a view use the following steps 1 Define your position in the 3D scene with the walk through buttons 2 Select View gt View Editor The View Definition dialog box displays View Ha mina Slew Ardnrence Harr Hew Coil Hanie Delete oe Tel E E thoy a t 3 Click New and a text box displays 4 Enter a name in the text box 5 Click OK to save the name and it displays in the View Names list To edit a view name use the following steps 1 Click the name in the View Names list 2 Click Edit Name and a text box displays the selected name 3 Click OK after you edit the name To delete a view use the following steps 1 Click the name in the View Names list 2 Click Delete and the view is removed from the View Names list and temporarily stored To restore a deleted view click Undo Delete to restore a deleted view You cannot restore the deleted view after you close the dialog box define a new view or edit a view name To display a view click the view name then click Show The view displays in the graphics window and the note displays in the View Reference Note text box To enter a note after you name a view enter a note of any length in the View Reference N
309. tems to the selection list and then with Select gt Selection Set Editor You can save selection sets with a metafile After the selection set is defined you can add it to the selection list in a single step with Select gt Build Selection List For example if you define a selection set consisting of geometry that forms a forklift you can easily add it to the selection list for item traversal 2 10 EPD Visualizer User Guide Basic Features Verification Verification You can query EPD Visualizer for item information with the verifying and measuring tools in the palette The following tools located in the Tool palette provide specific information about the 3D scene e Verify e Measure Distance from Camera to Item e Measure Distance Between Items All verification data is calculated in working units feet miles meters etc You can define these units by selecting Options gt Preferences Verify With the Verify tool you can quickly and easily obtain detailed data about selected items After you select an item in your graphics window with the Verify tool an Item Verification report displays information available from the graphics file If the database is open EPD Visualizer also provides information from the external database Measure Distance from Camera to Item With the Measure Distance from Camera to Item tool you can measure the distance from the camera position your eye point to a vertex point you
310. tents Textual Graphic File Contents The textual graphic file is usually generated by your host CAD system but you can also create a textual graphic file with a standard text editor A textual graphic file can contain the following sections Control Options Extents Definitions Color Definitions Light Definitions Material Definitions Path Definitions Object Definitions EPD Visualizer does not limit the size of the graphic file However no single line in the file should exceed 256 characters because lines longer than 256 characters might not be processed B 2 EPD Visualizer User Guide EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File Textual Graphic File Format Textual Graphic File Format If you want to create a new graphic file or edit an existing one you need to understand how to format and organize graphics information All EPD Visualizer textual graphic files begin with the key word GRAPHICS FILE and end with the key word END You can enter spaces or tabs within the file for readability You can also add comments anywhere in a graphic file by prefacing the comment with an exclamation point Between GRAPHICS FILE and END graphics information is organized into hierarchical sections Each section within the file must begin with a key word section name and end with the key word END The Control Options section must be the first section in the file If the Extents Definition section is included it must appear befor
311. tes geometry_specifications In this format object_section_number is a 2 byte integer equal to 2 The following are the valid object_attributes discipline_attribute group_name_attribute object_id_attribute color_attribute The following table shows the values corresponding to the object attribute numbers Table C 3 Object Attribute Numbers and their Values Attribute Number Value discipline_attribute_number 0 group_name_attribute_number 1 object_id_attribute_number 2 color_attribute_number 3 The following is the format for discipline_attribute discipline_attribute_number attribute_length attribute_value The following is the format for group_name_attribute group_attribute_number attribute_length attribute_value The following is the format for object_id_attribute object_id_attribute_number attribute_length attribute_value C 8 EPD Visualizer User Guide EPD Visualizer Binary Graphic File Object Definition The discipline_attribute_number group_attribute_number and object_id_attribute_number are 2 byte integers with a value equal to the value in Table C 2 on page C 3 The attribute_length is a 4 byte integer and attribute_value is an ASCII string with the length specified by the attribute_length value The color_attribute is either a symbolic value in which a color name previously defined in the color definition section is used or a literal value in which the actual RGB values
312. th In an ordinary path called a path in this document the orientation of the object depends on the shape of the path It is possible to define the orientation of the object relative to the angle between the two consecutive path segments at each vertex A Gpath allows better simulation of the manufacturing environment than a path because in a Gpath you can describe the orientation of the object or plane at each vertex relative to a global referential rather than the characteristics of vertices A Gpath with a single vertex is valid but a path must have at least two vertices The major use for a Gpath with a single vertex is giving an object a precise position and orientation A Gpath has the following properties e It can be defined a in gaf file e It has a maximum of 500 defining points each of which is called a reference e Each defining point has a name e Each defining point has an attached orientation or referential You define and modify Gpaths with the Path Editor You can hide or display their references You can modify the size of displayed references in the Path Editor window 3 28 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus Edit Menu Each reference in a Gpath has the following defining properties e Its location in the 3D space e Three rotation angles that describe how to obtain it by rotating the global referential around its X Y and Z axes e Name e You cannot operate on a reference indepe
313. the Turn Orbit Palette enable you to move in an angular direction Control the angle you move with the Turn Orbit Angle slider scale 1 12 EPD Visualizer User Guide Introduction to EPD Visualizer Using the EPD Visualizer Window Slider Scales Slider scales are found in palettes and dialog boxes Atypical slider scale is shown below hove Distance Inches Pat i Use one of the following for the slider scale e Click the bar on the slider scale to increase or decrease by the step value a changeable value the following text explains on how to customize the slider scales e Drag the slider to increase or decrease To customize the slider scales click the right mouse button on the slider scale value and the Scale Customization dialog box is displayed An example of the Scale Customization dialog box is shown below Loew Yalu slep Yalu i a High Wil uw Decimal Places Cc DE Tagel Help Enter a new value for the low or high value and click OK Step Value The number of units the slider scales increase or decrease when you click the bar For example if you enter a step value of 15 and click the bar the scale value increases or decreases by 15 Enter a new value and click OK Decimal Places You can change the value displayed in the slider scale to decimal form Enter a number between one and three to specify the number of digits that will be displayed to the right of the decimal point and
314. the following e About Zones e Environment Variables You Need to Set e Creating Your Zone Definition EPD Visualizer User Guide 4 1 Constructing Zones About Zones About Zones A zone is a three dimensional object shaped as a box or cylinder You can create zones to circumscribe areas within an assembly for clash detection You have to create zones both as EPD Visualizer geometry and as external graphic files gaf The color definition for any zone is red for external faces and green for internal faces The internal parallel faces are not visible in EPD Visualizer even if the polygons are generated both in EPD Visualizer and in the gaf file You are allowed to have only one zone defined in EPD Visualizer at a time The current zone is automatically removed when you leave the zoning environment Zone definition requires that you set environment variables for the directory used to store the zones you create and for the space between the internal faces These environment variables are described in the following section 4 2 EPD Visualizer User Guide Constructing Zones Environment Variables You Need to Set Environment Variables You Need to Set To construct a box or cylinder zone you must set two environment variables These variables are described in the following table Variable Description CVDPA_ZONES DIR Specifies the directory used to store the zones you create For example seten
315. the following steps 1 Set Database gt Tagging to Manual 2 You can use either the default text properties or set new text properties by selecting Edit gt Text Properties 3 Click on the tool and move the pointer into the graphics window You are prompted with Tag Object Manually Digitize object to tag 4 Digitize the vertex of an object and the Text Editor displays with the xyz coordinates of the object Please note Before you enter text you can select a different location without closing the Text Editor 5 Click in the text box to enter text 6 Click OK and the text displays Automatically Tag Objects To automatically tag objects with a tag stored in the database use the following steps 1 Select Database gt Open Database to open a database file 2 Set Database gt Tagging to Automatic EPD Visualizer User Guide 9 13 Palettes Tool Palette You can use either the default text properties or set new text properties by selecting Edit gt Text Properties Click on the Object Tagging tool and move the pointer into the graphics window You are prompted with the following Tag Object Automatically Digitize object to tag After you digitize the vertex of an object the predefined tag from the database appears 9 14 EPD Visualizer User Guide Palettes Walk Through Palettes Walk Through Palettes Use the walk through palettes to change the orientation and position of the came
316. the name of the reference point optional A default name is automatically built by adding an order number to the string defined in the PVS_UNNAMED_REF environment variable If the environment variable is not defined the default string is rf There is no theoretical limit to the length of the name but it is reasonable to that a maximum of 15 characters defines a name The first reference in the Gpath points definition specifies the head of the path You can define a maximum of 500 references in a Gpath The following example shows the definition of a Gpath GPATH name newpath color yellow REFPOINTS 195 0 851 0 593 0 178 0 0 0 179 9 Start 240 0 815 0 587 0 73 0 0 0 21 71 3 5 r2 406 0 807 0 516 0 99 6 90 0 9 4 E3 389 0 849 0 329 0 99 9 90 0 176 2 r4 a D5 20 58 0 328 0 90 0 0 0 180 0 r5 4 0 43 0 100 0 86 8 10 0 90 0 End END END 4 0 43 0 100 0 86 8 10 0 90 0 End EPD Visualizer User Guide B 13 EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File Object Definitions Object Definitions Objects are defined in a section identified by the key word 0BJ Typically the object definition section is generated by your host CAD system However if you are creating a textual graphic file you can define geometric objects in this section Each object in a textual graphic file must be assigned a unique object identifier so that EPD Visualizer can easily differentiate between the geometric objects You can also assign addit
317. this format color_name_length is a 4 byte integer and color name is an ASCII string with length specified by the color_name_length value The color_intensities is defined with three 4 byte single precision floating point numbers that represent red green and blue intensities RGB in that order Valid RGB values range from 0 0 to 1 0 where 1 0 represents the highest intensity allowable The following examples show a textual color definition section and a corresponding binary color definition section in hexadecimal notation Textual Color Definition COLORS red 1 0 0 0 0 0 green 0 0 1 0 0 0 blue 0 0 0 0 END C 6 EPD Visualizer User Guide EPD Visualizer Binary Graphic File Color Definition Binary Color Definition 000100000003 gt COLORS 1 number of SRI I colors 3 000000037265643FFF00000000000000000000 gt name length 3 1 0 0 0 0 0 00000005677265656ER000000003FFF000000000000 gt name length 5 green red 0 0 1 0 0 0 00000004626C756500000000000000003FFF0000 gt name length 4 blue 0 0 0 0 1 0 EPD Visualizer User Guide C 7 EPD Visualizer Binary Graphic File Object Definition Object Definition The object definition section is used to define geometric objects for the graphic file The following is the format for the each object definition section object_section_number object_attribu
318. tion Set Editor A selection set is a named collection of items that you can save and later add to the selection list You can save selection sets with a metafile After the selection set is defined you can add it to the selection list and highlight it by selecting Select gt Build Selection List To define a selection set use the following steps 1 Add item s to the selection list 2 Select Select gt Selection Set Editor and the Selection Set Editor dialog box displays Seleclien Gels Fdlt Hame Uclele KEWL 3 Click New and a text box displays 4 Enter a name in the text box 5 Click OK to save the name and it displays in the Selection Sets list To edit a selection set name use the following steps 1 Click the name in the Selection Sets list 2 Click Edit Name and a text box displays the selected name 3 Click OK after you edit the name To delete a selection set use the following steps 1 Click the name in the Selection Sets list 2 Click Delete and the selection set is removed from the Selection Sets list and temporarily stored 3 80 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus Select Menu To restore a deleted selection set click Undo Delete You cannot restore the deleted selection set after you close the dialog box define a new selection set or edit a selection set name To highlight a selection set use the following steps 1 Click the name in the Selectio
319. tion definition and the corresponding binary point specification definition in hexadecimal notation Textual Point Specification Definition POINTS 70 5 20 9 0 5 60 0 10 0 5 0 90 0 F150 5525 30 2 10 1 0 0 15 0 20 0 2 0 10 7 30 2 2 4 10 0 0 0 0 0 END Binary Point Specification Definition 0000000740051A00C034E6663FFE0000 gt 770 5 20 9 0 5 1004e000C0240000C0140000 560 0 10 0 5 0 L0056800CO2E0000C0160000 590 0 15 0 5 5 1003E333C024333300000000 530 2 10 1 0 0 1002E0004003400040000000 515 0 20 0 2 0 100256664003E33340003333 gt 510 7 30 2 2 4 L00240000000000000000000 510 0 0 0 0 0 The following is the format for the face descriptions definition face_list_length face_list In this format face_list_length is a 4 byte integer with a value indicating the number of numbers in a face list and face_list is a list of 4 byte integers identifying which points to use when defining a face EPD Visualizer User Guide C 13 EPD Visualizer Binary Graphic File Object Definition The following example shows a textual face descriptions definition and a corresponding binary face descriptions definition in hexadecimal notation Textual Face Description Definition FDS 4 0 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 6 5 3 0 32 A 5 4 2 5 3 0 END Binary Face Description Definition 000000150000000400000000000000010000000200000003 gt 214 0 1 2 3 0000000400000002000000030000000400000006 g
320. tioned 7 13 Sectioning the Scene from Multiple References 7 14 Configuring Multiple Sectioning 7 17 Performing Multiple Sectioning 7 19 Saving Multiple Sectioning 7 20 Measuring Distance in Sections 7 20 Distance Between Two Points 7 21 Distance Between Two Endpoints 7 23 Minimum Distance Between a Point and a Section 7 24 Minimum Distance Between an Endpoint and a Section ______ _ 7 25 Minimum Distance Between Two Sections 7 26 Considerations 7 27 Verifying a Point 7 28 Saving a Section 7 29 Save Options 7 30 EPD Visualizer User Guide Contents xiii Output File Format 7 32 Description of a Section 7 32 Description of a Sectioned Graphic File 7 33 Listing Interferences 7 34 Example File 7 34 Section Window Graphics Output 7 36 Moving a Plane Getting Started 8 2 Setting Plane Dynamics 8 3 Moving the Plane Without Objects Selected 8 3 Orienting 8 4 Translating and Rotating 8 5 Moving the Plane with Objects Selected 8 6 Translating the Plane 8 7 Moving by Steps 8 7 Moving by Digitizing 8 7 Rotating the Plane 8 8 Moving the Plane to a Reference 8 9 Moving the Plane to the Selection List 8 10 Setting and Retrieving the Primary Plane 8 11 Palettes Tool Palette 9 2 select 9 3 Volume Select 9 4 Verify 9 4 Tree Select and Scroll 9 5 Permanent Zoom 9 5 Zoom 9 6 Set Camera Position 9 6 Set Camera Target 9 7 Contents xiv EPD Visualizer Use
321. tions Gpaths text and lights As you define or select colors the current color and a new color is displayed in the dialog box You can define a new color with the Color Composition slider scales after selecting a Color Model option If you select the Color option you can define a new color using the RGB red green and blue scales If you select the Gray Scale option you can use the RGB scales to define a new color in shades of black and white You can also select a color from the list of Colors In addition you can use the Select Color tool to verify or select a color from geometry in the 3D scene The Color Editor dialog box is shown below Cument Hew Hew Calor Nelete Seren Lege Colars olor bidel alice _blur alitiqjue white AQ Ua anne ieme helye Calor Gen p os it LE Calor e Gray Fcale black fo blanched almand E C blur i Pos J e E C oF Seleecl Eig ler Emn Defining a New Color Use the following steps to define a new color 1 Select the Color Model Color or Gray Scale 2 Drag the sliders on the Color Composition slider scales to adjust the color EPD Visualizer User Guide 1 19 Introduction to EPD Visualizer Color Editor 3 Click New Color and a text box is displayed 4 Enter a name up to 30 characters in the text box 5 Click Accept to save the color Deleting a Color Use the following steps to delete a color 1 Click the
322. ton The screen axis motions and the actions you need to perform to activate them are described in the following table Table 1 1 Screen Axis Motions Desired Motion Actions You Perform Scroll Drag with the middle button to translate the camera on the horizontal and vertical screen axis so that the scene adheres to the mouse pointer Zoom Drag vertically with the middle mouse button while pressing the Shift key Dragging up zooms the camera on the scene Dragging down unzooms the camera away from the scene Rotation Drag with the right mouse button Dragging vertically orbits the camera around the vertical screen axis so that the camera rotates around the scene Dragging horizontally orbits the camera around the Z model axis so that the scene rotates around Z to the pointer It is preferable to use the Z model axis rather than the vertical screen axis Third Rotation Drag with the right mouse button while pressing the Shift key Dragging left or up rolls the camera around its axis so that the scene rotates counter clockwise in the screen plane Dragging right or down rolls the camera around its axis so that the scene rotates clockwise in the screen plane Note These actions are meaningful when the pointer is on the top or right EPD Visualizer User Guide 1 21 Introduction to EPD Visualizer Permanent Mouse Dynamics Behavior of Screen Axis Motions The scene updates each time you
323. trolling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Clipping the Scene Clipping the Scene You perform the major part of the clipping by displaying one or two cutting planes to remove the unwanted parts of the scene By using two cutting planes with opposite norm vectors you can display only a slice of the scene To clip the scene select Clipping from the Sectioning Control window When you enable clipping all the geometry in front of the plane vanishes The part of the scene behind the normal vector is retained With clipping enabled the scene is refreshed with any change to the plane the clipping mode the clipping parameters or the section Also enabling or disabling clipping immediately interrupts any display update currently in process specifying the Thickness By defining a clipping thickness you can display all the objects behind the scene or only a slice of the scene The thickness scale allows you to specify the clipping thickness A null value disables display of a slice Any other value indicates the thickness of the visible slice You can click the right mouse button on the current scale value to display the Scale Customization window The Scale Customization window is shown on page 7 3 Reversing the Normal Vector You can use the Reverse button to invert the normal vector of the plane If you enable reverse the clipping is regenerated Viewing the Plane You can use the Normal View button to position the camera
324. tting the CVDPA_SECTIONS_DIR environment variable Appendix B EPD Visualizer Textual Graphic File explains the format in which files are saved Measuring Distance in Sections You can evaluate gaps between objects in the sectioning plane and measure distances in sections The entities between which you can measure distance are points endpoints and whole sections To measure distances select Tools gt Measure Distance from the EPD Visualizer window menu bar or select the Distance menu from the Section window Five tools are available to you for measuring distance in sections The following sections discuss those tools The five tools have a common feature you can display dimensions in the Section window obtained by the measuring tool that you select Select the Drafting button in the Section window s Distance menu to activate this feature After you measure a distance with the tool you select a message in the prompt window requests you to indicate a location near the boundary of the Section window The boundary that you select determines the type of dimension and the location of the dimension s baseline e Left or right boundary selected vertical dimension Top or bottom boundary selected horizontal dimension e Press the Control key while selecting the objects to measure the shortest distance between them on the sectioning plane known as parallel dimensions 7 20 EPD Visualizer User Guide Controlling a Pl
325. u bar You can save and retrieve individual views with a specific camera orientation including camera position camera target and perspective angle You can then organize these views into sequences for subsequent review or presentation In addition you can annotate each view with descriptive information such as engineering data design changes IFC conflicts or reminders You can save any number of views which you can later save with a metafile showing and Setting the Primary View The primary view is a view that you can return to if you become disoriented while moving through your 3D scene View gt Primary View gt Show The initial primary view is defined when you add your first graphics file You can set a new primary view by selecting View gt Primary View gt Set Viewing All Items To display all items centered and within the limits of the graphics window select View gt View All Saving Views and Notes You can save views and notes for redisplay later by selecting View gt View Editor Then assign specific names to each view and edit the notes later After you save the views you can organize them into a view sequence for play back Defining and Playing Back View Sequences To define a sequence of views to play back select View gt View Sequence gt Editor You designate previously saved views as members of a view sequence As you define a view sequence you can display a view or review its associated note You
326. upted Displaying the Section in a Separate View When you enable sectioning a separate Section window automatically appears You can use this window to display the section apart from the other components in the graphics window This increases the readability of the graphics window and 7 6 EPD Visualizer User Guide Controlling a Plane s Display and Multiple Sectioning Sectioning the Scene reduces the number of times it is refreshed The Section window follows together with windows that you might use at the same time par Laas we SN LE tek A le ele te aa pe bt I Ute etl i Hit Hiat wew Clptans ines Srleek ambe Interne inte Srei Sneed nate Syeskren vGlulel a Lugal rana a eS aes ae ne ae bed pe Pees lo gher Beart Enston ajae wf rertHomi Markl Giur ulii z et es Wr Py X Aure saner nkput IET Kul Tz Tan t To Cuordiniles BERRES erbe Leal asee _ fardi dors Oty H o Logal LI L dighliyil alusir SPa webb Gs You can display the section both in the graphics window and in the Section window If the section is visible in graphics window the scene is entirely or partially redisplayed every time you change the section If the section is displayed in the Section window EPD Visualizer does not refresh the scene when clipping is disabled and the plane is displayed in Boundary mode or when the plane is not displayed at all The colors of the sectioned ob
327. us Options Menu e Mouse Dynamics The mouse dynamics option enables you to set the threshold and target for the Mouse Viewing tool For more information on this tool refer to Mouse Viewing on page 9 9 Set the mouse dynamics with the following options e Set the mouse threshold with the slider scale Threshold refers to the number of pixels the mouse pointer travels before the display is updated Threshold levels can range from 2 to 25 pixels The default is 5 e Select the target You can select either camera or scene The default is camera Camera Moves the camera position in the direction of the mouse pointer Scene Moves the 3D scene in the direction of the mouse pointer The camera remains stationary You can enable scene mode when starting EPD Visualizer using the scene option in the EPD Visualizer command line Refer to installation documentation for more information Temp Color By default temporary graphics are displayed in black or white depending on your background display You can specify a color for EPD Visualizer to use when displaying temporary graphics such as selection and digitize markers as well as secondary view orientation boxes To specify a color for temporary graphics use the following steps 1 Define the environment variable PVS_TEMP_COLOR as in the following syntax setenv PVS TEMP COLOR green 2 Select Options gt Temp Color gt User To revert to the system defaul
328. ust be the same On Hosts Running Oracle Execute the DBMS daemon Daemons for supported platforms are distributed with Visualizer and located in the common sqlbin directory On Hosts Running Visualizer Specify the DBMS host with the following command setenv DBMS HOST name_of_host_running_Oracle A 16 EPD Visualizer User Guide Database Interface DBMS Demo DBMS Demo This section explains how to use the DBMS demo which is designed to help you understand the SQL interface to Visualizer The following executable files populate the database with test data and reside in the VIS_HOME bin directory parsedat Reads an ASCII database definition file and populates the data in the connecting DBMS database parsedb Reads the data file and populates the data in the connecting DBMS database The following files are used by the preceding executable files and reside in the VIS_HOME common sqldemo subdirectory popdb A csh script that accepts an Oracle usercode password and database definition file which calls the parsedat and parsedb executable files demo db Database for demonstrating the SQL Interface demo def Database definition file for demonstrating the SQL Interface object dat Data file for the object table pvs_object purchasing dat Data file for the purchasing table pvs_purchasing query dat Data file for the query table pvs_query sql_stmt dat Data file for the
329. v CVDPA ZONES DIR usr tmp zones CVDPA SPACING Specifies the value defining the step between internal faces For example setenv CVDPA SPACING 50 EPD Visualizer User Guide 4 3 Constructing Zones Creating Your Zone Definition Creating Your Zone Definition To create a zone select Tools gt Zone Definition from the EPD Visualizer window Two options Box and Cylinder appear These options are described in the following sections Creating a Box Zone A box zone is a three dimensional box volume filled with parallel faces spaced according to the value defined for the CVDPA_SPACING variable You offset and display the external faces of the box by specifying an offset value and a transparency value Internal faces are created but not displayed The box edges are always oriented along the main X Y Z axes The extents are computed in different ways depending on the box type you select The box types you can create are described in the following table Box Type Description Corner Box Extents are computed from two points that you enter in the Zone Box Creation window See page 4 6 Radius Box Extents are computed as extents of the inscribed sphere having the center and radius that you enter in the Zone Box Creation window See page 4 6 Selection List Extents are computed as including all the entities contained into the current selection list See page 4 7 4 4 EPD Visualizer Use
330. ve help on the menu names located on the menu bar at the top of your EPD Visualizer window and the palettes containing tools buttons and slider scales located beside your EPD Visualizer window To use On Context perform the following steps 1 2 Click On Context and your pointer changes to a question mark Click any of the menu names tools buttons or slider scales and a window displays a description on how to use the selected item To use On Context on the slider scales in the palette click on the slider scale value To scroll up or down the On Context window click in the scroll bar on the right Click Close to close the window On General Select Helo gt On General for basics on with the EPD Visualizer interface 3 98 EPD Visualizer User Guide Using EPD Visualizer Menus Online Help Menu On Glossary Select Help gt On Glossary for a glossary of terms used in EPD Visualizer On Environment Select Helo gt On Environment for a list of EPD Visualizer environment variables and directions about setting them On Release Notes Select Helo gt On Release Notes for a list of new features in the current EPD Visualizer revision EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 99 Chapter 4 Constructing Zones This chapter describes how to construct three dimensional zones within an assembly After creating a zone you can test for physical clashes within it The chapter includes information on
331. vement in the Translate Rotate Selection List dialog box This is possible only if the selection list includes at least one item As with path traversal you can move the selected objects as you normally do and the plane is rigidly linked to them You can use the Sectioning Motion window to change the plane s position independently of the selected objects 8 6 EPD Visualizer User Guide Moving a Plane Translating the Plane Translating the Plane You can move the plane without changing its orientation You can perform the movement step by step or by digitizing a vertex in the scene Moving by Steps When moving the plane by steps you can perform the movement along the plane s normal vector or along one of the main axis X Y or Z of the scene You can move the plane by steps in four ways These are described in the following table Option Arrow Button Used Description Normal Right and Left Double Single Right arrow moves the plane to the right of the screen and the left arrow moves it to the left If the plane is displayed almost horizontally on the screen the right arrow moves it up and the left arrow moves it down If the plane is almost parallel to the screen the right arrow moves it towards you and the left arrow moves it away from you The length of the movement is the scale value The length of the movement is equal to one tenth of the scale value DY DX DZ Right and Le
332. xamples D 2 EPD Visualizer User Guide Contents xvii DIMENSION III Interface Introduction E 2 Generating Graphic Files E 3 Processing Single Viewfiles E 3 Processing Multiple Viewfiles E 4 ASCII Graphic File Contents E 6 Error Messages E 7 CADDS Interface Introduction F 2 Using the CADDS Interface F 3 Examples F 5 Restrictions F 6 Messages and Errors F 6 Converting Tessellation Data Only F 8 Multiple Inout and Output F 9 Assembly Design Trees F 10 Reorienting Objects in Graphic ASCII Files F 11 Options F 11 Examples F 12 cadds2pvsdb F 12 EPD Visualizer Movie Player Getting Started G 3 Loading a Movie G 4 Quitting pvsmovie G 6 Playing a Movie G 6 Contents xviii EPD Visualizer User Guide Environment Variables General Behavior H 2 CVDPA_COMFIG_DIR H 2 HOOPS_PICTURE H 2 PVS_ORTHO_MODE H 3 PVS_SECOND_VIEW_SIZE H 3 PVS_STEREO H 3 PVS_STEREO_ANGLE H 3 PVS_TEMP_COLOR H 3 PV_SYSTEM H 4 Graphics Files Loading H 5 CVPATH H 5 PVS_CONCAVE_PERFORM H 5 PVS_CADDS_COLORS H 5 EPD Visualizer EPD Connect Communication H 6 CVDPA_USE_MIRFLAG H 6 OLD_GLOBAL_SPELLING H 6 PVS_EXTERNAL H 6 PVS_CLIENT_FILE H 6 PVS_COLOR_FILE H 7 Path Editor Path Traversal and Translation and Rotation __ _ H 8 PVS_LOCAL_CPL H 8 PVS_NORMAL_AXIS H 8 PVS_PATHS_DIR H 8
333. xes are relative to these axes Radiosity An advanced rendering method that takes into consideration radiated light from diffusely reflecting surfaces in a 3D scene Radiosity can be applied only to small 3D scenes Ray Tracing A means of displaying reflections and refractions in a 3D scene Ray tracing tracks beams of light from the target back to the light source taking into account reflections mirroring transparency shadows and refraction Ray tracing results in a transient pixel image that must be saved as a raster image Reference The combination of name orientation and position information that describes a vertex in a Gpath Referential The combination of orientation and position information that describes an object plane or reference Rendering The process of displaying a 3D scene in the EPD Visualizer graphics window EPD Visualizer renders each 3D scene into an image file that contains color information for each pixel EPD Visualizer User Guide Glossary 5 Glossary Shell Polygon A network of interconnected polygons that share common points and result in a unit typically called a polyhedron Shell polygons can be smooth shaded Selection List A selection list stores objects that you select After the objects are added to the selection list you can Hide Show Translate Rotate Delete or Traverse them You can build a selection list with the Select and Select By Volume tools and the Buil
334. y Local Sensitivity Adds local sensitivity of items on the selection list A warning message displays if the selection list is empty Remove Local Sensitivity Removes local sensitivity from items on the selection list A warning message displays if the selection list is empty Remove All Local Sensitivity Removes local sensitivity from all items in a 3D scene 3 Click OK to accept radiosity control settings Lighting The lighting option enables you to manage define and modify the lighting for your 3D scene Editor You can define and manage multiple directional point and spot lights with the Light Editor You can modify the light settings turn lights on and off duplicate lights either singly or in a matrix and show or hide light geometry Directional Lights A directional light is infinitely far away from the objects it illuminates All light rays from a directional light are parallel and uniformly illuminate all surfaces in your 3D scene Point Lights A point light is like a tiny light bulb It occupies one point and radiates light equally in all directions Figure 3 1 shows the symbol for a point light EPD Visualizer User Guide 3 51 Using EPD Visualizer Menus View Menu Figure 3 1 Point Light Symbol x Spot Lights A spot light is a type of point light You can specify a sharp edged spot light a variable focus flashlight or a fuzzy edged flood light When a spot light displays the vertex

EPD .Visualizer User Guide - John J. Jacobs

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents